Nokia ESERIES E63 User Manual
Nokia E63 User Guide Issue 2.0
DECLARATIO N OF CONFORMI TY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION decl ares that this RM-450 product is in co mpliance with the essential req uirements and other relev ant provisions of Directive 1999/ 5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/. é 2010 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Con necting People, Nokia Origin al Enhancements l ogos, Eseries, Nokia E6 3, Ovi, and Visual Radio are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other pr oduct and company names mentioned herein may b e trademark s or trad enames of their respective owners. Reproduction, transfer, di stribution , or storage of par t or all of the contents in this document in any form without t he prior written permission of Nokia is prohib ited. Nokia operates a policy of continuo us development. Nok ia reserves the right to make chang es and improvements to any of the prod ucts descri bed in th is document without prior notice. This product inclu des software licensed fro m Symbian Software Ltd é1998-2009. Sy mbian and Sy mbian OS are tradema rks of Symbian Ltd. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps softwar e are é1996-2009 The FreeType Project. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in conne ction with information wh ich has been encoded in compli ance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a cons umer engaged in a personal and no ncommercial activity and (ii) f or use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No l icense is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional informatio n, including that related to promotional , internal, and commercial uses, ma y be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http: //www.mpegla.com. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERM ITTED BY APPL ICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CI RCUMSTANCES SHALL NOK IA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSOR S BE RESPONSIBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF D ATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUE NTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT AR E PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS RE Q U I RE D B Y A P PL I C A B L E L A W , N O W A RR A N T I E S OF A N Y K I N D, E I T H E R E X P RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITE D TO, THE IMP LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNE SS FOR A PARTICULA R PURPOSE, A RE MADE IN RELATI ON TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT . NOKIA RE SERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCU MENT OR WITHDRA W IT AT ANY TI ME WITHOUT PR IOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of software in the de vice is prohibited to the extent permitted by a pplicable law. Insofa r as this user gu i de contains any limitati ons on Nokia's representations, wa rranties, damages a nd liabilities, such limi tations shall l ikewise limit any represe ntations, warra nties, da mages and liabilities of Nokia's l icensors. The third-party applications provided wit h your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entities n ot affili ated with or related to Nok ia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellectual property rights to the third-party a pplications. As such, No kia does not take a ny r esponsibility for en d-user support,
functionality o f the applications, or the info rmation in the a pplications or these materia ls. Nokia does n ot provide a ny warran ty for the third-party applica tions. BY USING THE APPL ICATIONS YOU ACKN OW LEDGE THAT THE A PPLICATIONS ARE PROV IDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, E XPRES S OR IMPLIE D, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FU RTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA N OR ITS AFFILIATES MA KE ANY REPRESENT ATION S OR W ARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN CLUDING B UT NOT LIMITE D TO WARRANTIES OF TI TLE, MERCHAN TABILITY OR FI TNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOSE , OR THAT TH E APP LICATIONS WILL N OT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGH TS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. The availability of p articular products an d applications and services for these pro ducts may vary by region. Pleas e check with your Nokia dealer for details and avail a bility of language options. This device may cont ain commodities, technology or software s ubject to export laws and regula tions from th e US and other countri es. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited . FCC/INDUSTRY CA NADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interferen ce (for example, when usin g a telephone in clo se proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canad a can require you to stop using yo ur telephone if such inter ference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, co ntact your local service fa cility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fo llowing two conditions: (1) This device ma y not cause harmful interferen ce, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includi ng interfer ence that may cause und esired operation. Any changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by Nokia co uld void the user's authority to operate this equipment. /Iss u e 2.0 EN
Contents Safety................. ................... .............. ............... ..7 About your device......................... ................................ .............7 Network services................................. .................... ..................8 Find help......... ............ ............... .............. .............9 Support.......................................................................................9 Remote configuration...............................................................9 Update software using your PC..............................................10 Further information................................. .................... ...........10 Key features........................ .................. .............11 Keys and parts..................... ............................... 12 Set up your device..............................................14 Insert the SIM card and battery... ................................... ........14 Charge the battery..... .............................. ........................... .....15 Insert the memory card....................................................... ...15 Eject the memory card............................................................15 Connect the headset....... .......................... ........................ .......16 Attach the wrist strap..................... ..................... ................ ...16 Antennas......... .................... .................... ..................... .............16 Get started............. ............ ................. ................ 17 First start-up..... ................... .................. .................. ............... ..17 Welcome.......... .................................... ................................. ....17 Settings wizard. .......................................................................17 Home screen............................ ....................... ...................... ...18 Menu.........................................................................................18 Transfer content from other dev ices ........................ ............19 Display indicators.............................................................. ......20 Common actions in several a pplications........... ....................21 Lock the keys................. ................................ ...........................22 Volume control........................... .............................. ...............23 Write text............................................ .................................... .23 New from Eseries........ ......... ........ ........... .......... .24 Access tasks quickly................. ......................................... .......24 Home screen......................... ............................. ......................2 4 One-touch keys............................................................. ...........25 Nokia Calendar for Eseries................................................. .....26 Nokia Contacts for Eseries.. ................... .................... ..............27 Multitasking........................................................ .....................29 Flashlight................... .......................................................... .....29 Open Ovi............................................................. ......................29 About Ovi Store........................................................................ 29 Ovi Files................ ...................... ........................ .......................29 About Ovi Contacts........................... .................. .................. ...30 My Nokia...................................................................................30 Phone............................................ .....................32 Voice calls...................................................... ...........................32 Video calls............. .................... ...................... .................... ......33 Net calls....................................................................................34 Speed dialling................................................... .......................36 Call divert.............. ........................... ......................... ................36
Call barring................................................................... ............37 Bar net calls........ ............................................ ..........................37 Send DTMF tones........ ............................... ............................ ...37 Voice mail.................................................... .............................38 Voice aid...................................................................................38 Voice commands............. .......................... ........................ .......38 Push to talk................................................................... ...........40 Log............................................................. ...............................41 Messaging................... ............... ............. ...........43 Messaging folders............. ....................................... ................43 Organise messages... .................................. .............................44 Message reader........................ ................................................44 Speech............. .................... ...................... ..................... ...........44 E-mail messages......................................................................44 Text messages. .................. ................... ............... ................... ..48 Multimedia messages ............. ................. .............. .............. ...50 Instant messaging. ................................................. .................53 Special message types............................... ...................... .......55 Cell broadcast..................... .................................... ..................56 Messaging settings. .................................................................56 Internet..............................................................61 Web..................... ..................................................... .................61 Browse the intranet ........................................... ....................63 Internet access points..................... ........................................63 Connect PC to web...................................................................65 Travelling......................................... ..................66 About GPS and satellit e signals..............................................66 Positioning settings............................................. ...................67 Maps............................. ........................................... ..................67 GPS data.......... ......................... ............................ .....................71 Landmarks................ .................................... ............................71 Media................ ........................ ...................... ....73 Camera.......................... ..................................... .......................73 Nokia Podcasting...................... .......................................... .....74 Music player.............. .................. .................. ................... .........75 Share online.............................................................................77 Recorder................................................ ...................................77 Gallery................................................ .......................................78 RealPlayer.................. .................................. .............................79 Flash player..............................................................................80 Radio..................................... ............................................ ........80 Internet radio.... ..................... ................. ....................... ..........82 Personalisation.............................. ....................84 Profiles............................ .................................... ......................84 Select ringing tones.. ................... .................... .................. ......84 Customise profiles...................................................................84 Personalise the home screen..................... ............. ...............8 5 Change the display theme......................................................85 Download a theme..................................................................86 3-D ringing tones. ..................................... ...............................86 Noki a Of fic e Too ls... ........... ........... ........... ........ ..87 Active notes.................... ................................. ......................... 87 Calculator..... .......................... ........................... ........................87 File manager.................................................................... ........88 Quickoffice....................... ............................. ........................... .88 Converter..................................................................................89 Zip manager.............................................................................89 PDF reader................................................................................89
Printing............. ..................................... ...................................90 Clock......................................... .................................................91 Notes............... ............................... .................................. .........91 Nokia Wireless Keyboard........................................................92 Connectivity............. ............. ........... ......... .........93 PC connections................. ........................................................93 Data cable....................... .......................... ................................93 Bluetooth....... ........................... ......................... .......................93 SIM access profile................ ......................... ......................... ...96 Wireless LAN.......... ......................... ............................ ..............97 Connection manager...............................................................99 Security and data management.. ................. ....100 Lock the device......................................................................100 Memory.................. ........................... .................... ..................100 Memory card security.................... ........................................101 Encryption..............................................................................101 Fixed dialling......... .................. .................. ................... ..........102 Certificate manager... ........................... .............................. ...103 Security modules...................................................................104 Back up data................................................. .........................104 Application manager... ...................... ....................... .............104 Activation keys......... ........................ ................... ...................106 Data synchronisation........................................................ ....107 Mobile VPN........................................................... ..................109 Settings.............................. ......................... .....111 General settings........ ......................... ............................ ........111 Telephone settings........ ....................... .............................. ...114 Connection settings.... ..................... .................... ..................115 Application settings......................................... .....................120 Shortcuts................................................ ..........121 General shortcuts................................. ................. ................121 Glossary................................. ...........................123 Noki a ori gina l ac cesso ries ............... ............... .126 Practical rules about accessories .................. ................. ......126 Battery............................................................. .......................126 Troubleshooting.............. .......... ........ ......... .....127 Product and safety informatio n.......................129 Index............................................ ....................135
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safe ty. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN RESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical eq uipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. QUALIFIED SERVI CE Only qualified personnel ma y install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESIST ANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 networks and UMTS 850/2100 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. Your devic e supports s everal connectivi ty methods and like computers may be expose d to viruses and other harmful content. Exercise caution with messages, connect ivity requests, browsing, and downloads. Only install and use services and software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate security and prot ection, such as applica tions that are Symbian Sign ed or have pass ed the Java Verified⢠testing. Consider installing antivirus and other security software on your device and any connected computer. Your device ma y have preins talled bookmar ks and links for third-party internet s ites and may allow you to a ccess third- party sites. These are not affi liated with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you access such sites, take pr ecautions for security or content. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 7
Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device mu st be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protect ion may prevent some images, music, and other co ntent from being copied, modified, or transferred. Make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other de vice, read its user guide for detailed safety in structions. Do not connect incompatible products . The images in this guide may di ffer from your device display. Refer to the user guide for ot her important information about your devi ce. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Some features are not available on all networks; other features may require that you make specific arrangements with your serv ice provider to use them. Network services involve tran smission of data. Check with your service provider for detai ls about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provider can explain wha t charges will a pply. Some networks may have limitations tha t affect how you can use some features of this device requ iring netwo rk su pport such as support for specific technologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/ IP protocols and language- dependent charact ers. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your devi ce menu. Your device may also h ave customized it ems such as menu names, menu order, and icons. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 8
Find help Support When you want to learn more about how t o use your product or you are unsure how your device should funct ion, go to www.nokia.com/support , or using a mobile device, nokia.mobi/s upport. You can als o select Menu > Help > Help in your device. If this does not resolve your issue, do one of the following: ⢠Switch off the device, and remove the battery. After about a minute, replace the battery, an d switch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factory settings. ⢠Update your device software. If your issue remains unsolv ed, contact Nokia for repair options. Go to www.nokia-asia .com/repair. Before sending your device for repair, always ba ck up the data in your device. Remote configuration Select Menu > Tools > Device mgr. . With Device manager, you can manage settings , data, and software on your device remotely. You can conn ect to a server, and receive config uration settings for your device. You may receive server profiles and different configuration set tings from your service providers or company information management department. Configuration settings may in clude connection and other setting s used by differe nt a pplications in your device. The available options may vary. The remote configuration con nection is usually started by the server when the device sett ings need to be updated. To create a new server profile, select Options > New server profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configuration message. If not, define the following: ⢠Server name â Enter a name for the configuration server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server password â Enter a passwor d to identify your device to the server. ⢠Session m ode â Select the preferred connection type. ⢠Access point â Select the a ccess point to use for the connection, or create a new access point. Yo u can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start a connecti on. This settin g is available only if you have selected Internet as the bearer type. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the configuration server. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User name â Enter your user ID for the configuration server. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 9
⢠Password â Enter your password for the configuration server. ⢠Allow configuratio n â Select Yes to allow the server to initiate a configuration session. ⢠Auto-accept all requests â Select Yes if you do not want the server to ask for your conf irmation when it initiates a configuration session. ⢠Network auth entication â Select whether to use http authentication. ⢠Network us er name â Enter your user ID for the http authentication. This setting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticatio n to be used. ⢠Network passw ord â Enter your password for the http authentication. This setting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticatio n to be used. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device, select Optio ns > Start configuration . To view the configuration log of the selected profile, select Options > View log . Update software using your PC Nokia Software Updater is a PC application that enables you to update your device software. To update your device software, you need a compatible PC, broadband internet access, and a compatible USB data cab le to conn ect your device to the P C. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updat er application, go to www. nokia-asia.com/ softwareupdate. Further information Instructions in yo ur device To read instructions for th e current view o f the open application, select Options > Help . To browse the help topics and conduct searches, select Menu > Help > Help . You can select categories for which you want to see instructions. Select a category, such as Messaging, to see wha t instructions (help topics) are available. While you are reading the topic, scroll left or right to see the other topics in that category. To switch between the applic ation and help, pr ess and hold the home key. Tutorial The tutorial provides you info rmation about your device and shows you how to use it. Select Menu > Help > Tutorial . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 10
Key features Model number: Nokia E63-3 (RM-450). Hereinafter referred to as Nokia E63. Your new Nokia E63 helps you ma nage your business and personal information. Some of the key features are highlighted here: Move your contact and calendar informat ion from a previous device to your Nokia E63 with Switch . Receiv e and se nd me ssag es whil e on t he move . Browse the intern et with Web . Browse your company intranet with Intranet . Use your device as a flashlight. Stay up-to-date and plan your meetings with Calendar . Manage your business partners and free tim e friends with the new Co ntacts application. Make calls using voice over IP services with Internet tel. . Connect to WLAN with WLAN wizard . Find points of interest with Maps . Switch from business to personal mode. Edit the appearance an d setup of your home screen with Modes . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 11
Keys and parts 1 â Loudspeaker 2 â Earpiece 3 â Navi⢠key (scroll key). Press the scroll key to make a selection, or to scroll left, righ t, up, and down on the display. Press and hold the scroll key to acceler ate the scrolling. Use the scroll key together with the function key to adjust the volume. 4 â Selection key. Press the selection key to perform the function shown above it on the display. 5 â Call key 6 â Microphone 7 â Charger connector 8 â Backspace key 9 â Power/End key. Press the ke y to reject a call, and end active calls and call on hold, or switch between profiles. Press and hold the key to switch the device on or off. 10 â Selection key 11 â Light sensor 12 â Headset connector 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â Calendar key 4 â E-mail key 1 â Function key. To enter digits or cha racters printed on the grey part of the keys, press and hold the function key and é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 12
press the correspondin g key, or press and hold the corresponding key only. 2 â Shift key. To switch be tween the different character cases, press the shift key. 3 â Chr key. When writing text , press the chr key to insert characters not shown on the keypad. 4 â Ctrl key. Acces s the shortcut s behind the ctrl key, such as ctrl C. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 13
Set up your device Set up your Nok ia E63 following these instruct ions. Insert the SIM card and battery 1. To open the back cover of th e device, with the back facing you, unlock the back cover re lease button an d lift the back cover off. 2. If the battery is inserted, li ft the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3. Insert the SIM card. Ensure th e contact area on the card is facing the connectors on the dev ice and that the bevelled corner is facing the top of the device. 4. Insert the ba ttery. Align th e contacts of the battery with the corresponding connectors on the battery compartment and insert in the direction of the arrow. 5. Close the back cover, and lock the back cover release button. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 14
Charge the battery 1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the charger to the device. If the battery is completely discharged, it ma y take a while before the charging indicator starts scrolling. 3. When the battery is fully ch arged, disconnect the charger from the device, th en from the wall ou tlet. Your battery has been precharg ed at the factory, but the charging levels may vary. To reach the full operation time , charge the battery until it ha s been fully charged according to the battery lev el indicator. Tip: You can use older st yle Nokia chargers with your device by attaching the CA-44 ada pter to the old charger. The adapter is ava ilable as a separate enhancement. Insert the memory card Use a memory card to save th e memory on your device. You can also back up information fr om your devi ce to the memory card. The sales package of your device may not include a memory card. Memory cards are availa ble as separate accessories. 1. Open the cover of the memory card slot. 2. Insert the memory card in the slot with the contact ar ea first. Ensure the contact area is facing the connectors on the device. 3. Push the card in until it locks into place. 4. Close the cover. Eject the memory card 1. Press the power key briefly, and select Remov e memory card . 2. Open the cover of the memory card slot. 3. Press the end of the memory card to release it from the memory card slot. 4. Close the cover. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 15
Connect the headset Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the hea dset where it can endanger your safety. Connect the compatible headse t to the headset connector of your devi ce. Attach the wrist strap Thread the wrist strap, an d tighten it. Antennas Your device may have internal and external antennas. Avoid touching the antenna a rea unnecessarily while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Co ntact wi th antennas affects the communication quality and may cause a higher power level during operation and may reduce the battery life. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 16
Get started After you have set up your device, switch it on and start to explore what is new in Eseries. First start-up 1. Press and h old the power key until you feel the device vibrate. 2. If prompted, enter the PIN code or lock code, and select OK . 3. When prompted, ente r the country in which you are located and the current date and t ime. To find your country, enter the first letters of the country name. It is important to select the correct country, because scheduled calendar entries ma y change if you change the country later and the new count ry is located in a different time zone. 4. The Welcome application open s. Select from the options, or select Exit to close the applicat ion. To configure the settings in your device, use the wizards available in the home scr een and the Settings wizard application. When you switch the device on, it may recognise the SIM card provider and configure some settings automatically. You can also contact your service provi der for the correct settings. You can switch the device on without inserting a SIM card. The device starts up in the offli ne profile, and you cannot use the network-dependen t phone functions. To switch the device off, press and hold the powe r key. Welcome When you switch on your de vice for the first time, the Welcome application opens. Select from the following: ⢠Tutorial provides information about your device and shows you ho w to use it. ⢠Switch enables you to transfer content, such as contacts and calendar ent ries, from a compatible No kia device. See "Transfer content between devices" , p. 19 . ⢠E-mail se ttings h elps you configur e e-mail settings. ⢠Sett. wizard help s you configure various settings. See "Settings wizard" , p. 17 . To open the Welcome application later, select Menu > Help > Welcome . The available options ma y vary. Settings wizard Select Menu > Tools > Sett. wizard . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 17
Settings wizard configures your device for settings based on your network operator information. To use these se rvices, you may have to contact your service provider to activate a data connection or other services. The availability of the differe nt settings items in Set tings wizard depends on the feature s of the devi ce, SIM ca rd, wireless service provider, and th e availabi lity of the data in the Settings wizard da tabase. If Settings wizard is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in th e menu of your device. To start the wizard, select Start . When you use the wizard for the first time, you are gu ided through the set tings configuration. If there is no SIM card inserte d, you need to select the home country of your service provider, and your service provider. If the country or service pr ovider suggested by the wizard is not correct, se lect the correct one from the list. If the settings configu ration is interrupted, the settings are not defined. To access the main view of the Se ttings wizard aft er the wizard has finished the settings configuration, select OK . In the main view, select from the following: ⢠Operato r â Configure operator-s pecific settings such as MMS, internet, WAP, and streaming settings. ⢠E-mail setup â Configure e-ma il settings. ⢠Push to talk â Configure push -to-talk settings. ⢠Video sharing â Configure video sharing settings. If you are not able to use Settings wizard, vis it the Nokia phone settin gs web site. Home screen From the home screen you can qu ickly access features t hat you use the most, and see at a glance any missed calls or new messages. You can define two separate home screens for different purposes, such as one screen to show your business e-mail and notifications, and a nother to s h o w y o u r p e r s o n a l e - m a i l . This way, you do not h ave to see business-related messages outside office hours. Menu Select Menu . The menu is a sta rting point from which you can open all applications in the device or on a memory card. The menu contains applications and folders, which are groups of é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 18
similar applications. All applic ations you install in the device yourself are by default saved in the Installations folder. To open an application, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view the applications in a list, select Options > Change Menu view > List . To return to the grid vi ew, select Options > Change Menu view > Grid . To view the memory consumpt ion of different applications and data stored on the device or memory card and to check the amount of free memory, select Optio ns > Memory details . To create a new folder, select Options > New folder . To rename a new folder, select Options > Rename . To rearrange the folder, scroll to the applica tion you want to move, and select Options > Move . A check mark is placed beside the application. Scroll to a new location, and select OK . To move an application to a different folder, scroll to the application you want to move, and select Options > Move to folder , the new folder, and OK . To download applications from the web, select Options > Download applications . To switch between several open applications, press and hold the home key. Select an appl ication, and press the scroll key to switch to it. Leaving applications running in the background increases the de mand on batte ry power and reduces the battery life. Transfer content from other devices Select Menu > Tools > Switch . You can transfer content, such as contac ts, from a compatible Nokia device to your new Eseries device using different connectivity methods . The type of content that can be transferred depends on the devi ce model. If the other device supports synchronisation, you can also synchronise data between the two devices or send data from this device to the other device. When you transfer data from your previous device, it may require you to insert the SIM card. Your new Eseries device does not need a SIM card when transferring data. Content is copied from the memo ry of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. Copying time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. You can al so cancel and continue later. The necessary steps for data transfer may var y depending on your device, and whether you have interrupted data transfer earlier. The items that you ca n transfer vary depending on the other device. Transfer content between devices To connect the two devices, follow the instructions on the display. For some device models, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a message. To install Switch on é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 19
the other device, open th e message, and follow the instructions on the display. On your new Eseries device, select the content you want to copy from th e other device. After the data transfer, you ca n save the shortcut with the transfer settings to the main view to repe at the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select Op tions > Shortcut settings . View transfer lo g A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the transfer details, scroll t o the transferred item in the log, and select Options > Details . To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a transfer shortcut, if available, in the main view, and select Options > View log . Any unresolved transfer conflicts are also displayed in the log view. To start solving conflicts, select Options > Solve conflicts . Synchronise, retrieve, and send data If you have previously transferred data to your device with the Switch application, select from t he following icons in the Switch main view: Synchronise data with a co mpatible device if the other device supports synchronisation . With synchronisation, you can keep the data up-to- date in both devices. Retrieve data from the other device to your new Eseries device. Send data from your new Eseries device to your other device. Display indicators The device is being used i n a UMTS network (network service). The battery charge level. The higher the bar, the stronger the charge in the battery. You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in th e remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder in Messaging. You have one or more missed phone calls. The keys of the device are locked. An alarm is active. You have selected the Silent profile, and the device does not ring for an incoming call or message. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 20
Bluetooth connectivity is acti ve. Data is being transm itted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indica tor is blinking, your device is tryi ng to conn ect with another dev ice. A GPRS packet data connec tion is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. An EGPRS packet data connection is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. A UMTS packet data connect ion is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs (WLAN), and a WL AN is available. A WLAN connection is active in a network that does not have encryption. A WLAN connection is active in a network that has encryption. Your device is connected to a computer with a USB cable. The second phone line is being used (network service). All calls are forwarded to another number. If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A headset is connected to the devi ce. The connection to a headset with Bluetooth connectivity has been lost. A hands-free car kit is connected to the devi ce. A loopset is connected to the device. A text phone is connected to the device. Your device is synchronising. You have an ongoing pu sh-t o-talk connection. Your push-to-talk connection is in do not disturb mode, because the ring ing type of your device is set to Beep once or Silent , or you have an incoming or ongoing phone call. In th is mode, you can not make PTT calls. Common actions in several applications You can find the following ac tions in severa l applications: é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 21
To change the profile, or switch off or lock the device, press the power key briefly. If an application consists of several tabs (see figure), open a tab by scrolling right or left. To save the se ttings that you have configured in an application, select Back . To save a file, select Options > Save . There are different saving options depending on the application you use. To send a file, select Optio ns > Send . You can s end a file in an e-mail or multimedia message, or using different connectivity meth ods. To copy, press and hold th e shift key, and select the text with the scroll key. Press and hold the shift key, and select Copy . To paste, scroll to where you want to paste the text, press and hold the shift key, and select Paste . This met hod may not work in applications that ha ve th eir own copy and paste commands. To select different items, s uch as messages, files, or contacts, scroll to the item you want to select. Select Op tions > Mark/ Unmark > Mark to select one item or Options > Mark/ Unmark > Mark all to select all items. Tip: To select almost all items, first select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark all , then select the items you do not want, and Options > Mark/Unmark > Unmark . To select an object (for ex ample, an attachment in a document) scroll to the object so that square ma rkers appear on each side of the object. Lock the keys When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency nu mber programmed into your device. The keypad of your device locks automati cally to prevent the keys from being accidentally pressed. To change the time period after which the keypad is locked, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phon e and SIM card > Keypad autolock period . To lock the keys manually in th e home screen, press the left selection key and the function key. To lock the keys manually in th e menu or in an open application, press the power key briefly, and select Lock keypad . To unlock the keys, press the left selection key and the function key. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 22
Volume control To adjust the earpiece volume during a phone call, scroll left or right. To adjust the volume of the media applications, press and hold the function key, and scroll up or down. Write text The input methods provided in the device m ay vary according to different sales markets. Write text with the keyboard Your device has a full keyboard. To insert punctuation marks, press the corresponding key or a combination of keys. To switch between the different ch aracter cases, press th e Shift key. To insert digits or characters printed at th e top of keys, press and hold the corresponding ke y, or press and hold the function key and press th e corresponding key. To erase a character, press the backspace key. To erase several characters, pres s and hold the backspace key. To insert characters and symb ols that are not shown on the keyboard, press the Chr key. To copy text, press and hold the Shi ft key, and scroll to highlight the word, phrase, or li ne of text you want to cop y. Press Ctrl C. To insert the text into a document, move to the correct place, and press Ctrl V. To change t he writin g language, o r to activa te predictive tex t input, select Options > Input options and from the available options. Predictive text input To activate predictive text in put, press the function ke y spacebar and select Predictive text > On . The indicator is shown on the display. When you start writing a word, your device suggests poss ible words. When the correct word is found, scroll right to confirm it. While writing, you can also scroll down to access a list of sugg ested words. If the desired word is on the list, scroll to it and press the scroll key. If the word you are writing is not in the dictionary of the device, the device suggests a possible word, while the word you were writing is shown above the sugge sted word. Scroll up to select your word. The wo rd is added to the dictionary when you start writing the next word. To switch predictive text input off, press the functi on key spacebar and select Predictive text > Off . To define the settings for text input, select O ptions > Input options > Settings . To change the writing lan guage, select Opti ons > Input options > Writing language . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 23
New from Eseries Your new Eseries device contains new versions of the Calendar and Contac ts applications, as well as a new h ome screen. You can also access the Ovi services wi th your device. Access tasks quickly Whenever you see the icon on the home screen, or in the Contacts or Calendar applications, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. When yo u navig ate in these applications, to go back to the previous level, scroll left. Home screen From the home screen you can quickly access feat ures that you use the most, and see at a glance any missed calls or new messages. Navigate in the home screen To access the home screen, press the home key briefly. The home screen consists of: ⢠application shortcuts (1) To access an applic ation qu ickly, scroll to its shortcut and press the scroll key. ⢠information area (2) To check an item displayed in the information area, scroll to the item and press the scroll key. ⢠notifications (3) To view the notifications, scroll to a box. Each box is only visible if ther e are items in it. To hide the boxes, press the backspace key. Work on the home screen To check your received mes sages, scroll to the message box in the notifi cation area. To re ad a message, scroll to it and press the scroll key. To access other tasks, scroll right. To view your missed calls, scroll to the calls box in the notification area. To return a call, scroll to a call and press the call key. To send a text message to a ca ller, scroll to a call, é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 24
scroll right and select Send text msg. from the list of available actions. To listen to your voice mail, scroll to the voice mail box in the notification area. Scroll to the desired voice mailbox and press the call key to call it. Switch home screens You can define t wo home screen modes for different purposes, such as one mode to show your business e-mail and notific ations, and an other to show your personal e-mail. This way, you do not ha ve to see busine ss-related messages outside office hours. Your operator may have set you a third home screen with operator-specific items. To change from one home screen mode to another, scroll to and press the scroll key. One-touch keys With the One-touch ke ys you can access applica tions and tasks quickly. Each key has been assigned an application and a task. To change these, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisati on > On e-touch keys . Your network operator may have assigned applications to the keys, in which case yo u cannot change them. 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â Calendar key 4 â E-mail key Home key To access the home screen, press the home key briefly. Press the home key briefly again to access the menu . To view the list of active appl ications, press the home key for a few seconds. When the lis t is open, press the home key briefly to scroll the list. To open the selected application, press the home key for a few seconds, or press the scroll key. To close the selected applic ation, press the backsp ace key. Leaving applications running in the background increases t he demand on battery power an d reduces the battery life. Contacts key To open the Contacts appli cation, press the contac ts key briefly. To create a new contact, press th e contacts key for a few seconds. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 25
Calendar key To open the Calendar applic ation, press the calendar key briefly. To create a new meeting entry, press the calendar key for a few seconds. E-mail key To open your default mailbox, press the e-mail key briefly. To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key for a few seconds. Nokia Calendar for Eseries Select Menu > Office > Calendar . Create and view scheduled ev ents and appointments, and switch between differe nt calendar views. Calendar views You can switc h between the following views: ⢠Month view shows the curr ent month and the calendar entries of the selected day in a list. ⢠Week view shows the events for the selected week in seven day boxes. ⢠Day view shows the events for the selec ted day grouped into time slots according t o their starting time. ⢠To-do view shows all to-do items. ⢠Agenda view shows the events for the selected day in a list. To change the view, select Option s > Change view and th e desired view. Tip: To open the week view, scroll to a week number and press the scroll key. To move t o the nex t or the pr evious day in month, week, day, and agenda views, scroll right or left. To change the default view, select O ptions > Settings > Default view . View calendar information In the mont h view, calendar entries are marked with a triangle. Anniversary entries are also marked with an exclamation mark. The entries of the selected day are shown in a list. To open calendar entries, open a calendar view, scroll to an entry, and press the scroll key. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 26
Create calendar entries You can create the following types of calendar entries: ⢠Meeting entries remind you of events that ha ve a specific date and ti me. ⢠Memo entries are related to the whole day but not to a specific time of the day. ⢠Anniversary entries remi nd you of birthdays and special dates. They refer to a cert ain day but not a specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. ⢠To-do entries remind you of a task tha t has a due date but not a specific time of the day. To create a calendar entry, scroll to a date, select Options > New entry and the entry type. Tip: To create a meeting en try, start entering the subject. Create meeting, memo, anniversa ry, or to-do entries 1. Enter the subject . 2. For meeting entries, enter the start and end times, or select All-day event . 3. For meeting and memo entries , enter the start and end dates. For anniversary entries, enter the date and for to- do entries, enter the due date. 4. For meeting entries, enter the location. 5. For meeting, anniversa ry, and to-do entries, you can set an alarm. 6. For recurring meeting entrie s, set the recu rrence time. 7. For to-do entries, set the priority. To set the priorit y for meeting entries, select Options > Prior ity . 8. For memo, a nniversary, and to-d o entries, define h ow the entry is handled during synchronisation. Select Private to hide the entry from viewers if the calendar is available online, Public to make the entry visible to viewe rs, or None to not copy the entry to yo ur computer. 9. Enter a description. To send the entry, select Options > Send . Calendar settings Select Options > Settings . To change the alarm tone, select Calendar alarm tone . To change the view displayed when you open the calendar, select Default view . To change the first day of the week, select Week starts on . To change the week view title, s elect Week view title and Week number or Week dates . Nokia Contacts for Eseries Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts . Save and update c ontact informat ion, such as ph one numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing tone or a th umbnail é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 27
image to a contact. Y ou can also create contact groups, w hich allow you to communicate with s everal contacts at the s ame time, and send c ontact infor mation (bus iness cards) to o r receive it from compatible devices. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. T o cl ose the list, scroll left. Add contacts Select Options > New contact , and enter the conta ct's information. To copy a contact's information from the memory card, select Options > Copy > From memory card . Contact groups Select each contact you wa nt to add to the contact group, select Options > Mark/Unma rk > Mark to mark it, select Options > Group > Add to group > Create new group > Group name , and en ter a name for the grou p. If you want to make conference calls to the group, define als o the following: ⢠Conf. se rvice nu mber â Enter the conference call service number. ⢠Conf. servi ce ID â Enter the conference call ID number. ⢠Conf. servi ce PIN â Enter the conference call PIN code number. To make a conference call to the group, select the group, scroll right, and select Call conf. service from the list of available actions. Search for contacts To search for contacts, st art entering the contact's name i n the search field. Manage contacts directories To change the contacts directory, scroll to the top of the names list, press t he scroll key, and select from the list of available directories. To organise contacts directories, select Opt ions > Organise contact lists and a directory. Scro ll up to move it to the desired place. Add ringing tones for contacts You can set a ringing tone for a co ntact or contac t group. The ringing tone sounds when the contact calls you. To add a ringing tone for contacts, open a contact, select Options > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To add a ringing to ne for contact group s, select a contact group, Opt ions > Group > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To remove the assigned ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Change contacts settings Select Options > Settings . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 28
To change the way the contacts' names a re displayed, select Name display . To select which contacts dire ctory opens when you open the Contacts application, select Default contact list . Multitasking You can have several application s open at the same time. To switch between act ive applications , press and ho ld the home key, scroll to an applicat ion, and press the sc roll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Example: When you have an acti ve phone call and want to check your calendar, press the home key to access the menu, and open the Calendar application. The phone call remains active in the background. Example: When you are writing a mes sage and want to check a web site, press the home key to access the menu, and open the Web application. Select a bookmark or enter the web address manually , and select Go to . To return to your mess age, press and hold the home key, scroll to the message and press the scroll key. Flashlight The camera flash can be used as a flashlight. To switch the flashlight on or off, in the ho me screen, press and hold the space bar. Do not point the flashlight at anyone's eye. Open Ovi Ovi is your door to different Nokia services. For a tour and more information, see www.ovi.com. About Ovi Store In Ovi Store, you can download mobile games, applications, videos, im ages, and ring ing tones to your device. So me of the items are free of charge; others you need to purchase using your credit card or through your phone bill. Ovi Store offers you content that is compa tible with yo ur mobile device and relevant to your tastes and locat ion. The content in Ovi Store is sorted into the following categories: ⢠Recommended ⢠Games ⢠Personalisation ⢠Applications ⢠Audio & video Ovi Files With Ovi Files, you can use your Nokia E63 to access content on your computer if it is switched on and connected to the internet. You will need to inst all the Ovi Files application on every computer you want to access with Ovi Files. You can try out Ovi Files for a limited trial period. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 29
With Ovi Files, y ou can: ⢠Browse, search, and view your images. You do not need to upload the images to the we bsite but you can access your computer content with your mobile device. ⢠Browse, search, and view your file s and documents. ⢠Transfer songs from your computer to your de vice. ⢠Send files and folders from your computer without moving them to and from your device first. ⢠Access files on your computer even when your computer is switched off. Just choose which folders and files you want to be available, and Ovi Fi les automatically keeps an up-to-date copy stored in a protected, online storage for access even when your co mputer is switched off. For support, see files.ovi.com/support . About Ovi Contacts With Ovi Contacts, you can stay con nected to the people who matter most. Sear ch for contacts, and discov er friends in the Ovi community. Keep in touch with your friends - chat, share your location and pr esence, and easily follow what your friends are up to and where they are. You can even chat with friends who use Google Talkâ¢. You can also sync your cont acts, calendar, and oth er content between your Nokia device an d Ov i.com. Your important information is stored and kept up-to-date both in your device and on the web. With Ovi Contacts , you can make your contacts list dyna mic and be confident that you r contacts are stored on Ovi.com. You must have a Nokia Account to use the service. Create an account on your mobile device, or visit www.ovi.com on your PC. Using Ovi Contacts may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data th rough your service provider's network. Contact your network service provider for information about data transmission charges. My Nokia My Nokia is a free service that regularly sends you text messages containing t ips, tricks, and sup port for your Nokia device. It also allows you to browse the My Nokia WAP site where you ca n find details about N okia devices and download tones, graphics, g ames, and applic ations. To use the My Nokia service, it mus t be available in your country and supported by your service provider. You must sign up to use the service. Call charges apply wh en you send messages to sign up or unsubscri be. For terms and conditions, see the documentation supplied with your device, or www. nokia.com/mynokia. To start using My Nokia: 1. Select Menu > Help > My Nokia . 2. Select Sign up to My Nokia . 3. Read the information on the display, and select Accept . My Nokia sends you a text mes sage with further instru ctions. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 30
To launch the My Nokia WAP site in your browser, select My Nokia > Go to My Nokia mo bile . To unsubscribe from the My Nokia service, select My Nokia > Unsubscr ibe . To see the inst ructions for My Nokia, select My Nokia > Instructions . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 31
Phone To make and receive calls, the device must be switched on, the device must have a valid SI M card installed, and you must be located in the service area of a cellular network. To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. To connect to a net call service, your device must be in the coverage of a connection ne twork, such as a WLAN access point. Voice calls Note: The actual invoice for ca lls and ser vices from your service provider may vary, de pending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Answer a call To answer a call, press the ca ll key. To reject a call, press the end key. To mute the ringing tone inst ead of answering a call, select Silence . When you have an active call a nd the call waiting function (network service) is activated, press the call key to answer a new incoming call. The first ca ll is put on hold. To end the active call, press the end key. Make a call To make a call, enter the ph one number, including the area code, and press the call key. Tip: For international calls, add the character that replaces the international access code, and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading 0, if necessary), and phone number. To end the call or cancel the call attempt, pres s the end key. To make a call using the saved cont acts, press the conta cts key. Enter the first letters o f the name, scroll to the name, and press the call key. See "Nokia Contacts for Eseries" , p. 27 . To make a call using the log, pr ess the call key to view up to 20 numbers that you last called or attempted to call. Scroll to the desired number or name, and press the call key. See "Log" , p. 41 . To adjust the volume of an ac ti ve call, scroll right or left. To switch from a voice ca ll to a video call, select Options > Switch to video call . T he device ends the voice call and makes a video call to the recipient. Make a conference call 1. To make a conference call, enter a participant's phone number, and press the call key. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 32
2. When the participant an swers, select Options > New call . 3. When you have made a phone call to all the participants, select Options > Conference to merge the calls into a conference call. To mute the microphone of your device during the call, select Options > Mute . To drop a participant from the conference call, scroll to the participant, and select Op tions > Con ference > Drop participant . To discuss priv ately with a conf erence call participant, scroll to the participant , and select Options > Conference > Private . Video calls T o b e a b l e t o m a k e a v i d e o c a l l , y o u n e e d t o b e i n t h e c o v e r a g e of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network operator or service provider. While talking, you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the reci pient of the call, if the recipient has a compatible mo bile phone. The v ideo image capture d by the camer a in your d evice i s shown to the vi deo call recipient. A video call ca n only be made between two parties . Make a video call To make a video call, enter th e phone number or select the recipient of the call from Contacts, and select Options > Call > Video call . When the video call starts, th e camera of the device is activated. If the camera is alread y in use, video sending is disabled. If the reci pient of the call does not want to send a video back to you, a still image is shown instead. You can define the still image in Menu > Tools > Settings > Ph one > Call > Im age in v ideo call . To disable the sending of aud io, video, or video and audio, select Option s > Disable > Sendin g audio , Sending video , or Sending aud. & vid eo . T o a d j u s t t h e v o l u m e o f a n a c t i v e video call, scroll right or left. To use the loudspeaker for receiving audio, select Options > Activate loud speaker . To mute the loudspeaker and use the earpiece, select Options > Activate handset . To swap the places of images, select Op tions > Change image order . To zoom the image on the display, select Options > Zoom in or Zoom out . To end the video call and make a new voice call to the same recipient, select Options > Switch to voice ca ll . Share a video Use Video sharing (network service) to send vi deo from your mobile device to another compat ible mobile device during a voice call. To use this feature, the device must be within the coverage of a UMTS network. 1. Make a phone call to the selected recipient. You can start sharing a video once the phon e call is established and your device has been registered to the SIP server. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 33
2. To send video from your device, select Options > Share video , and a sharing option, if available. To preview the clip, select Options > Play . 3. Select the recipient from Cont acts, or enter the recipient's SIP address manually to send an invitation to the recipient. Shar ing begins au tomatically when the recipient accepts the video sharing. 4. To end sharing the video, se lect Stop . The voice call continues normally. Receive a video sharing invitation When you receive a video sharing invitation, a message is displayed showing the caller's name or SIP address. To accept the invitation and begin the sharing se ssion, select Accept . To reject the invitation, select Reject . The voice call continues normally. Net calls Select Menu > Communic. > Intern et tel. . Your device supports voice calls over the internet (net calls). Your device attempts emergenc y calls primarily over cellular networks. If an emergency call using cellular networks is not successful, your device attempts a n emergency call through your net call provider. Due to the established nature of cellular telephony, you should use cellular networks for emergency calls, if possible. If you have cellular network coverage available, make sure that your cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls before you attem pt an emergency call. The capability for an emergency call using internet telephony depends on th e availabilit y of a WLAN an d your net call provider's impl ementation of emergency call capabilities. Contact your ne t call provider to check the internet telephony emer gency call capability. With the n et call servic e (netwo rk service), yo u can make and receive calls over the intern et using the VoIP (voice over internet protocol) technology. Net calls can be establish ed between computers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional te lephone. To make or receive a net call, your device must be within WLAN coverage, for example. The availability of the net call service may vary according to your country or area. Create a net call profile Before you can make net calls, you need to create a net call profile. 1. Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings > Connection > SIP settings > Options > New SIP profil e , and enter the required information. To make the login to the net call service automa tic, select Regis tration > Al ways on . Contact your net call provider for the correct settings. 2. Select Back until you return to the Connecti on settings main view. 3. Select Internet tel. > Options > New profile . Enter a name for the profile, and se lect the SIP profile you just created. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 34
To set the created profile to be used automati cally when connecting to the net call service, select Menu > Communic. > Intern et tel. > Preferred profile . To login to the net call service manually, select Registration > When needed in the SIP settings when creating a net call profile. To make secure net calls, ask yo ur service provider for secure net call settings. Th e proxy serv er selected for the net call profile must support se cure net calls. A secure net call is indicated with . Connect to the net call service Select Menu > Communic. > Intern et tel. . To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. If you have selected automati c login, your device automati cally connects t o the net call servi ce. If you login to the service manually, select an available n etwork from the list and Select . The list of networks is re freshed automatically every 15 seconds. To refresh the list manually, select Options > Refresh . Use this option if your WLAN is not shown on the list. To select a net call service for outgoing calls if the device is connected to more than one service, select Optio ns > Change service . To configure new services, select Opt ions > Co nfigure service . This option is shown only if there are services that have not been config ured. To save the netw ork to whi ch you are currently connec ted, select Option s > Save network . The saved networks are marked with a star on the list o f networks . To connect to a net call service using a hidden WLAN, select Options > Use hidden n etwork . To end the connection to a net call service, select Options > Disconnect fr om service . Make net calls You can make a net call from all applications where you can make a regular voice call. For example in Contacts, scroll to the desired contac t, and select Cal l > Internet call . To make a net call in the home screen, enter the SIP address, and press the call key. To set net call as the preferre d call type for outgoing calls, select Menu > Communic. > Internet tel. > Options > Settings > Default call type > Internet call . When your device is connected to a net ca ll service, all calls are made as net calls. Net call service settings Select Options > Settings , scroll to the sett ings of the desired service, and press t he scroll key. To login automatically to the net ca ll service, select Logi n type > A utomatic . I f you use th e automatic log in type for WLANs, the device periodically scans for WLANs, which increases the dema nd on ba ttery power and reduces the battery life. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 35
To login manually to the net call service, select Login type > Manual . To view the networks you have saved for the ne t call service and the networks detected by the ne t call service, select Saved conn. networks . To define the service-sp ecific settings, select Edit service settings . This o ption is only avai lable if a service-specific software plug-in has been inst alled in the device. Speed dialling Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On . Speed dialling allows you to make a call by pressing and holding a number key when in the home screen. To assign a number key to a phone nu mber, select Menu > Communic. > Speed dial . Scroll to the number key (2 - 9) on the display, and select Options > Assign . Select the desired number from Contacts. To delete the phone number assi gned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Remove . To modify a phone number assi gned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Change . Call divert Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call divert . Divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to another phone number. For details, co ntact your service provider. Select to divert voice, data, or fax calls, and select from the following options: ⢠All voice calls , All da ta calls , or All fax calls â Divert all incoming voice, data, or fax calls. ⢠If busy â Divert incoming calls when you ha ve an active call. ⢠If not answered â Divert incoming calls after your device rings for a specified period of time. Select the time you let the device ring before diverting the call in the Delay time: list. ⢠If out of reach â Divert calls when the device is switched off or out of network coverage. ⢠If not available â Activate the last three settings at the same time. This option diverts calls if your device is busy, not answered, or out of reach. To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type and a diverting option, then select Options > Activate > To voice mailbox . To divert calls to another ph one number, select a call type and a diverting option, then select Opti ons > Activat e > To other number . Enter a number in the Number: field, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in Contacts . To check the current diverting s tatus, scroll to the diverting option, and select Options > Check status . To stop diverting calls, scroll to the diverting option, and select Option s > Cancel . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 36
Call barring Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring . You can bar the calls that can be made or received with the device (network service). To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring affects all call types. To bar calls, select from the following: ⢠Outgoin g calls â Prevent making voice calls with your devic e. ⢠Incoming calls â Prevent incoming calls. ⢠International calls â Prevent calling to foreign countries or regions. ⢠Incoming calls when abroad â Prevent incoming calls when outside your home country. ⢠International calls except to h ome country â Prevent calls to foreign countries or re gions, but allow calls to your home country. To check the status of voice call barrings, select the barring option and Option s > Check stat us . To stop all voice call barrings , select a barring option and Options > Cancel all barrings . To change the password us ed fo r barring voice, fax, and data calls, select Option s > Edit barring password . Enter th e current code, then the new code twice. The barring password must be four digits long. For details, contact your service provider. Bar net calls Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Call barring > Internet call barring . To reject net calls from anonymous callers, select Anonymous call barring > On . Send DTMF tones You can send dual tone multi-frequency (D TMF) tones during an active call to control your voice mailbox or other automated phone services. Send a DTMF tone sequence 1. Make a call, and wait un til the other end answers. 2. Select Options > Send DTMF . 3. Enter the DTMF tone sequence, or select a predefined sequence. Attach a DTMF tone sequ ence to a contact card 1. Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts . Open a c ontact, and select Options > Edit > Options > Add de tail > DTMF . 2. Enter the tone sequence. To inse rt a pause of about 2 seconds before or between DTMF tones, enter p . To set the device to send the DTMF tones only after you select Send DTMF during a call, enter w . 3. Select Done . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 37
Voice mail Select Menu > Communic. > Call mailbox . When you open the Voice mail application for t he first ti me, you are asked to enter the number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mail, select Options > Call voice mailbox . If you have configured net call settings to your device and have an internet call mailbox, select Internet call mailbox > Optio ns > Call internet call mbx. to call it. To call your voice mail when in the home screen, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. If you have defined an internet call mailbox, select whether you want to call your voice mail or internet call mailbox. To change the voice mailbox nu mber, select the mailbox and Options > Change number . To change the int ernet call mailbox address, select the mailbox and Options > Change address . Voice aid Select Menu > Tools > Voice aid . The Voice aid application reads text on the display, allowing you to use the basic fu nctions of your device without looking at the display. To hear the entries in your contacts list , select Contacts . Do not use this option if you ha ve more than 500 contacts. To hear information on your missed and received calls, dialled numbers, and frequent calls, select Recent calls . To listen to your v oice messages, select Voice mailbox . To dial a telephone number, select Dialler . To use voice commands to ma ke a phone call, select Voice commands . To have your r eceived messag es read al oud, se lect Message reader . To hear the current time, select Clock . To hear the current date, scroll down. If the Voice aid application is open when a calendar alarm is due, the application reads the calendar alarm cont ent aloud. To hear more options, select Opti ons . Voice commands Select Menu > Tools > Voice comm. . Use voice commands to make p hone calls and launch applications, profiles, or ot her functions on the device. The device creates a voice tag fo r the entries in Contacts and for the functions designated in the Voice commands application. When a voice co mmand is spoken, the device compares the spoken words to the voice tag in the device. Voice commands are not dependent on a speakerâÂÂs voice; however, the voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to reco gnise voice commands better. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 38
Make a call A voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the contact in Conta cts. Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emer gency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. To listen to a voice tag, open a contact, and select Options > Play voice tag . 1. To make a call using a voice command, press and hold the voice key. 2. When you hear the tone or see the visual display, clearly speak the name save d on the contac t. 3. The device plays a synth esised voice tag for the recognised contact in the se lected device language, and displays the name and num ber. After a timeout of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognised contact was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel dialling. If several numbers are saved under t he contac t, the dev ice selects the default number, if it h as been set. Otherwise, the device selects the first available number of the following fields: Mobile , Mobile (home) , Mobile (business) , Te lephone , Tel. (home) , and Tel. (business) . Launch an application The device creates voice tags fo r the applications liste d in the Voice commands application. To launch an ap plication using a voice command, p ress and hold the voice key, and clea rly speak the name of the application. If the recognised application was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel. To add more applications to the li st, select Options > New application . To change the voice command of an application, select Options > Change command , and enter the new command. Change profiles The device creates a voice tag for each profile. To set on a profile using a voice command, press and hold the voice key, and say the name of the profile. To change the voice command, select Profiles > Options > Change command . Voice command settings To switch off the syn thesise r that plays recognised voice commands in the selected device language, select Options > Settings > Synthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition learni ng when the main user of the device has changed, select Remove voice adapts. . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 39
Push to talk Select Menu > Communic. > PTT . Push to talk (PTT) (n etwork se rvice) provides direct voice communication connected with the push of a key. With PTT, you can use y our device as a w alkie-talk ie. You can use PTT to have a conversat ion with one person or with a group of people, or join a channel. A channel is like a chat room: you can call the channel to s ee if anyone is online. The channel call does not alert the other users; the users just join the channel and start sp eaking with each other. In PTT communication, one person talks while the other users listen through the built-i n loudspeaker. Users take turns responding to each other. Beca use only one user can talk at a time, the ma ximum duration of a speech tu rn is limited. For details of the speech turn duration for your network, contact your service provider. PTT settings Select Options > Settings and select User setti ngs to define your preferences for PTT, or Connection settings to change the connection details. Conta ct your service provider for the correct settings. Tip: You may al so receive the settings in a message from the provider of the PTT service. Log in to PTT service If you have set Application start-up on in User s ettings , PTT automatically logs in to the service when started. If not, you must log in manually. To log in to the PTT service manually, select Opti ons > Log in to PTT . When the Ringing type setting of your device is set to Beep once or Silent , or there is an ongoin g phone call, you cannot make or receive PTT calls. Make a PTT call To make a PTT call, select Option s > Contacts , select one or several contacts from the list, and press the voice key. Remember to hold the device in front of you during the call so you can see the display. Th e display informs you when it is your turn to speak. Speak towards th e microphone, and do not cover the loudspeaker with your hands. Pres s and hold the voice key the entire time yo u are talking. When you have finished talking, release the key. To end the PTT call, press the end key. When you receive a PTT call, pr ess the call key to answer the call or the end key to dismiss the call. Created PTT calls Select Options > PTT log > Created PTT , and a call. To make a PTT call to a contact, select Options > Talk 1 . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 40 to 1
To send a request to a contact to call y ou, select Options > Send callback request . To crea te a conta ct, sele ct Options > Save to Contacts . Manage PTT contacts To view, add, modify, delete, or call contacts, select Options > Contacts . A list of names from the Contacts application is displayed with informat ion about their login status. To call a selected contact, select Opt ions > Talk 1 to 1 . To make a group call, sele ct several con tacts and Options > Talk to many . To send the contact a request to call you, select Options > Send callback request . To answer a callback request, select Show to open the callback request. To make a PTT call to the sender, press the voice ke y. Create a PTT channel To create a channe l, selec t Options > New channel > Create new . To join a channel, select the channel you wa nt to talk to, and press the voice key. To invite a user to a channel, se lect Options > Send invitation . To view the currently active users of a channel, select Options > Active membe rs . When you log in to PTT, you are automatically connected to the channels that were acti ve when the application was last closed. Exit PTT To exi t P T T, s el ec t Opti ons > Exit . Select Yes to log out and close the service. Select No if you want to keep the application active in the backgro und. Log Select Menu > Log . Log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and r eceived calls only if the network supports these func tions, the device is switched on and within the network service area. Call and data registers To view recently missed, rece ived, and dialled calls, select Recent calls . Tip: To open Dialled numbe rs when in the home screen, press the call key. To view the approximate durat ion of calls to and from your device, select Call duration . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 41
To view the amount of data t ransferred during packe t data connections, select Packet d ata . Monitor all communications To monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the device, open the general log tab. To view detailed information about a communication event, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. Tip: Subevents, such as a te xt message sent in more than one par t and packet da ta connections, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia mess aging centre, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add the phone number fr om a communication event to Contacts, select Options > Save to Co ntacts , and se lect to create a new contact or to add the phone n umber to an existing c ontact. To copy the number, for example to paste it to a text message, select Options > Copy number . To view a single type of communication event or communication events with one other party, select Options > Filter , and select the desired filter. To erase the contents of the lo g, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Options > Clear log . Call and send messages from Log To call back a caller, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller, and Options > Call . To reply to a caller with a mess age, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller, and select Options > Create message . You can send text messages and multimedia messages. Log settings To set the time for keeping all communication events in the log, select Options > Settings > Log durati on , and the time. If you select No l og , all log contents are permanently deleted. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 42
Messaging Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . In Messaging (network service), you can send and receive text messages, mult imedia messages , audio messages, and e - mail messages. You can als o receive web service m essages, cell broadcast messages, and special messa ges containing data, and send serv ice commands. Before sending or receiving messages, you m ay need to do the following: ⢠Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located in the service area of a cellular network. ⢠Verify that the network supports the messaging feat ures you want to use and that they are activated on your SIM card. ⢠Define the internet access point settings on the device. See "Internet access points" , p. 63 . ⢠Define the e-mail account settin gs on the device. See "E- mail account settings" , p. 58 . ⢠Define the text message setting s on the device. See "Text message setting s" , p. 57 . ⢠Define the multimedia message sett ings on the device. See "Multimedia messa ge settings" , p. 57 . The device may recognise the SIM card provider and automatically configure some of the message settings. If not, you may need to define the settin gs manually; or contact your service provider to configure the settings. Messaging folders Messages and data received using Bluetooth connect ivity are stored in the Inbox folder. E-mail messages are stored in Mailbox . Messages that you have been writing can be stored in the Drafts folder. Messages that are waitin g to be sent are stored in the Outbox folder, and messages that have been sent, excluding Bluetooth messages, are stored in the Sent folder. Tip: Messages are placed in Outbox, for example, when your device is outside ne twork coverage. You can also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the nex t time you connect to your remote mailbox. Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not indicate that the message is received at the intended destination . To request the network to send you a delivery report of the text message s and multimedia messa ges you have s ent (network service), select Options > Settin gs > Text message or Multimedia message > Receive report . The reports are saved in the Reports fold er. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 43
Organise messages To create a new folder to or ganise your me ssages, select My folders > Options > New folder . To rename a folder, select Options > Rename folder . You can only rename folders that you have created. To move a message to anoth e r folder, select the message, Options > Move to folder , the folder, and OK . To sort messages in a specific order, select Optio ns > Sort by . You can sort the message s by Date , Sender , Subject , or Message type . To view the properties of a me ssage, select the message and Options > Message details . Message reader The message reader reads received text and multimedia messages al oud. To play a mess age, press and h o ld the left selection key when you receive a message. To start reading the next messa ge in Inbox, scroll down. To start reading the m essage again, scroll up. I n the beginning of the message, scroll up t o hear the previous m essage. To pause the reading, press th e left selection key briefly. To continue, press the left selection key briefly again. To end the reading, press the end key. Speech Select Menu > Tools > Speech . With Speech, you can set the langu age, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. Edit the voice properties To set the language for the messa ge reader, select Langua ge . To download additional languages to your device, visit the Nokia web site. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice is language- dependent. To set the speaking rate, select Voice settings > Speed . To set the speaking volume, select Voice settings > Volume . To listen to a voice, open the voice tab, select the voice, and select Option s > Play voice . E-mail messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Mailbox . To receive and send e-mail, y ou must have a remote m ailbox service. This service may be o ffered by an internet service provider, a network service provider, or your company. Your device is compliant with in ternet standards SMTP, IMAP4 (revision 1), and POP3, and with different vendor-specific e- mail solutions. Other e-mail pr oviders may offer services with é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 44
different settings or features than those described in this us er guide. For more details, contact your service provider or e- mail service provider. You may be able to install the following e-mails to your device: ⢠Regular POP or IMAP e-mail. You need to con nect to the mailbox, and download the e-mails to your device befor e you can read them. ⢠Nokia Messaging. N okia Messaging is used with different internet e-mail providers, such has Google e-mail services. Nokia Messaging pushes the ne w e-mails t o your d evice as long as the Nokia Messag ing application is open. ⢠Mail fo r Exchan ge. Mail for Ex change is usually used for accessing work e-mails. Your company's IT department may have further instructions on how to install and use Mail for Exchange with your company's e-mail servers. Other e-mail solution s may be available. If you have defined several ma ilboxes, for example a POP or I M A P e - m a i l a n d M a i l f o r E x c h a n g e , s e l e c t o n e o f t h e m a s y o u r default mailbox. That mailbox is used every time you start composing a new e-mail messa ge. To define the default mailbox in Messaging, select Options > Settings > E-mail > Default mailbox and the mailbox. E-mail in home screen To select the mailbox that is shown in the home screen, select Menu > Tools > Settin gs > General > Personalisation > Home screen > Mode settings > Home screen applications > E-mail 1 notifi cation > Mailbox and the e-mail account. To check that th e mailbox that yo u selected can be shown in the home screen, select Menu > Tools > Settin gs > General > Personalisation > Home screen > Mod e settings > Home screen applications > Enabled applications and E-mail 1 notifi cation or E-mail 2 notification . Nokia Messaging The Nokia Messagin g service automatically pushes e-mail from your existing e-mail address to your Nokia E63. You can read, respond to, and organise your e-mails on the go. The Nokia Messaging service works wi th a number of internet e- mail providers that are often used for personal e-mail, such as Google e-mail services. The Nokia Messagin g service may be char geable. For information on possible costs, contact your service provider or the Nokia Messaging service. The Nokia Messaging service must be supporte d by your network and m ay not be av ailab le in all regions. Install the Nokia messaging applic ation 1. Select Menu > Noki a E-mail > New . 2. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 3. Select Connect to allow your device to ac cess the network. 4. Enter your e-mail address an d password. The Nokia Messagin g service can run on your device even if you have installed other e-mail applications, such as Mail for Exchange. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 45
Mail for Exchange With Mail for Exchange, you ca n receive your work e-mail to your devi ce. You can read and re ply to your e-mails, view and edit compatible attachments , view calendar information, receive and reply to meeting requests, schedule meetings, and view, add, and ed it contact inform ation. ActiveSync Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Mail for Exchange can be set up only if your company has Microsoft Exchange Server. In additi on, your company's IT administrator must have activa ted Mail for Exchange for your account. Before starting to set up Mail for Exchange, ensure that y ou have the following: ⢠A corporate e-mail ID ⢠Your office network user nam e ⢠Your office network password ⢠Your network domain name (contact your company's IT departm ent) ⢠Your Mail for Exchange server name (contact your company's IT dep artment) Depending on your company's Mail for Exchange server configuration, you may need to enter other information in addition to those listed. If you do not know the correct information, contact your company's IT department. With Mail for Excha nge, the use of th e lock code may be m a n d a t o r y . T h e d e f a u l t l o c k c o d e o f y o u r d e v i c e i s 1 2 3 4 5 , b u t your company's IT administrator may ha ve set a different one for you to use. You can access and modify the Mail for Exch ange profile and settings in the Messaging setti ngs. Regular POP or IMAP e-mail Your device can download e-ma ils from a POP or IMAP e-mail account. POP3 is a version of the post office protocol that is used to store and retrieve e-mail or in ternet mail messages from a server. IMAP4 is a version of the internet me ssage access protocol that lets you access and mana ge e-mail messages while the messages are still on the e-mail server. You can then choose which messages to download to y our device. Set up POP or IMAP e-mail 1. Go to the home screen, scro ll to the e-mail wizard, and press the scroll key. 2. Select Start e-mail setup . 3. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 4. Select Yes to allow your device to access the ne twork. 5. Enter your e-mail address an d password. 6. Read the information on the display, and select OK to finalise e-mail setup. The na me of your new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main v iew. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 46
Tip: Af ter you have set up a POP or I MAP e-mail, in the Messaging mai n view, sele ct Optio ns > Settings > E-mail and the mailbox to edit the setting s, for example a possible signature, or the name of your mailbox. Connect to a remote mailbox E-mail addressed to you is not automa tically received by yo ur device, but by your remote mailbox. To read your e-mail, you must first connect to the remote mailbox; then select the e- mail messages you wish to retrieve into your device. 1. To retrieve received e-mail messages to your device and view them, select your ma ilbox in the Messaging main view. When the device asks Connect to mailbox? , select Yes . 2. Enter your user name and password, if prompted. 3. Select Option s > Retrieve e-mail > New to retrieve new messages that you have neither read nor retrieved, Selected to retrieve only messages you select from the remote mailb ox, or All to retrieve all messages not previously retrieved. 4. To manage your e-mail offline to save in co nnection costs and work in conditions th at do not allow a dat a connection, select Options > Disconnect to discon nect from the remote mailbox. Any changes you ma ke in the remote mailbox folders while offline, take effect in your remote mailbox the next time you go online and synchronise. Read and reply to e-mail Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. To read a received e-mail, open it from the mailbox. To open an attachment, select Option s > Attachments . Scroll to the attachment, and press the scroll key. To reply only to the sender of an e-mail, select Opt ions > Reply > To se nder . To reply to all recipients of an e-mail, select Options > Reply > To all . Tip: If you reply to an e-mail that con tains attached files, the attachments are not included in the rep ly. If you forward the received e-mai l, the attachments are included. To forward an e-ma il, select Options > Forward . To attach a file to an e-mail messa ge, select Optio ns > Insert and the attachment you want to add. To delete an attachment from an e-mail that you are sending , select the attachment and Opti ons > Remove . To set the message priority, select Options > Sending options > Priority . To set the sending time for th e e-mail message, select Options > Sending optio ns > Send message . Select Immediately , or select When conn. avail. if yo u are working offline. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 47
To call the sender of the e-mail message, if the sender can be found in Contacts, select Options > Call . To reply to the sender of th e e-mai l with an audio message or multimedia message, select Opti ons > Create message . Write and send e-mail 1. To write an e-mail, select New message > E-mail . 2. Select Options > Add recipient to select the recipients' e-mail addresses from Cont acts, or enter the e-mail addresses in the To field. Use a semicolon to separate entries. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipient s, or the Bcc field t o send a bl ind cop y to reci pient s. 3. In the Subject field, enter the subject o f the e-mail. 4. Enter your e-mail message in the text area, and select Options > Send . Delete messages To free up memory space on your device, regularly delete messages from th e Inbox and Sent folders, and delete retrieved e-mail messages. To delete e-mail from the device only, and keep the original on the server, select Options > Delete > Phone (h eader remains) . To delete e-mail both from th e device and the remote server, select Options > Delete > Phone and server . To cancel the deleting, select Options > Restore . Subfolders in your remote e-mail If you create subfolders in yo ur IMAP4 mailboxes on a remote server, you can view and manage these folders with your device when you subscribe to them. You can only subscribe to folders in your IMAP4 mailboxes. To view folders in your IMAP4 mailbox, establish a connection, and select Opti ons > E-mail settings > Retrieval se ttings > Fold er subscriptions . To view a remote folder, select a folder and Options > Subscribe . Every time you go online, the subscribed folders are updated. This may take some time if the folders are large. To update the list of fold ers, select a folder and Options > Update fo lder list . Text messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Write and send text messages Your device supports text messag es beyond the limit for a single message. Longer messag es are sent as two or more messages. Your service provid er may charge accordingly. Characters with accent s, ot her marks, or some languag e options take more spa ce, and limit the number of ch aracters that can be sent in a single message. 1. To write a text message, select Ne w message > Text message . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 48
2. In the To field, enter a recipien t's number, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Conta cts. If you enter more than on e number, sepa rate the numbers with a semicolon. 3. Enter the text of the message. To use a templa te, select Options > Insert > Template . 4. Select Option s > Send . Sending options for text messages To select a message ce ntre to send the message, select Options > Sending option s > Message centre in use . To have the network send you delivery reports on your messages (ne twork service), se lect Options > Sending options > Receive report > Yes . To define how long the me ssage centre resends your message (network service) if the first attempt fails , select Options > Sending option s > Message validity . If the recipient cannot be reached wi thin the validity period, the message is delet ed from the message centre. To convert the message t o another format, select Op tions > Sending o ptions > M essage sent as > Text , Fax , Paging , or E-mail . Change this option only if you are sure that your message centre is able to convert text messages into these other form ats. Contact y our service provider. Text messages on the SIM card Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > SIM messages . Text messages may be stored on your SIM card. Before you can view SIM messages, you must copy the messages to a folder in the device. After copying the messages to a folder, you can view them in the folder or delete them from the SIM card. 1. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark every message. 2. Select Options > Copy . 3. Select a folder and OK to begin copying. To view SIM card messages, open the fo lder where you copied the messages, and open a message. View picture messages The appearance of a pictu re message may vary depen ding on the receiving device. To view a picture message, op en the message from the Inbox folder. To view information about the picture message, select Options > Message details . To save a message in a different folder, select Optio ns > Move to folder . To add the sender of the message to Contac ts, select Options > Save to Contacts . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 49
Forward picture messages 1. To forward the message, open the message from the Inbox folder and select Options > Forward . 2. In the To field, enter a recipien t's number, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Conta cts. If you enter more than on e number, sepa rate the numbers with a semicolon. 3. Enter the text of your messa ge. To use a template, select Options > Insert > Template . 4. Select Option s > Send . Multimedia messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Only devices that have compat ible features can receive and display multimedia m essages. The ap pearance of a message may vary depending on the receivi ng device. A multimedia message (MMS) ca n contain text and objects such as images, sound clips, or video clips. Before you can send or receive multimedia messages on your de vice, you must define the multimedia message settings. Your devi ce may have recognised the SIM ca rd provider and automatically configured the multimedia message settings. If not, use Settings wizard, or contact yo ur service provider for the correct settings. See "Multimedia message settings" , p. 57 . Create and send multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. To create a new message, select New mess age > Multimedia me ssage . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 3. In the Subject field, enter a subject for the message. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Address fields . 4. Enter the text of the message, an d select Options > Insert object to add media objects. You can add objects such as Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . The wireless ne twork may limit th e size of MMS me ssages. If the inserted picture exceed s this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. 5. Each slide of your message can contain only one video or sound clip. To add more slides to your message, select Options > Insert n ew > Slide . To change the order of slides in your message , select Opti ons > Move . 6. To preview a multimedia message before sending it , select Optio ns > Preview . 7. Select Options > Send . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 50
To delete an obj ect from a multimedia message, select Options > Remove . To set the sending options for the current multimedia message, s elect Opti ons > Sending options . Receive and reply to multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain maliciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Tip: If you receive multimedia messages that contain objects unsupported by your device, you cannot open them. Try to send these objects to another device such as a computer, and open them there. 1. To reply to a multimedia mess age, open the message, and select Options > Reply . 2. Select Op tions and To sender to reply to th e sender with a multimedia message, Via text message to reply wit h a text messag e, Via audio message to reply with a n audio message, or Via e-mail to reply with an e-mail message. 3. Enter the text of the message, and select Options > Send . Create pres entations Creating multimedia presentations is not possible if the MMS creation mode setting is s et to Restricted . To change the setting, sele ct Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > MMS creati on mode > Free . 1. To create a presentation, select New message > Multimedia me ssage . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 3. Select Options > Create present ation and a presentation template. A templa te may define which media objects you can include in the presentation, where they appear, and which e ffects are displayed between images and slides. 4. Scroll to the text area and enter the text. 5. To insert images, sound, video, or notes in your presentation, scroll to the co rresponding object area, and select Optio ns > Insert . 6. To add slides, select Insert > New slide . To select the background colo ur for the presentation and background images for di fferent slides, select Options > Background settings . To set effects between images or slides, select Options > Effect settings . To preview the presentation, select Options > Preview . Multimedia presentations may on ly be viewed in compatible devices that support prese ntations. They may a ppear different in different devices. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 51
View presentations To view a presentation, open the multimedia message from the Inbox folder. Scroll to the presentation, and press the scroll key. To pause the presentation, press either selection key. To resume playing the prese ntation, select Opt ions > Continue . If the text or images are too la rge to fit on the display, select Options > Activate scro lling , and scr oll to see the entire presentation. To find phone numbers and e-ma il or web addresses in the presentation, select Options > Find . You ma y use these numbers and addres ses to make calls, send mess ages, or create bookmarks, for example. View and save multimedia attachments To view multimedia messages as complete presentations, open the message, and select Options > Pl ay presentation . Tip: To view or play a multimedia object in a multimedia message, select View image , Pla y sound clip , or Play vide o clip . To view the name and size of an at tachment, open the message, a nd select Options > Objects . To save a multimedia object, select Optio ns > Objects , the object, and Options > Save . Forward a multimedia message Open Inbox, scroll to a multimed ia notification, and press the scroll key. To send the message to a compat ible device without r etrieving it t o your device, select Opti ons > Forward . If the server does not support multimedia message forwarding, this option is not available. 1. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 2. Edit the message, if desired, and select Options > Send . Tip: To edit the delivery settings of the message, select Options > Sending options . Send a sound clip 1. To compose an au dio messa ge, select New message > Audio message . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 3. Select Options > Insert sound clip , and select whether to record a sound clip or select one from Gallery. 4. Select Options > Send . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 52
Sending options for multimedia messages Select New message > Multimedia message > Options > Sending option s and from the following options: ⢠Receive report â Select Yes if you want to receive a notification when the me ssage has been successfully delivered to the recipient. Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging centre tries to send the mess age. If the recipient of a message cannot be reached with in the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. The net work must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximu m amount of time allowed by th e network. ⢠Priority â Set th e sending priority t o High , Normal , or Low . Instant messaging Select Menu > Communic. > IM . Instant messa ging (IM) (netwo rk service) allows you to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service providers maintain IM servers that you can log in to after you register to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their support of features. If IM is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in the menu of your device. Contact your service provider for more information about signing up for IM services and cost s of services . For more information on IM settings, contact your service provider. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the IM service. If not, enter the settings manually. Other instant messaging solution s, such as WindowsLive and Yahoo, may be available in Download. Define IM settings To define the IM application settings, select Opti ons > Settings > Pre ferences . You can, for example, set your screen name and IM alert tones . To converse with an IM user or users, and to view and edit your IM contacts, you must log into an instant messagin g server. To add an IM server, select Options > Settings > Servers . For the correct settings, contact your service provider. To set the server as the one to which your device automatically lo gs in, select Options > Settings > Default server . To define how your device connects to the IM server, select Options > Settings > IM login typ e . To establish a connection between your device and the default server automatically, select Automati c . To automate the connection only when in your home network, select Auto in home netw. To connect to the se rv er when you open the IM application, select On app. start-up . To connect to the server manually, select Manual and log into the server in the IM é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 53
main view by selecting Opt ions > Log in . Enter your user ID and password at the prompt. You can obtain t he user name, password, and other se ttings to log i n from your service provider when you register for the service. Start a conversation Open Conver sations . To search for IM users and user IDs, select IM contacts > Options > New IM contact > Search . You can search by User's name , User ID , Phone number , and E-mail address . To view a conversation, select a participant. To continue the conversa tion, enter your message, and select Options > Send . To return to the conversations list without closing the conversation, select Back . To close the conversation, select Options > End conversation . To start a new conv ersation, select Options > Ne w conversation . You can start a new convers ation with a contact while you are in side an active conversation. However, you cannot have two acti ve conversatio ns with the sa me contact. To insert an image to an ins tant message, select Options > Send image , and se lect the image you w ant to send. To save a conversation p articipant to your IM contacts, select Options > Add to IM contacts . To save a conversation, while in the conversation vi ew, select Options > Record chat . The conversation is saved as a text file that can be opened and vi ewed in the Notes application. IM groups Open IM groups . IM groups is available only if you are logged into an IM server, and the server supports IM groups. To create an IM group, select Options > Create new group . To join an IM group or to continue a group conversation, scroll to the group, and press the scroll key. Enter a message, and select Option s > Send . To join an IM group that is no t on the list, but for which you know the group ID, select Opti ons > Join new group . To leave the IM group, select Options > Leave IM group . To search for IM groups and group IDs, select IM groups > Options > Search . You can search by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID) . To add an IM user to the group, select Options > Add member . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the contact ID. To remove a member from the IM group, select Options > Remove . To provide members with editin g rights to th e group, select Options > Add editor . Se lect a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. IM users with editing rights can edit group settings and invite other users to join the group or ban them from the group. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 54
To remove editing rights from a group member, select Options > Remove . To prevent IM users from joining the group, select Optio ns > Add to banned list . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. To allow a banned user to join the group , select Opti ons > Remove . Block users Select IM contacts > Options > Blocking opti ons > View blocked list . To find a blocked IM user, enter the first letters of the user's name. Matc hing names a ppear in a lis t. To allow receiving messages fr om a blocked IM user, select Options > Unblock . To prevent receiving messages from other IM users, select Options > Block new contact s . Select the IM user from your IM contacts, or enter the user ID. IM application settings Select Options > Settings > Preferences and define the following settings: ⢠Use scre en name â Change the name th at identifies you in IM groups. ⢠Show my availability â Show your online status to all other IM users or your IM contacts only, or hide y our online status. ⢠Allow messages from â Select to receive instant m e s s a g e s f r o m a l l o t h e r I M u s e r s , y o u r I M c o n t a c t s o n l y , o r not to receive messages at all. ⢠Allow invi tations from â Select to receive invitations to IM groups from all IM users, your IM contacts only, or not to receive invitations at all. ⢠Msg. scrolling speed â To adjust the speed at which new messages are d isplayed, scroll left or right. ⢠Sort IM contacts â List your IM contacts alphabetically or by their online status. ⢠Availability reloading â T o u pd ate th e o nli ne st at us of your IM contacts automa tically, select Automatic . ⢠Offline contacts â Select if IM contacts with an offline status are shown in t he IM contacts list. ⢠Own message colour â Select the colour o f the instant messages y ou send. ⢠Received msg colour â Select the colour of the instant messages you receive. ⢠Show date / time i nfo â View the receiving or sending time of each messag e in an IM conversation. ⢠IM alert tone â Select the tone that is played when you receive a new instant message. Special message types Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . You can receive special messages that contain data, such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or internet access or e-mail account settings. To save the contents of these messages, select Options > Save . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 55
Service messages Service messages are sent to your device by service providers. Service messages may contai n notifications such as news headlines, services, o r links throug h which the message content can be downloaded. To define the service message sett ings, select Options > Settings > Servic e message . To download th e service or mess age content, select Options > Download message . To view information about the sender, web address, expiration date, and other de tails of the mes sage before downloading it, select Options > Message details . Send service commands You can send a service reque st message (also known a s a USSD command) to your service provid er and request activation for certain network services. Contact your service provider for the service request text. To send a service reques t message, select Options > Service command . Enter the service request text and select Options > Send . Cell broadcast Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Cell broadcast . With the cell broadcast network service, you can receiv e messages on various topics fr om your service provider, such as weather or traffic conditions in a particular region. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. Cell broadcas t messages cannot be received when the device is in the remote SIM mode. A packet data (GPRS) connection ma y prevent cell broadcast reception. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS (3G) networks. To receive cell broadc ast messages, you may need to set the cell broadcast reception on. Select Options > Settings > Reception > On . To view messages related t o a topic, select the topic. To receive messages related to a topic, select Options > Subscribe . Tip: You can set important topics as hot topics. While the device is in the standby mode, you are notified when you receive a message related to a hot topic. Select a topic, and select Options > Hotmark . To add, edit, or delete topics, select Options > Topic . Messaging settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings . Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and configure the correct text message, multimedia message, é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 56
and GPRS settings automa tically. If not, contact you r service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, or use the Settings wizard a pplication. Text message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: ⢠Message centres â View the available message centres for your device, or create a new one. ⢠Message centre in use â Select a messag e centre to send the message. ⢠Character encoding â Select Red uced support to use automatic character conv ersion to another encoding system when available. ⢠Receive report â Selec t Yes if you want the network to send you delivery reports on your messages (net work service). ⢠Message validity â Sele ct how long the message centre resends yo ur message if th e first attemp t fails (networ k service). If the recipient ca nnot be reached within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre . ⢠Message sent as â Convert the message to anot her format, suc h as Text , Fax , Pa ging , or E-mai l . Change th is option only if you are sure th at your messag e centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your service provider. ⢠Preferre d connect ion â Select the preferred method of connection when sending text messages from your device. ⢠Reply via same centre â S elect whethe r you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message centre number (net work service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multime dia message . Select from the following: ⢠Image size â Select Sm all or Large to scale images in multimedia messages. Select Original to maintain the original image size. ⢠MMS creation mode â Select Restricted to have your device prevent you from including content in multimedia messages that may not be supported by the network or the receiving device. To receive warnings about including such content, select Guided . To create a multimedia message with no restrictions on attachment typ e, select Free . If you select Re stricted , creating m ultimedia presentations is not possible. ⢠Access point in use â Select the default access point to connect to the multimedia messa ge centre. You may not be able to change the default ac cess point if it is preset in your device by your service provider. ⢠Multimed ia retrieval â S elect Always autom atic to receive multimedia messages always automatically , Auto in home netw. to receive notification of a new multimedia message that you can retrieve from the message centre (for exampl e, when you are travelling abroad and are outside your home network), Manual to retrieve multimed ia messages from the me ssage centre é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 57
manually, or Off to prevent r eceipt of any mult imedia messages. ⢠Allow anon. msgs. â Select whether you want to receive messages from unknow n senders. ⢠Receive adverts â Select whether you want to receive messages defined as advertisements. ⢠Recei ve repo rt â Select Yes to have the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia mess age that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending â Select Yes to not send delivery reports from your device for received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging centre tries to send the mess age (network service). If the recipient of a message cann ot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. E-mail account settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail . If you try to edit mailbox setti ngs but have not set up an e- mail account, the mailbox gu ide opens and helps you set up your e-mail ac count. If you have defined a mailbox, scroll to it, and press the scroll key to edit the settings. The settings available for ed iting may vary. Some settings may be preset by your service provider. Connection settings To define the connection setting s, se lect an e-mail account and Options > Edit > Connection se ttings . To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail . To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail . User settings To define the user settings for an e-mail account, select the account, select Options > Edit > User se ttings , and define the following settings: ⢠My name â Enter a name to appear before your e-mail address when you send e-mail. ⢠Reply-to â Select whether you want replies to be redirected to a different address. Select On , and enter the e-mail address to which you want to direct the replies. You can only enter one address to which replies are directed. ⢠Delete e-mails from â Select whether you wa nt to delete the e-mail messages on ly from the device or from both the device and the server. Select Always ask if you want to confirm from where the e-mail should be deleted every time you delete an e-mail. ⢠Send message â Select to send the e-mail imme diately or when a connection is available. ⢠Send copy to self â Select whether you want to sa ve a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and t o the address defined in My e-mail address in the Outgoing e- mail settings. ⢠Include sign ature â Select whether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 58
⢠New e-mail alerts â Select whether you want to be notified of a new received e-mail messa ge with a tone and a note. Retrieval settings To define the retrieva l setting s, select the e-mail account, select Op tions > Edit > Retrieval sett ings , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail to retrieve â Select whether you want to retrieve only the e-mail header inform ation such as sender, subject and date, e-mail, or e-mail wi th atta chments. This setting is for POP3 mailboxes only. ⢠Retrieval amount â Select the number of e-mail messages you want to retrieve from the remote server to your mailbox. ⢠IMAP4 folder p ath â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. This settin g is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. ⢠Folder subs criptions â Subscribe to ot her folders in the remote ma ilbox and retr ieve content from those folders. This setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. Automatic retrieval settings To define the automati c retrieval settings for an e-ma il account, select the account and Options > Edit > Automatic retri eval , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail retrieval â S e l e c t Enabled to retr ieve new e-mail messages au tomatically fro m your remote mailbo x, or Only in home net w. to retrieve new e-mail messages automatically from your remo te mailbox only when you are in your home network and not, for example, travelling. ⢠E-mail notifications â Receive notifications on received e-mail. Service mess age settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Se rvice message . To receive service messages from service providers, select Service mess ages > On . To select how to download services and service message content, select Download messages > Automatically or Manually . If you select Auto matically , you may still need to confirm some d ownloads since not all serv ices can be downloaded automatically. Cell broadcast settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Ce ll broadcast . To receive cell broadcast m essages, select Reception > On . To select the langua ges in which you want to receive cell broadcast messages, select Language . To display new topics in th e ce ll broadcast topics list, select Topic detection > On . Other settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Ot her . Select from the following: ⢠Save sent mess ages â Select whether to store sent messages in the Sent folder. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 59
⢠Number of s aved msgs . â Enter the number of sent messages to save. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memory in use â Select wher e to save your messag es. You can save messages to th e memory card only if a memory card is inserted. ⢠Folder vie w â Define how you want the mess ages in Inbox to be shown. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 60
Internet With yo ur new E series device you can browse both the internet and your co mpany's in tranet, and downloa d and install new applications to your device. You can also use your device as a modem and connect your PC to the internet . Web Select Menu > Web . To browse the web (network se rvice), you need to configure the internet access point settings. If you are using a data call or GPRS connection, your wire less network must support data calls or GPRS, and the data serv ice must be activated for your SIM card. Tip: You may receive the internet access point settings from your service provider as a special text message or from the service provider's web pages. You can also enter the internet access point settings manually. See "Internet access points" , p. 63 . Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers also give you instructions on how to use their services. If the web page is unreadable or not support ed and garbage code is found while browsing, you can try to select Menu > Web > Options > Settings > Page > Default encoding , and select a corresponding encoding. Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transmi ssion between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between th e gateway and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. Th e service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be re quired for some services, such as banking services. You are noti fied if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Browse the web To browse the web, select a bookmark or enter the web address manually , and select Go to . Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate se curity an d protection against harmful software. Tip: When you start to enter the address, th e addresses of the pages you have previously visited that match your input are displayed. To open a page, scroll to its address, and pre ss the scroll key. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 61
To move on a web page, use the scroll key, whi ch is shown as a pointer on the page. When you move the pointer over a link, the pointer changes into a hand. Press the scroll key to open the link. On a web pa ge, new links usually appear underlined in blue and previou sly visited links in purple. Images that act as links ha ve a blue border around them. The addresse s of the pages you visit are saved in the Aut o. bookmarks folder. Bookmarks To access the bookmarks view whi le browsing, select Options > Bookmarks . To view a bookmarked web page, select the bookmark. To browse to another web page, select Options > Go to web address , enter the web address, and select Go to . To add a bookmark while browsing, select Options > Save as bookmark . To organise your bookmarks, in the bookmarks view, select Options > Bookmark manager . You can move and edit bookmarks, and create new folders. Clear the cache A cache is a memory location tha t is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information re quiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The info rmation or services you have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Clear cache . Feeds and bl ogs Select Menu > Web > Web feeds . Feeds usually contain headlines and articles, often about recent news or other topics. Blog is a short ening of weblog, which is a continuously updated web diary. To download a feed or blog, scroll to it, and p ress the scroll key. To add or edit a feed or blog, select Options > Manag e feed > New fe ed or Edit . End a connection To end the connection and vi ew the browser page offline, select Option s > Tools > Disconnect . To end th e connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . Web settings Select Menu > Web > Optio ns > Settings . The web settings are divided into four groups: ⢠General contains access point, home page, an d browsing security setting s. ⢠Page contains imaging, audio, and pop-up settings. ⢠Privacy contains settings related to your privacy. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 62
⢠Web feeds contains settings related to web feeds and blogs. Browse the intranet Select Menu > Office > Intra net . To browse your company's i ntranet, you must create a company-specific VPN policy. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > VP N . To connect to the intranet, op en the Intranet appli cation, select the connection method a nd Options > Connect . To define which VPN profile to use in the connection, select Options > Use other VPN poli cy . To define the settings for th e intranet connection, select Options > Settings . Internet access points An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a data connection t o the network. To use e-mail and mult imedia services or to browse web pages, you must first defi ne access points for these services. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. Set up an internet access point for packet data (GPRS) 1. Select Menu > To ols > Se ttings > Connection > Access points . 2. Select Options > New access point to create a new access point, or select an ex isting access point from the list and then Optio ns > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for th e new one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descript ive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Packet da ta . ⢠Access point name â Enter the nam e for the access point. The name is usually provided by your service provider. ⢠User name â E nt er y o ur u s er n am e if r eq u ir e d b y th e service provider. User names are often case-sensitive and provided by your service provider. ⢠Prompt password â Select Yes to enter your p a s s w o r d e a c h t i m e y o u l o g i n t o a s e r v e r o r No to save the password in your device memory a nd automate the login. ⢠Password â Enter your password if required by the service provider. The password is often case-sensitive and provided by the service provider. ⢠Authenticat ion â Select Secure to send your password always encrypted, or Normal to send your password encryp ted when possible. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 63
⢠Homepage â Enter the web address of the page you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. 4. After defining the s ettings, select Options > Advanced settings to define the advanced set tings or Back to sa ve the settings and exit. Advanced internet access point settings for packet data (GPRS) Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . After setting up a basic internet access point for packet data (GPRS), select Options > Advanced settings , and define the following advanced settings: ⢠Network t ype â Select IPv4 or IPv6 as the internet protocol type. The internet protocol defines how data is transferred to and from your device. ⢠Phone IP addres s â Enter the IP address of your device. Select Auto matic to have the network pro vide the device IP address. This se tting is shown only if you select Network t ype > IPv4 . ⢠DNS address â Select Primary DNS address and Secondary DNS address and enter their IP addresse s, if required by your service provider. Otherwise, the name server addresses are pr ovided automatically. ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy servers are intermediate servers used by some service providers between a browsing service and its users. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Set up an access point for WLAN manually 1. Select Menu > To ols > Se ttings > Connection > Access points . 2. Select Options > New access point to create a new access point, or select an ex isting access point from the list and then Optio ns > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for th e new one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Wireless LAN . ⢠WLAN network nam e â To enter the service set identifier (SSID), that is, the name that identifies the specific WLAN, select Enter manually . To s elect the network from the WLANs in range, select Search for networks . ⢠Network status â Sel ect Hidden if the network you are connecting to is hidden or Publi c if it is not hi dden. ⢠WLAN network mode â If you select Infrastructure , devices can commu nicate with each other and with wired LA N devices through a WLAN access point. If you sele ct Ad-hoc , devices can send and receive data directly with each other, and no WLAN access point is needed. ⢠WLAN security mode â You mus t select the same security mode that is used in the WLAN access point. If you select WEP (wired equivalent privacy), 802.1x, or WPA/WPA2 (W i-Fi protected access), you must also configure the relevant additional settings. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 64
⢠WLAN security se ttings â Edit the security settings for the selected security mode. ⢠Homepage â Enter the web a ddress of the pa ge you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. To set up a WLAN access p oint automatically, use the WLAN wizard. Select Menu > Connectivi ty > WLAN wiz. . Advanced access point settings for WLAN Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . After setting up a basic access point for WLAN, select Options > Advanced setting s , and define the following advanced settings : ⢠IPv4 settings â Enter the device IP and name server addresses for the IPv4 internet protocol. ⢠IPv6 setti ngs â Select or enter the name server addresses for the IPv6 internet protocol. ⢠Ad-hoc channel â The channel is usually chosen automatically. To enter the chann el number (1-11) manually, select User defined . ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the proxy server address. ⢠Proxy port numb er â Enter the proxy server port number. Connect PC to web You can use yo ur device to connect your PC to the web. 1. Connect the data cable to the USB connectors of your device and your PC. 2. Select Connect PC to web . The necessary software is automatically installed from your device to the PC. 3. Accept the installation in your PC. Accept also the connection, if prompted. When the connection to the web is established, the web br owser of your PC opens. You must have administ rator rights to your PC, and t he autorun option en abled in the PC. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 65
Travelling Need directions? Looking for a restaurant? Your Eseries device has the tools to get you where you want to be. About GPS and satellite signals To use Global Positioning System (GPS), you need a compatible GPS receiver. Use Bluetooth connectivity to connect to the GPS receiver. To start u sing a compatible GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectiv ity, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth . A GPS terminal receives low- power radio signals from the satellites and measures the travel time of t he signals. From the travel time, the GPS receiver can calculate its location to the accuracy of metres. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenanc e. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adju stments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United States Departmen t of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geom etry. Availability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, bui ldings, natural obstacles, and weat her conditions. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete an d metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data fr om the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter ha s limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. To enable or disable different positioni ng methods, such as Bluetooth GPS, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Po sitioning > Posit ioning methods . About satellite signals If your device cannot find th e satellite signal, consider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoo rs to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠If the weather conditions are bad, the sign al strength may be affected. ⢠Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to severa l minutes. Satellite status To check how ma ny satellites your device has found, and whether your device is receiv ing satellite signals, select Menu > Tools > GPS data > Position > Options > é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 66
Satellite stat us . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is sh own in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite signal to calculate the coordinat es of your location, the bar tu rns black. Initially your device must rece ive signals from at least fou r satellites to be able to calculate th e coordinates of your location. When the in itial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calc ulating the coordinates of your location with three satellite s. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Positioning settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Positioning . To use a specific positioning me thod to detect the location of your device, select Positioning methods . To select a position ing server, select Position ing server . Maps Select Menu > Tools > Maps . With Maps, you can see you r current location on the map, browse maps for different cities and countries, search for addresses and different points of interest, plan routes from one location to another, and save locations and send them to compatible devices. You can also purchase licences for extra services, such as travel guides, traffic informa tion, and navigation service with voice guidance. These services are not available for all countries or regions. I f y o u b r o w s e t o a n a r e a w h i c h i s n o t c o v e r e d b y m a p s a l r e a d y downloaded in your device, a map for the area is automatically downloaded through the internet. Some map s may be available in your device or memory card. You can also use the Nokia Map Loader PC so ftware to download m aps. To install Nokia Map L oader to a compatible PC, go to www.nokia.com/maps. Downloading maps may involve the transmission of large amounts of data th rough your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for in formation ab out data transmission charg es. When you use Maps for the firs t time, y ou may need to select an access point for downloading maps. To change the access point later, select Options > Tools > Settings > Internet > Default access point . The GPS function requires an external Bluetooth GPS rec eiver. Y ou r d e v i c e d oe s n o t h a v e a n integrated GPS receiver. To use GPS function and navigation, you need to connect your device to a compatible GPS receiver using Bluetooth. About Maps To connect to the internet automa tically when you star t Maps, select Optio ns > Tools > Settings > Internet > Go online at start-up > Yes . To prevent automatic downloading of maps, select Options > Tools > Settin gs > Int ernet > Go o nline at start-up > No . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 67
To set the device to ask your permission before connecting to the internet , select Options > Tools > Settings > Internet > Go online at start-up > Always ask . To be informed when your devi ce registers to a network other than your ho me network, select Opt ions > To ols > Settings > Internet > Ro aming warning > On (sh own only when you are online). For details and roaming costs, contact your service provider. Tip: To avoid data transfer co sts, you can also use Maps without an internet connection, and browse the maps that are saved in your device or memory card. Almost all digital ca rtography is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the ca rtography that you download for use in this device. Move on a map The map coverage varies by country and region. When you open Maps, the capita l of the country you are in or the location that was saved from your last session is shown. The map of the location is also downloaded, if needed. To zoom in to your GPS position or your last known location, press the function key a nd 0 . When the GPS connection is active, shows your current location on the map. To move on the map, scroll up, down, left, or right with the scroll key. The map is orient ed towards north by default. To zoom in and out on the map, press the function key and * , or the function key and # . When you browse the map on the display, a new map is automatically downloaded if yo u scroll to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. These map s are free of charge, but down loading may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For more information on data transmission charges, contact your service provider. The maps are automatically saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted). Display indicators The GPS indicator on the bottom right corner of the display shows the avai lability and strength of the satellite signal. One bar is one satellite. When the device tries to find a satellite, the bar is yellow. Wh en the device receives enough data from the satellite to establish a GPS conn ection, the bar turns green. The more green bars, the stronger the GPS connection. Initially, your device must rece ive signals from at least four satellites to calculate the coordinate s of your location. After the initial calculation, signal s from three satellites may be enough. The data transfer indicator shows the internet connection used and the a mount of data transferred since the application started. Find locations To find a location in the city or area displayed on the map, enter the full or partial addres s of the location in the search é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 68
field, and press the scroll key. To find a location in another city, enter the city and the full or partial address, such as London Oxfo rd Street , and press the scroll key. To find a specific address, or an address in another country, select Options > Search > Addresses . Country/Region * and City or post c ode are mandatory. Tip: To search for locations in another country using the search field, enter also the name of the country in the search field: Rome Italy . To import a location address from the Contacts application, select Options > Search > Addresses > Options > Select from Contacts . The search results a re grouped by categories. To limit the search to one category, select Options > Search . If you search for locations wi thout an intern et connection, the search results are limited to a radius of 50 km (31 miles). Plan a route To plan a route, select your start point on the map or s earch for a location, press the scroll key, and select Add to route . To define the destin ation and add more locations for your route, select Options > Add route point , and search for the location. To switch between walking or driving mode, select Options > Settings > Transport mode To show the route on the map, select Options > Show route . To navigate to the destinati on by car or on foot, if you have purchased a licence for these extra services, select Options > Start driving or Start walki ng . To save the route, select Optio ns > Save route . Walk to your destination The walking route ignores any possible limitations to car navigation, such as one-way streets and turn restrictions, and includes areas su ch as pedestrian zones and pa rks. It also prioritises walkways and sma ller roads, and omit s highways and motorway s. The route is drawn to the map, and the arrow indicates the direction. The small dots show in which direction you are walking. The length of a walking rout e is limited to a ma ximum of 50 kilometres (31 miles) and the trave lling speed to a maximum of 30 km/h (18 miles/h). If the speed limit is exceeded, navigation stops and is resu med once the speed is back within limits. There is no voice guidance available for pedestrian navigation. To purchase a licence for pedestrian navigation, select Options > Extras > Walk . The licence is region-specific and can be used only in the selected area. You can pay for the licence through a credit card or in your phone bill, if supported by your service provider. Tip: To try out navigation for three day s with a free licence, press the scroll key, and select Walk to . Maps checks if a free licence is available for your device. To é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 69
activate the licence, select OK . You can only use the licence once. To start navigating, select a location and Walk to . To stop navigating , select Stop . Drive to your destination To purchase a licence for pede strian and car navigation with voice gui dance, select Options > Extras > Drive & Walk . The licence is region-specific and can b e used only in the selected area. Tip: To try out naviga tion for three days with a free licence, press the scroll key , and select Drive to . Maps checks if a free licence is available for your device. T o activate the licence, select OK . You can only use the licence once. To start navigatin g by car, select a location , press the scroll key, and select Drive to . When you us e car navigation for the first time, you are asked to select the la nguage of the voice guidance and download the rela ted voice guidance files. To change the langua ge later, in the main view, select Options > Tools > Settings > Navigati on > Voice guidance . Voice guidance is not available for pedestrian navigation. To switch between different views during the navigation, press the scroll key, and sele ct Manoeuvre view , Bird's-eye view , or Arrow view . To repeat the voice guidance, s elect Optio ns > Repeat . To stop navigating , select Stop . Traffic information The real-time traffic information service provides information about traffic events that may affec t your trav el. The traffic information service is an extra service that y ou can purchase and downloa d into your device, if available in your country or region. To purchase a licence fo r the tr affic information service, select Options > Extras > Traffic info . To view information abou t traffic events, select Options > Traffic info . The events are shown on the map as triangles and lines. To view the details of an even t, including possible rerouting options, select the event and Optio ns > Open . To update the tra ffi c information, select Update traffic info . Travel guides Travel guides provide info rmation about at tractions, restaurants, hotels, and other points of interest. Some guides contain videos an d audio clips. The guides must be purch ased and downloaded before use. Downloadin g travel g uides ma y involve the transmission of large amounts of dat a through your service p roviderâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. To purchase and download travel guides, or to view downloaded ones, select Options > Extras > Guides . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 70
To browse travel guide categories, select a category, and press the scroll key. If there are subcategories, select a subcategory, and press the scroll key again. To download a new guide to your device, scroll to the desired guide, and select Yes . You ca n pay for the gu ides through a credit card or in your phone bi ll, if suppor ted by your service provider. GPS data Select Menu > Tools > GPS data . With GPS data, you ca n view your current location, find your way to a desired location, and track distance. Select Navigati on to view navigating i nformation to your trip de stina tion, Po sition to view positioning information about your current location, or Trip distance to view your travelling information s u c h as t h e d i s t a n ce and duration you have travelled, and your average and max imum speeds. The application must receive positioning information from at least three satellites to be used as a travelling aid. The trip meter has limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can al so be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. Use GPS data To check the signal strength of the satellites that provide the positioning informat ion necessary for na vigation, open any of the three views and select Optio ns > Satellite status . To set a landmark or location as the destinati on of your trip, select Navigation > Options > Set destinat ion . You can also enter the destination latitu de and longitude coordinates. To remove the destination set for your trip, select Navigation > Optio ns > Stop navigatio n . To save your current position as a landmark, select Navigation or Posi tion , and Options > Save position . To activate the t rip meter, select Trip distance > Options > Start . To stop the trip meter, select Options > Stop . To reset all fields and start calculating the trip ag ain, select Trip distance > Op tions > Restart . To change the measuring system in use, select Opt ions > Settings > Meas urement sy stem > Metric or Imperial . To enter the altitude calibration to correct the altitude received from the positioning satellites , select Opti ons > Settings > Alti tude calibrat ion . Landmarks Select Menu > Tools > Landmarks . Landmarks are coordinates to ge ographic locations th at you can save to your device for la ter use in different location- based services. You can create landmarks using a Bluetooth GPS accessory or network (network service). é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 71
Create a landmark To create a landmark, select Options > New landmark . Select Current posit ion to make a network request for the latitude and longitude coordinate s of your current location, Select from map to select the location fro m a map, or Enter manually to fill in necessary locat ion information such as a name, category , address, lat itu de, longitude, and altitude. To show the landmark on the map, select Options > Sh ow on map . Edit landmarks To edit a landmark, select Options > Edit > Options and from the following: ⢠Select categories â Organise the landmark to a grou p of similar landmarks. Select a category to modify landmark information such as a name, category, addre ss, latitude, longitude, and altitude. ⢠Retrieve curre nt position â Request and automatically fill in the geographical latitu de and longitude coordinates to make a landmark of your current location. ⢠Delete â Remove the landmark. ⢠Landma rk ico n â Change the icon of the landmark. ⢠Show on map â Show the land mark on the map. ⢠Send â Send the landmark to compatible devices. ⢠Input optio ns â Modify text input settin gs, such as the writing language. ⢠Editin g options â Edit the phone numbers and web addresses assigned to the land mark. Landmark cate gories You can see the landmark catego ries in two views: one lists categories that already contain landmarks, and the other lis ts all the categories your device has. To view the landmarks that a category conta ins, scroll to the category, and press the scroll key. To create a new category, se lect Options > Edit categories > Options > New category . T o c h a n g e t o w h i c h c a t e g o r i e s a l a n d m a r k b e l o n g s , o p e n t h e landmarks tab. Sc roll to th e landmark, and select Opti ons > Edit > Options > Select cate gories . Select the category or categories in which you want to include the landmark and OK . Receive landmarks Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Open a message that contains a landmark you have received from another device. Scroll to the landmark, and press the scroll key. To save the landmark in your device, select Op tions > Save . To forward the landmark to compatible devices, select Options > Send . To show the received land mark on the map, select Opti ons > Show on map . To find out how to navig ate to the received landmark, select Options > Show route . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 72
Media Your device contains a variet y of media applicat ions for both business and leisure time use. For more information, see the extended user guide on the web. Camera Select Menu > Media > Camera . Capture an image Your device supports an image capture resolution of up to 1600x1200 pixels. The image reso lution in this guide may appear different. To capture an image, use the display as a viewfinder, aim at your subject, and press t he scroll key. The device saves the image in Gallery, or in th e folder you have defined. Tip: To zoom in or out before capturing an image, scroll up or down. If you do not want to keep the captured image, select Options > Delete . Select Back to return to the viewfinder to capture another image. Select Optio ns > Go to Galle ry to view the image in Gallery. Select Options > Flash to always us e flash, never use it, or use it automatically accord ing to surrounding light conditions. If the light is di m, select Options > Ni ght mode > On before capturing an image. To adjust the image, select Options > Adjus t > White balance or Colour tone . To capture images in a sequence, select Options > Sequence mode . The camera captures six images in a row. To capture timed images, select Options > Self-time r , and the desired time-o ut. The camera cap tures an image after the time-out has passed. Tip: To access the various came ra modes quickly, select Options > Show toolbar . To view the captured images, select Menu > Media > Gallery > Image s . Record a video clip 1. To start recording a video clip, press the scroll key. The remaining recording time is shown at the top of the display. 2. To pause the recording, select Pause ; to resume the recording, select Continue . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 73
3. To stop the recording, select Stop . The device saves the clip in Gallery, or in the folder you have defined. 4. If you do not want to keep the recorded video clip, select Options > Delete . Select Back to return to the viewfinder to record an other video clip. Select Option s > Play to view the video clip in the RealPlayer application. Camera settings Select Options > Settings . To adjust image qual ity, to se lect whether images remain on the display after capturing th em, and to change resoluti on, default name, or memory in wh ich t o save your new images, select Image . To change the length, resolution, and default name of th e videos you record or the memo ry in which to save them, select Video . Nokia Podcasting Select Menu > Media > Podc asting . Download podcasts to your device and listen them. Play and manage podcasts Podcasting delivers audio or video content over the internet for playback on mobile devices and PCs. With the Nokia Podc asting applica tion, you can s earch, discover, subscribe, and download podcast s over the air; and play, manage, and sha re podcasts with your device. Define the connection and downloading settings before using the application. Select Options > Setti ngs > Connection and Download . To search for new podcast episodes to subscr ibe to, select Directories . To search for podcasts usin g keywords and podcast show titles, select Search . To display the available episod es from the selected podcast, open the Podcasts folder and select Open . To download the selected episode, select Download . To play the downloaded episode, select Play . To update the selected podcast or ma rked podcasts, for a new episode, select Options > Update . To open the web site of the po dc ast (network service), select Options > Open web pag e . Some podcasts provide the opportunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, select Options > View comments . Directories Select Directories . Directories help you find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 74
Contents of the directories change. Select the desired directory folder to update it (network service). The colour of the folder changes, when the update is complete. To subscribe to a podcast, s croll to the podcast title and select Update . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, a nd play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new directory or folder, select Option s > New > Web directory or Fo lder . Select a title, URL of the .opml (outline processor markup language) file, and Done . To import an .opml file st ored on your device, select Options > Import OPML file . To save a received .opml file, open the file to save the file into the Received folder in Directories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to your podcasts. Search podcasts Search helps you find podcasts by keyword or title. The search engine us es the podcast search serv ice you set up in Podcasti ng > Options > Settings > Connecti on > Search service U RL . To search for podcasts, select Search , and enter th e desired keywords. Tip: Search looks for podcast titles and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. General topics, such as football or hip-hop, usually give be tter results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to selected ch annels and add them to your podcasts, select Subscrib e . To start a new search, select Options > New search . To see the details of a podcast, select Options > Description . Podcasting settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connection . To edit the download settings, select Options > Settings > Download . To restore the default settings, open the corresponding settings and select Op tions > Restore default . Music player Select Menu > Media > Music player . Music player supports files formats such as AAC , AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily s upport all features of a file format or a ll the variations of file formats. You can transfer music from other compatible devices to your device. See "Transfer music fr om a computer" , p. 76 . Play a song or a podcast episode To add all available songs and podcasts to the music library, select Option s > Refresh . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 75
To play a song or a podcast episode, select Music or Podcasts and the desired category, then scroll to the song or podcast episode and press the scroll key. To adjust the volume, scroll up or down. To pause playba ck, press the scroll key; to resume , press the scroll key again. To stop playback, scroll down. To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To go to the next item, scroll right. To return to the beginn ing of the item, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 seconds after a song or podcast has sta rted. To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key. Playlists To view and manage play lists, select Music > Playlist s . To create a new playlist, s elect Option s > Create playlist . To add songs to the playlist, se lect the song and Options > Add to a playlist > Saved playlist or New p laylist . To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you wan t to move, and select Options > Reorder list . Nokia Music Store Select Menu > Media > Music store . In the Nokia Music Store (network service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to you r device. To purchase music, you need to register for the service. To check the Nokia Music Store availability in your country, visit mus ic.nokia.com. To find more music in the different categories, select Options > Find in Music store . To select the access point to u se with the Music Store, select Default acc. pt. . Transfer music from a computer You can use the followi ng methods to tran sfer music: ⢠To install Nokia Ovi Player t o manage and organise you r music files, download the PC software from www.ovi.com, and follow th e instructions. ⢠To view your device on a computer as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, ma ke the connection with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are usin g a USB data cable, select Mass storage as the connection mode. ⢠To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect a compatible USB da ta cable, and select Media transfer as the connection mode. To change the default USB connection mode, select Menu > Connectivity > USB and USB connection mode . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 76
Preset frequency settings Select Menu > Media > Music player > Options > Go to Now playing > Options > Equaliser . To use a preset frequency sett i ng when playin g music, select the frequency setting you wa nt to use, and se lect Opt ions > Activate . To modify the frequency of a pres et setting, select Options > Edit , select a frequency band, and scro ll up or down to increase or decrease its value. You hear your frequency adjustment immediat ely in the playback. To reset the frequency ba nds to their original values, select Options > Reset to defau lts . To create your own frequency set ting, select Opt ions > New preset . Enter a name for the frequency setting. S croll up or down to move between the frequency bands and set the frequency on each band. Share online Select Menu > Media > Share online . You can share im ages and vide o clips in compatible online albums, blogs, or in other comp atible online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, a nd view the content of the albums. The supported conte nt types may vary depending on the service provider. To share files online, you must have an account with an on line image sharing service. You can us ually subscrib e to such a service on the web page of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. Share images online To upload a file from Gallery to the online service, select Menu > Gallery , select the desired file and Options > Send > Post t o web . Recorder Select Menu > Media > Recorder . With Recorder, you can record up to 60 minutes of a voice memo, save the voice re cording as a sound c lip, and play the sound clip. Recorder suppor ts the AMR file format. You can also press the voic e key to open the Recorder application. If you have logged in to push to talk, t he voice key works as a push-to-talk key an d does not open Recorder. Record a sound clip To record a sound clip, select Options > Record sound clip . Select Pause to pause the recording, and Record to resume recording. When you finish recording, select Stop . The sound clip is automatically saved to the Sound clips folder in Gallery. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 77
Play a recording To listen to the sound clip that you just recorded, select Play . The progress bar displays th e playing time, p osition, and length of the clip. Select St op to cancel the playback. To pause the playback of a recorded clip, select Pause . Playback resumes when you select Play . Recorder settings Recordings are automatically saved to the device memory unless you change the default location. Recordings that you create or receive after you chan ge th e settings are affected. To change the defaul t location of saved recordings, select Options > Settings > Memory in use . To define the recording quality, select Options > Settings > Recording quali ty . If you select High , the sound clip you record is in waveform file format (.wav) and the maximu m length for the clip is 60 minutes. If you select MMS compatible , the sound clip you record is in adaptive multirate file format (.amr), and the maximum length for the clip is one minute. Gallery Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Use Gallery to access and us e different types of media, including images, videos, mu sic, and sounds. All viewed images and videos, and all re ceived music and so unds are automatically saved to Gallery. Sound clips are opened in the Music player, and video clips and streaming lin ks in the RealPlayer application. Im ages are opened in the image viewer. Work with media files and folders To open a file or a folder, select the file or folder. To create a new folder, select a file and Options > Organise > New folder . You cannot create folders within folders. To copy or move files, select a file and Optio ns > Organise > Move to folder , New folder , Move to memory card , Copy to memory card , Copy to phone me m. , or Move to phone mem. . To download files into Galle ry using the browser, select Downl. graphics , Downld. videos , or Downld. sounds . The browser opens, and you can choose a bookmark or enter the address for the download site. To search for a file, select Options > Find . Write the item you are searching fo r. Files that matc h the search are displayed. View images To open an image for viewing, select Options > Open . To open the next or previous image for viewing, scroll right or left. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 78
To enlarge the image on the disp lay, select Options > Zoom in . To reduce the image on the display, select Zoom out . To view the image in full screen size, select Options > Full screen . To return to normal view, select Options > Norm al screen . To rotate the image, select Options > Rotate . Select Right to rotate the image clockwise by 90 degrees, or select Left to rotate the image counterclockwise by 90 degrees. Manage image files To view detailed informat ion about the image, select Options > View details . To send the image, select Options > Send , and the method for sending. To rename the image , select Options > Rename . To set the image as the displa y background, select Op tions > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To add the image to a contact, se lect Options > Use image > Assign to contact . The Contacts applicati on opens, and you can select the contact for the i mage. RealPlayer Select Menu > Media > Real Playe r . RealPlayer plays video clips an d audio files that are stored in the device memory or on a memory card, transferred to your device from an e-mail message or a compatible computer, or streamed to your device over the web. Supported formats include MPEG-4, MP4 (not streaming), 3GP, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. RealPlayer does not nece ssarily support all variations of a media file format. Play video clips and stream links To play a video clip or audio file, select Options > Open > Most recent clips to play one of the six clips you most recently played, or Saved clip to play a clip or open a web link. Select Pl ay . To play streaming medi a, select a web link th at points to a clip, and select Play ; or connect to the web, browse to a video clip or audio file, and select Play . RealPlayer recognises two kinds of links: an rtsp:// URL and an http:// URL that points to a RAM file. Before the content begins streaming, your device must connect to a web si te and buffer the content. If a network connection problem causes a playback error, RealPlayer attempts aut omatically to reconnect to t he internet access point. To adjust the volume during playback, scroll right or left. To fast-forward during play back, scroll up and hold. To rewind during play, scroll down and hold. To stop the playback or streaming, select Stop . Buffering or connecting to the streami ng site stops, the pla yback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the beginning. To download video clips from the web, select Option s > Download videos . To view the video clip in full-screen size, select Options > Play in full scre en . Full screen increases the size of the video é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 79
to cover the maximum video area possible while the aspect ratio is maintained. Send audio files and video clips To transfer a media clip to a compatible device, select Options > Send . Select the sending method. To send a media clip insi de a message, create a multi media message, select a clip to att ach and Insert o bject > Video clip or Sound clip . View information about a media clip To view the properties of a video c lip, audio file, or web link, select Options > C lip details . Information may include for example the bit rate or the intern et link of a streaming file. To set on file protection for a media clip, select Options > Clip details > Status > Options > Change . File protection prevents others from changing a file. RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a message from yo ur service provider. To define the settin gs manually, select Opt ions > Settings > Video or Streamin g . Flash player Select Menu > Media > Flash Player . With Flash player, you can view, play, and int eract with flash files made for mobile devices. Manage flash files To optimise the use of Flash Pl ayer, insert a memory card in your device. To play a flash file, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To send a flash file to co mpatible devices, select Options > Send . Copyright protection ma y prevent the sending of s ome flash files. To switch between fla sh files saved on your device memory or memory card, scroll to the corresponding tabs. To change the flash fi le quality, select Option s > Qual ity when you are playing the flash file. If you select High , the playback of some flash files ma y appear uneven and slow due to their original settings. Chan ge the quality setting of such files to Normal or Low for improved playback. To organise your flash files, select Options > Organise . Radio Select Menu > Media > Radio . The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 80
The FM radio depends on an antenn a other than the wireless device antenna. At tach a compatible headset or enhancement to the device for th e FM radio to function properly. Listen to the radio To search for a station, s elect or . To set the frequency manually, select Options > Manual tuning . To view available stati ons based on location, select Options > Station directory (network service). To save the current s tation to your station list, select Options > Save station . To select a previousl y saved radio station, select or . To adjust the volume, scroll left or right. To switch from headset use to listening to the radio through the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loud speaker . To return to the home screen and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Option s > Play in background . View visual content To check availability a nd costs, and to subscribe to the service, contact your service provider. Before you can view visual content, you must have an in ternet access point defined at Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . 1. To view available visual content for a tuned station, select Options > Start visual service . If the visual radio service ID has not been saved for the station, enter it, or select Retrieve to s e a r c h f o r i t i n t h e station directory (network service). 2. Select the location neares t to you from the station directory. If your device finds a station that matches the tuned frequency, its visual service ID is displayed. To view the visual content, select OK . Saved stations To open the list of your save d stations, select Options > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Opti ons > Station > Listen . To view available visual conten t for a station with the V isual Radio service, select Options > St ation > Start visual service . To change the station details, select Optio ns > Station > Edit . Radio settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Start-up tone â Select whether a tone is played when the application is started. ⢠Auto-start se rvice â S el e c t Yes t o ha v e t he V is u al R ad io service star t automa tically when y ou select a sa ved station that offers the Vi sual Radio service. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 81
⢠Access point â Select the access point used for the data connection. You do not need an access p oint to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. Internet radio Select Menu > Media > Internet radio . Listen to internet radio stations Warning: Listen to musi c at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume m ay damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ea r when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To listen to a radio station on the internet, select a station from the station directory, sear ch stations by their name from the Nokia Internet Radio service, or select Options > Add station manually . When you have found the correct station, select Listen . To stop the playback, press th e scroll key. To resume the playback, press the scroll key aga in. To adjust the volume, keep the function key pressed down and scroll up or down. To view station information, select Options > Station informati on (not available if you have saved the station manually). If you are listening to a station saved in your favourites, scroll left or right to listen to the previou s or next saved station. Tip: You can browse for station links with the Web application. Comp atible links are automatically opened in the Internet radio application. Search for station s To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by their name, select Search . Enter a station name or the first letters of it in th e search field, and select Search . To listen to the station , select Listen . To save the station to your favourites , select Opti ons > Add to Favourites . To make another search, select Options > Search again . Save stations To view and listen to your fa vourite stations, sele ct Favourit es . To add a station ma nually to favourites, select Options > Add station manually . Enter the web address of the station and a name that you want to ap pear in the favourites list. To add the currently playing station to favourites, select Options > Add to Favourit es . To view station information, to move a station up or down in the list, or to delete a st ation from the fa vo urites, select Options > Station and the desired option. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 82
To view only stations beginning with p articular letters or numbers, start entering the ch aracters. M atching station s are displayed. Internet radio settings To select the default access point to connect to th e network, select Options > Settings > Default access point . Select Always ask if you want the device to ask for the access point every time you open the application. To change the con nection speed for GPRS packet data connections, select Options > Settings > GPRS connection bitrate . To change the con nection speed for 3G packet data connections, select Options > Settings > 3G connection bitrate . To change the connection speed for WLAN connections, select Options > Settings > Wi-Fi connection bitrat e . The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the selected connection speed. The higher the speed, the better the quality. To avoid buffering, us e the highest qu ality only with high speed connections. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 83
Personalisation You can personalis e your devi ce by adjusting the various tones, background im ages, an d screen s avers, for example. Profiles Select Menu > Tools > Profiles . You can adjust and customise th e ringing tones, alert tones, and other device tones for diffe rent events, environments, or caller groups. The profile currently in use is shown at the top of the display on the home sc reen. However, if the active profile is General, only today's date is shown. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new , an d define the settings. To customise a profile, select a profile and Optio ns > Personalise . To change a profile, select a profile and Options > Activate .The Offline profile pr events your device from accidentally switching on, send ing or receiving messages, or using wireless LAN, Bluetooth, or FM radio; it also closes any internet connection that ma y be in operation when the profile is selected. The Offline profile does not prevent you from establishing a wireless LAN or Bluetooth connection at a later time, or from restarti ng the FM radio, so com ply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using these features. To delete a profile that you created, select Options > Delete profile . You cannot delete the predefined profiles. Select ringing tones To set a ringing tone for a profile, select Options > Personalis e > Ringing ton e . Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmark s for downloading tones using the browser. Any downloaded tones are saved to Gallery. To play the ringing tone for a selected con tact group only, select Option s > Personali se > Alert for , and select the desired group. Phone calls comi ng from outside that group have a silent alert. To change the message ton e, select Options > Personalis e > Message alert tone . Customise profiles Select Options > Personali se , and define the following: ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for download ing tones using the browser. If you ha ve two alternate phone li nes in use, you can specify a ringin g tone for each line. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 84
⢠Video call tone â Select a r inging tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â When you select this option and someone from your contacts list calls you, the device sounds a ringi ng tone that is a combination of the spoken name of the contact and the selected ring ing tone. ⢠Ringing type â S elect how you want th e ringing tone to alert. ⢠Ringing volume â Select the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Select a tone for received e-mail messages. ⢠Vibrating alert â Set the device to vibrate when you receive a call. ⢠Keypad to nes â Set the volu me level of the device keypad t ones. ⢠Warning tones â Turn the warning tones on or off. This setting also affect s the tones of some ga mes and Java applications. ⢠Alert for â Set the device to ri ng only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a silent alert. ⢠Profile na me â You can give a name to a new profile or rename an existing profile. The General and Offline profiles cannot be renamed. Personalise the home screen Select Menu > Tools > Modes . T o c h a n g e t h e n a m e o f t h e current home screen, select Mode name . To select which applications and notifications you want to see on the home screen, select Home screen applications . To change the theme of the ho me screen currently in use, select Theme . To change the background image of the home screen currently in use, select Wallpaper . To change from one home screen to another, select Switch mode . Change the display theme Select Menu > Tools > Them es . To change the theme used in all applications, select the General folder. To change the theme used in the main menu, select the Menu view folder. To change the theme for a particul ar application, select the application-specific folder. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 85
To change the background image of the home screen, select the Wallpaper folder. To select an animation for the screen saver, select the Power saver folder. Download a theme To download a theme, select General or Menu view > Download themes . Enter the link from which you wan t to download your theme. Once the theme is downloaded, you can preview, activate, or edit it. To preview a theme, select Options > Preview . To start using the selected theme, select Options > Set . 3-D ringing tones Select Menu > Media > 3-D tones . To enable 3-D sound effects for ringing tones, select 3-D ringing tone effects > On . Not all ringing tones support 3â D effects. To change the 3âÂÂD effect th at is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To select the speed at which sound moves from one direction to another, select Trajectory sp eed . This setting is not available for all effects. To adjust the amount of echo, select Reverberation and the desired effect. To listen to the ringing to ne with the 3âÂÂD effect, select Options > Play tone . To adjust the volume of the ringing tone, select Menu > Tools > Profiles > Options > Personalise > Ringin g volume . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 86
Nokia Office Tools Nokia Office Tools su pport mobile business and enable effective communication with work teams. Active notes Select Menu > Office > Active note s . Active notes allows you to create, edit, and v iew different kinds of notes, for example, meeting memos, hobby notes, or shopping lists. You can in sert images, vi deos, and sound in the notes. You can link notes to other applications, such as Contacts, an d send notes to other s. Create and edit notes To create a note, st art writing. To edit a note, scroll to it, and p ress the scroll key. To insert images, sound clips, video, busin ess cards, web bookmarks, and files, select Options > Ins ert object . To add new item s to the note, select Options > Insert new . You can record sound and video clips, and capture images. To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press and hold the shift key and use the scroll key to select the tex t. Then select Options > Text . To send the note, select Opt ions > Send . To link a note to a conta ct, select Optio ns > Link note to call > Add contacts . You can see the note on the display of your device when making a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings for Active notes Select Sett ings . To save notes to your device memory, select Memory in use > Phone memory . To save them to a memory card, select Memory in use > Memory card . To change the layout of active notes, select Change view > Grid . To view the notes as a list, select Change view > List . To see a note in the backgrou nd when making or receiving phone calls, select Show note during call > Yes . Tip: If you temporarily do not want to see the notes during phone calls, select Show note during call > No . This way you do not have t o remove the links between notes an d contact car ds. Calculator Select Menu > Office > Calculator . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 87
This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, en te r the first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtr act from the function map. Enter the seco nd number of the calculation, and select = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered. The result of the calculation remains in the editor field and can be used as the first number of a new calculation. The device saves the result of the last calculation in its memory. Exiting the C alculator application or switching off the device does not clear the me mory. To recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application, select Options > Last result . To save the numbers or resu lts of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve the results of a ca lculation from the memory and use them in a calculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . File manager With File manage r, you can manage the con tents and properties of files and folder s on your device memory and memory card. You can open, create, move, copy, rename, send, and search for files and folders. Copyright protection may prevent sending some files. Open the device tab or the memory card tab. To select multiple files, sc roll to each file, and select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark . To send the selected files, select Option s > Send . To move or copy files or folders to another folder, select Options > Move to folder or Copy t o folder . Default folders such as Sound clips in Gallery cannot be moved. To search for files, select Options > Find . Enter the search text, and press the scroll key. The folders and files whose names contain the search te xt are displayed. To view information about the selected file, select Options > View details . To view additional in formation about the file online, select Options > Additi onal details . Quickoffice About Quickoffice Select Menu > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quickword for viewing M icrosoft Word documents, Quicksheet for viewing Microsoft Excel worksheets, Quickpoint fo r Microsoft PowerPoint presentations, and Quickman ag er for purchasing software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, 2003, a nd 2007 documents (DOC, XLS, an d PPT fi le formats) with Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. Not all file formats or features are supported. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 88
Converter Select Menu > Office > Converte r . The converter has limited accura cy, and rounding errors may occur. Convert measurements 1. Scroll to the Type field, and select Options > Conve rsion type to open a list of measur es. Select the measure to us e, and select OK . 2. Scroll to the first Unit field, and select Options > Select unit . Select the unit from which to convert, and select OK . Scroll to th e next Unit field, and select the unit to which to convert. 3. Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Set base currency and exchange rate When you change base currency, you must enter new exchange rates because all previously set exchange rates a re cleared. Before you can make currency conversions, you must choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency determines the conversion rates of the other currencies. 1. To set the rate of exchange for the unit of currency, scroll to the Type field, and select Options > Currency rates . 2. Scroll to the currency type and enter the exchange rate you would like to set per single unit of currency. 3. To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Optio ns > Set as base currency . 4. Select Done > Yes to save the ch anges. After you have inserted all the necessa ry exchange rates, you can make currency conversions. Zip manager With Zip manager, you can creat e new archive files to store compressed ZIP formatted file s; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archiv e password for protected archives; and change settings , such as comp ression level, and file name encoding. You can store the archive files on the device mem ory or on a memory card. PDF reader Select Menu > Office > Adobe PDF . With PDF reader you can read PDF documents on the display of your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 89
Printing You can print documents, such as files, messages, or web pages, from the device, preview a print job, define page layout options, select a printer, or print to a fi le. You may not be able to print all t ypes of document s. Print files To configure a p rinter for your devi ce, select Menu > Office > Printers > Options > Add . To set the printer as the default printer, select Options > Printing options > Printers , scroll to the printer and select Op tions > Set as default . B e f o r e y o u p r i n t , m a k e s u r e y o u r d e v i c e i s p r o p e r l y c o n n e c t e d to the printer . To print a document, select Opt ions > Printing options > Print . To print to a file, select Options > Printing options > Print > Print to file , and d etermine the lo cation for the file. To change the prin ti ng options, select Options > Printi ng options . You can select the printer you want to use, the number of copies and the rang e of pages you want to pr int. To change the page layout before printing, select Options > Printing options > Page setup . You can chan ge th e paper size and orientation, define the margins , and insert a header or a footer. The maximum len gth of the header and footer is 128 characters. To preview a file or message before you print, select Options > Printing op tions > Prev iew . Printing options Open a document, such as a file or message, and select Options > Printing op tions > Print . Define the following: ⢠Printer â Select an availabl e printer from the list. ⢠Print â Select All pages , Ev en pages , or Odd pages as the print range. ⢠Print range â Select Al l pages in range or Defined pages as the page range. ⢠Number of copi es â Select the number of copies to print. ⢠Print to file â Print to a file, and define the location for the file. The available options ma y vary. Printer settings Select Menu > Office > Printers . To add a new printer, select Option s > Add . Define the following: ⢠Printer â Enter a name for the printer. ⢠Driver â Select a driver for the printer . ⢠Bearer â Select a bearer for the printer. ⢠Orientation â Select the orientation. ⢠Paper size â Select the paper size. ⢠Media type â Select the media type. ⢠Colour mode â Select the co lour mode. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 90
⢠Printer mode l â Select the printer model. The available options may vary. Clock Select Menu > Office > Clock . In Clock, you can view your local time and time zone information, set and edit a larms, or modify date and ti me settings. Alarm clock Open the alarm clock tab. To set an alarm, select Options > New alarm . When an alarm is active, is displayed. To switch off the alarm, select Stop , or to stop the alarm for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is rea ched while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the ala rm tone. If you select Stop , the devic e asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch o ff the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless ph one use may cause interference or danger. To change the alarm time, select Opti ons > Reset alarm . To remove the alarm, select Op tions > Remove alarm . World clock Open the world clock tab to check the time in different cities. To add a city to the world clock view, select Option s > Add city . T o c h a n g e t h e c i t y t h a t d e t e r mi n e s t h e t i m e a n d d a t e i n y o u r device, select Options > Set as current city . T he city is displayed in the Clock main vi ew, and the time in your device is changed according to the city selected. Check th at the time is correct and matches your time zone. Clock settings Select Options > Settings . To change the time or date, select Tim e or Date . To change the clock shown on the home screen, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone network to u pdate the time, date, and time zone information to yo ur device (network service), select Network operator time > Auto-update . To change the alarm tone, select Clock alarm tone . Notes Select Menu > Office > Notes . You can create and send note s to other compatible devices, and save received plain text files (.txt format) to Notes. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 91
Write and se nd notes To write a no te, start enterin g the text. The note editor opens automatic ally. To open a note, scroll to it, a nd press the scroll key. To send a note to other co mpatible devices, select Options > Send . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Options > Synchronisation . Se lect Start to initialise synchronisation or Settings to define the synchronisation settings for the note. Nokia Wireless Keyboard Wireless keyboards are availabl e as separate enhancements. To set up the Nokia Wireless Key board or other compatible wireless keyboard supporting the Bluetooth Human Interface Devices (HID) profile for us e with your device, use the Wireless keyboard application. 1. Activate Bluetoo th connectivity on your device: select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > On . Make sure that you have set My phone's visibility > Shown to all . 2. Switch on the keyboard. 3. Select Menu > Office > Wlss. keybd. . 4. To start searchi ng for devices with B luetooth connectivity, select Options > Find keyboard . 5. Select the keyboard from th e list, and press the s croll key to start the connection. 6. To pair the keyboard with your device, enter a passcode of your choice (1 to 9 digits) on the device a nd the same passcode on your keyboard. 7. If you are asked for a keyboard layout, select it from a list on your device. When the name of th e keyboard appears, it s status changes to Ke yboard connected , and the indicator of your keyboard blinks slowly; the keyboard is ready for use. For details on the operation and maintenance of your keyboard, see its user guide. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 92
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet, a corporate intranet, or to another device or computer. PC connections You can use your mo bile device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data communicat ions applications. With Nokia Ovi Suite you can, for exam ple, transfer files and images between your device and a comp atible computer. To use Ovi Suite with USB connection mode, select PC Su ite . For more information about Ov i Suite, see the support area at www.ovi.com. Data cable To avoid dama ging the m emory card, d o not remo ve the data cable in the middle of a data transfer. Transfer data between your device and a PC 1. Insert a memory card to your device, and connect the device to a compatible PC with the USB data cable. 2. When the device asks which mode is used, select Mass storage . In this mode, you can see your device as a removable hard drive in your computer. 3. Close the connection from the computer ( for example, from an Unplug or Eject Hard ware wizard in Wi ndows) to avoid damaging the memory ca rd. To use Nokia Ovi Suite with your device, install Nokia Ovi Suite on your PC, connect the data ca ble, and select PC Suite . To use your device to connect yo ur PC to the web, connect th e data cable, and select Connect P C to web . To synchronise the music in your device with Ovi Player, install the Ovi Player software on your PC, connect the data cable, and select Media transfer . To change the USB mode you norma lly use with the data cable, select Menu > Connectivity > USB > USB connecti on mode and the desired option. To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the USB data cable to the device, select Menu > Connectivity > USB > As k on conne ction > Yes . Bluetooth Select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth . About Bluetooth Bluetooth technology in your device enables wireless connections between electronic devices within a range of 10 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 93
metres (33 feet). A Bluetooth connection can be used to send images, videos, tex t, business cards, calendar not es, or to connect wirelessly to devices that use Bluetooth techn ology. Since devices using B luetooth technology communicate using radio waves, your device an d the other devices do not need to be in direct line-of- sight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 10 me tres of each other, although the connection can be subj ect to interfer ence from obstructions such as walls or other electronic devices. Several Bluetooth conn ections ca n be active at a ti me. For example, if your device is connected to a headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible dev ice at the same time. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the following pr ofiles: Dial-Up Networking, Object Push, File Transfer, Han dsfree, Headset, Ba sic Imaging, Remote SIM Access, Stereo Au dio streaming, Generic Audio/ Video Distribution, Audio/Video Remote Control, and Advanced Audio Distribution. To ensure interoperability between other devices s upporting Bluet ooth technology, use Nokia approved accessories for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other de vices to determine their compatibility wi th this device. Features using Bluetooth techno logy increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Send and receive data with Bluetooth 1. When you activate Bluetooth for the first time, you are asked to give a name to your device. Give your device a unique name to ma ke it easy to recognise if there are several Bluetooth d evices nearby. 2. Select Bluetooth > On . 3. Select My phone's visibility > Shown t o all or Define period . If y ou select Define perio d , you need to define the time during which your device is visible to others. Your device and the name you en tered can now be seen by other users with devices using Bluetooth technology. 4. Open the application where th e item yo u want to send is stored. 5. Select the item and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . The device searches for ot her devices using Bluetooth technology within range and lists them. Tip: If you have sent da ta using Bluetooth before, a list of the previous search results is displayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 6. Select the device with which you want to connect. If t he other de vice re quires pa iring before data can be transmitted, you ar e asked to enter a passcode. When the connection ha s been established, Sending data is shown. The Sent folder in the Messag ing application does not store messages sent using B luetooth connectivity. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 94
To receive data using Bluetooth, select Bluetooth > On and My phone's visib ility > Shown to all to receive data from a non-paired device or Hidd en to receive data from a paired device only. When you receive data through Bluetooth, depending on the settings of an active profile, a tone sounds, and you are asked if y ou want to accept the message in which the data is inclu ded. If you ac cept, the message is placed in the Inbox folder in th e Messaging application. Tip: You can access the files in the device or on the memory card using a co mpatible acces sory that supports the File Transfer Profile Client service (for example, a laptop computer). A Bluetooth connection is disc onnected automatically after sending or receiving data. Only Nokia PC Suite and some enhancements such as headse ts may maintain a connection even if not actively used. Pair devices Open the paired devices tab. Before pairing, decide on your own passcode (1-16 digits), and agree with the user of th e other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a fixed passcode. Y ou need th e passco de o n l y w he n y o u c o n n ec t t h e devices for the first time. After pairing, it is possible to authorise the connection. Pa iring and authorising the connection makes connecting quicker and easi er, as you do not have to accept the connec tion between paired devices every time you establish a connection. The passcode for remote SIM a ccess must have 16 digi ts. 1. Select Options > New paired device . The device starts to search for Bluetooth device s within range. If you have sent data using Bluetooth befo re, a list of the previous search results is di splayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 2. Select the device with which you want to pair, and enter the passcode. The same passco de must be entered to the other device as well. 3. Select Yes to make the connection between your device and the other device automatic, or No to confirm the connection manually every time a connection attempt is made. After pairing, the devi ce is saved to th e paired devices page. To give a nickname to the paired device, select Options > Assign short name . The nickname is on ly displayed in your device. To delete a pairing, select the device whose pairing you want to delete and Options > Delete . To delete all pairings, select Options > Delete all . I f you are currently connected to a device and cancel the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately, and th e connection is ended. To allow a paired device to connect automati cally to your device, select Set as authorised . Connections between your device and the other device can be made with out your knowledge. No separate acce ptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or comput er, or devices that belong to someone you trust. If you want to accept connection requests from the other device sepa rately every time, select Set as unauthorised . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 95
To use a Bluetooth audio enha ncement such as a Bluetooth handsfree or headset, you need to pair your device with the enhancement. See the enhancement us er guide for the passcode and further instructio ns. To connect to the aud io enhancement, switch on th e enhancement. Some audio enhancements connect au tomatically to your device. Otherwise open the paired devices tab, scroll to the enhancement, and select Options > Connect to audio device . Security tips When you ar e not using Bluetooth connect ivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidde n . Do not pair with an unknown device. SIM access profile With the SIM access profile, you can access the SIM card of your device fr om a comp atible car kit device. This way, you do not need a separate SIM card to access SIM card data and connect to the GSM network. To use the SIM access profile, you need the following: ⢠Compatible car kit device that supp orts Bluetooth wire less technology ⢠Valid SIM card in your device When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible conn ected accessory, s uch as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this mode. To make calls, you must first leave the remote SIM mode. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. For more information about car kit devices and compatibility with your device, see the Nokia web site and your car kit user guide. Use the SIM access profile 1. Select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Re mote SIM mode > On . 2. Activate Bluetooth in the car kit. 3. Use your car kit to start a search for compatible devices. For instructions, see the us er guide of your car kit. 4. Select your device from the list of compatible devices. 5. To pair the devices, ente r the Bluetooth passcode shown on the display of the car kit to your device. Tip: If you have already accessed the SIM card from the car kit with the act ive user prof ile, the car kit searc hes automatically for a device with the SIM card. I f it finds your device, and automatic authorisation is activated, the car kit auto matically con nects to the GSM network when you switch on the car ignit ion. When you activate the remote SIM access profi le, you can use applications on your device that do not need network or SIM services. To make connections between yo ur device and the car kit without sep arate acceptance or authorisation, select Menu > é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 96
Connectivity > Bluet ooth , and open the paired devices tab. Scroll to the car kit, press the scroll key, and enter the Bluetooth passcode. When the device asks to make the connection automatic, select Yes . If you select No , connection requests from this car kit must be accepted separately every time. To end the remote SIM access connection from your device, select Menu > Connectivity > Blueto oth > Remote SIM mode > Off . Wireless LAN Note: Using WLAN may be restricted in some countries. For example, in France, you are only allowed to use WLAN indoors. For more information, contact your local authorities. Your device can detect and co nnect to a wireless local area network (WLAN). To use a WL AN, a network must be available in the location and your devi ce must b e connected to it. WLAN connectio ns Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryp tion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. To use WLAN, you must crea te an internet access point in a WLAN. Use the access point for a pplications that need t o connect to the internet. A WLAN connection is es tablished when you create a data connection using a WLAN access point. The active WLAN connec tion is ended when you end the data connection. Y ou ca n also end the connection manually. See "Connection manager" , p. 99 . You can use WLAN du ring a voice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the Offli ne profile, you can still use WLAN, if availa ble. Remember to com ply with any ap plicable safety requirements when es tablishing and using a WLAN connection. If you move the device to another locat ion within the WLAN and out of range of a WLAN access point, the roaming functionality can automatica lly connect your device t o another access point that be longs to the same WLAN. As long as you remain within range of access points th at belong to the same network, your device can stay connected to the network. Tip: To check the unique media access control (M AC) address that identifies your device, for ex ample to configure the MAC address of your device to a WLAN router, enter *#62209526# on the device keypad. The MAC address is shown on the device display. See WLAN availability To have your device show WLAN availability, select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Connecti on > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability . If WLAN is available, is shown on the display. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 97
Tip: You can also scan fo r networks in range. WLAN wizard Select Menu > Connectivity > WLAN w iz. . The WLAN wizard helps you find an d connect to a wireless LAN. When you open the a pplication, your dev ice starts to scan for available WLANs and lists them. To update the list of available WL ANs, select Options > Refresh . To mark up WLANs in the list of found networks, select Filt er WLAN networks . The selected network s are filtered out the next time the app lication se arches for wireless LANs. To start or continue browsing the web using the access point of the WLAN, scroll to the desired network, an d select Options > Start web browsing or Cont.web browsing . To disconnect the active connection to t he WLAN, select Options > Disconnect WLAN . To view the details of the WLAN, select Options > Details . To save the acce ss point of the WLAN , select Options > Define access point . Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryp tion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. Use the wizard on the home screen On the home screen, the WLAN wizard shows the status of your WLAN connections and network searches. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and press the scroll key. Dependin g on the status, you ca n start the web browser using a WLAN connection, connect to your net call service, disconnect from a WLAN, search for WLANs, or set the network scanning on or off. If WLAN scanning is off and you a re not connected to any WLAN, WLAN scanning of f is displayed on the home screen. To set scanning on and search for available WLANs, scroll to the row showing the status, and press the scr oll key. To start a search for available WLANs, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll key, and select Search for WLAN . To set WLAN scanning off, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll key, and select Switch WLAN scan off . When Start w eb browsing or Use fo r is selected, the WLAN wizard automatically creates an access point for the selected WLAN. The access point can also be used with other applications requiring WLAN connection. If you select a secured WLAN, you are asked to enter the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct service set identifier (SSID). é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 98
To use the found WLAN for a ne t call connection, scroll to the row showing the status, and pr ess the scroll key. Select Use for , the desired net call service, and the WLAN to be used. Connection manager Select Menu > Connectivity > Co nn. mgr. . View and end active connections To see the open data connections, select Active d ata connections . To view detailed information about network connections, select a connection from the list and Options > Det ails . The type of information shown depe nds on the connection type. To end the selected netw ork connection, select Optio ns > Disconnect . To end all active network conn ections simultaneously, select Options > Disconnect all . Search for WLAN To search for WLANs availa ble within range, s elect Available WLAN networks . The available WLANs are listed with their network mode (infrastructure or ad-hoc), signal strength, and network encryption indica tors, and whether your device has an active connection with th e network. To view the details of a networ k, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To create an internet a ccess point for a network, select Options > Define access point . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 99
Security and data management Manage the data and software on your device, and take ca re of the security of the device and its contents. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one appl ication with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. Lock the device To prevent access to the conten ts of your device, lock the device when in home screen. Press the power key, select Lock phone , and enter your lock code. The default lock co de is 12345. To unlock, press the left selection key, enter your lock code, and press the scroll key. To change the lock code, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM card > Lock code . Enter the old code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphab ets and digits can be used, and both up percase and lowercase alphabet s are possible. You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text message to the device. To enable remote locking and to define the text for the message, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM ca rd > Allow remote l ock > Yes . Enter the remote lock message and confirm the message. Th e message must be at least 5 characters long. Memory There are two types of memory into which you can save data or install applications: devi ce memory and memory card. Free memory To see how much memory is currently in use, how much free memory remains, and how much memory is consumed by each data type , select Menu > Options > Memory details > Pho ne memory or Memory card . Tip: To ensure that you have adequate memory, transfer data regu larly to a memory c ard or computer, or use File manager to delete files you no longer need. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.si s, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To mainta in s ufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message at tachment, delete the message from the Messaging inbox. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 100
Memory card Select Menu > Tools > Memory . If you cannot use a memory card in your device , you may have the wrong type of memory card, the card may not be formatted for your device, or the card has a corrupted file system. You r Nokia device sup ports the FAT16 and FAT3 2 file system for memory cards. MicroSDHC This device uses microSD and microSDHC memory cards. To ensure interoperability, use only compatible memory cards with th is device. Check the compatibility of a memory card w ith its manufacturer or provider. Other memory cards than microSD and microSDHC cards are not comp atible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card may damage the memory card as well as the device, an d data stored on th e incompatible card may be corrupted. Use a memory card To format a memory card for your device, select Option s > Format memory card . When a memory card is formatted, all data on the ca rd is lost permanently. Consu lt your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card before you can use it. To change the name of the memory card, select Options > Memory card name . Memory card security Select Menu > Tools > Memory . You can protect a memory card with a password to prevent unauthorised access. To set a password, sele ct Optio ns > Set password . The password can be u p to 8 characters long and is case-sensitive . The password is stored i n your device. You do not need to enter it again while you use the memory card on the same device. If you use the memory card on another device, you a re asked for the password. Not all memory cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, select Options > Remove pass word . When you remove the password, the data on the memory card is not protected against unauthorised use. To open a locked memory card, select Options > Unloc k memory card . Enter the password. If you cannot recall the password to unlock a locked memory card, you may reformat the card , in which case the card is unlocked and password remove d. Formatting a memory card destroys all data stored on the card. Encryption Select Menu > Tools > Encryption . Encrypt your device or memory card to prevent outsiders from accessing your important information. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 101
Encrypt device memory or memory card To encrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To encrypt the memory card, select Memory card and from the following: ⢠Encrypt without savi ng key â Encrypt the memory card without saving the encryption key. If you select this option, you cannot use the me mory card in other devices, and if you restore factory setti ngs, you cannot decry pt the memory card. ⢠Encrypt and save key â Encrypt the memory card and save the key manually in th e default folder. For security, store the key to a safe place outside the device. For example, you can send the key to your computer. Enter a pass phrase for the key and a name for the key file. The pass phrase should be long and complex. ⢠Encrypt with restored key â Encrypt the memory card with a key you have received. S elect the key file, and enter the pass phrase. Decrypt device memory or memory card Always remember to decrypt th e device memory and/or the memory card before updating the device software. To decrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To decrypt the memory card without destroying the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt . To decrypt the memory card an d destroy the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt and turn off encrypti on . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling service, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dialling service. Contact your service provider for more information. 1. To restrict calls from your device, select Op tions > New SIM contact and enter the contact name and phone number to the list of numbers to which calls are allowed, or select Add from Cont acts to copy the conta ct from Contacts. To restrict calls by a country p refix, enter the country prefix in the list of numbers. All phone numbers to which calls are allowed must start with this country prefix. 2. Select Options > Activate fixed dialling . You need your PIN2 code to activ ate and deactivate fixed di alling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Conta ct your service provider if you do not have the code. To cancel the service, select Options > Deactivate fixe d dialling . Tip: To send text messages to the SIM contacts while the fixed dialling service is active, you need to add t he text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 102
Certificate manager Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Security > Certific ate manage ment . Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of software but do not guarantee safety. Th ere are four different types of certificates: authority certific ates, personal certificates, trusted site certificates, and devi ce certificates. During a secure connection, a server may send a server certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is ch ecked through an authority certificate stored in your device. You receive notification if the identity of the server is no t authentic or i f you do no t have the correct certificate in your device. You can download a certificate from a web site, or receive a certificate as a message. Certif icates s hould be used when you connect to an online b ank or a remote server to transfer confidential information. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viru ses or other malicious software, and to check the authenticity of software when you download and install software to your device. Tip: When you add a new certificat e, check its authenticity. View certificate details You can only be s ure of the co rrect identity of a server when the signature and the validity pe riod of a server certificate have been checked. To view certificate details, open a certificate folder, and select a certificate and Options > Certificate details . One of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate n ot trusted â You have not set any application to use the certi ficate. You may want to change the trust settings. ⢠Expire d certific ate â The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate n ot valid yet â The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Certificate trust settings Trusting a cert ificate means that you au thorise it to verify web pages, e-mail servers, software packages, and other data. Only trusted certific ates ca n be used to verify services and software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote co nnections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer an y protection by itself; the certificate manager must co ntain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted li fetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 103
Before changing any cert ificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the own er of the certificate an d that the certificate really belong s to th e listed owner. To change the trus t settings, select a certificate and Options > Trust sett ings . Select an application field and press the scroll key to select Yes or No . You cannot cha nge the trust settings of a personal certificate. Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that can use the certificate is displayed: ⢠Symbian installatio n â New Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet â E-mail and graphics. ⢠App. installat ion â New Java⢠application. ⢠Online certif. check â Online certificate status protocol. Security modules Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Security > Security module . View and edit security modules To view or edit a security mo dule, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information abou t a security module, select Options > Security detail s . To edit the PIN codes for the security module, select Module PIN to edit the PIN code for the security module or Signing PIN to edit the PIN code for digital signatures. You may not be able to change these co des for all security modules. The key store contains the cont ents of the security module. To delete the key store , select Key store , select the desired key store, and Options > Delete . Y ou may no t be able to delete the key store of all security modules. Back up data It is recommended to back up device memory regularly t o the memory card or a compatible computer. To back up information from the device memory to a memory card, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Options > Back up phone memory . To restore information from the memory card to the device memory, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Options > Restore from card . You can also connect your device to a compatible computer and use Nokia PC Suit e to bac k up data. Application manager Select Menu > Installation s > App. mgr. . You can install two types of ap plications and soft ware on your device: ⢠Applications and software specifically intended for your device or compatible with the Symbian operating system. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 104
These software ins tallation files have the extension .sis or .si sx. ⢠Java ME⢠applications comp atible with the Symbia n operating system. The Java a pplication installation file extensions are .jad or .jar. Installation files ma y be transferred to your device from a compatible comput er, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or with Bluetooth. During the installation, the devi ce checks the integrity of the package to be installed. The device shows information about the checks being carried out, and you are given options to continue or cancel the installation. If you install applications that require a network connection, note that the power consumption of your device may increase when you us e these applications. Tip: When browsing web pages, you can download a n installation file and install it immediately. Note, however, that the connection runs in the background during the installation. Install applications Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such a s applications that are Symbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified⢠testing. To download and install soft ware from the web, select Download apps. . Select the application an d Options > Install . To view the details of an installed software package, select the application and Opt ions > View details . To view the installation log, select Optio ns > View log . A list shows what software has be en installed and removed, and the date of the ins tallation or removal. If you encounter problems with the device after installing a software pa ckage, use this list to find out which software package may be the cause of the problem. The info rmation in this list may also help you pinpoint problems that are caused by software packages that are incomp atible with each other. To remove software, se lect Options > Remove . If you remove software, you can only reinstall it by using the original software package file, or by restoring a full backup that contains the removed software p ackage. If you remove a softwar e package, you m ay no longer be able to open files created with th at software. If another software package depends on the software packa ge that you removed, the other so ftware pa ckage ma y stop wo rking. Re fer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Installation settings To modify the installation settings, select Opt ions > Settings and from the following: ⢠Software ins tallation â Select to install signed applications only or all applications. ⢠Online certificate check â To check the validity of certificates when an ap plic ation is installed, select On. If validity cannot be verified, you are asked if you want to continue installation. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 105
⢠Default web address â The vali dity of a certificate is checked from the default addres s if the certificate does not include its own web address. To change the default address, select Default web addre ss , and enter the new address. Java security settings To specify security sett ings for a Java applicat ion, select Options > Settings . You can define which functions the Java application can access. The value that you ca n set for each functionality depends on the pro tection doma in of the software package. ⢠Access point â Select an access p oint that the application may use when making network connections. ⢠Network acc ess â Allow the application to create a data connection to the network. ⢠Messaging â Allow the app lication to send messages. ⢠Application auto-start â Allow the app lication to st art automatica lly. ⢠Connecti vity â Allow the applica tion to activate a data connection, such as a Bluetooth connection. ⢠Multimedia â Allow the appl ication to use the multimedia features of your device. ⢠Read user data â Allow the application to read your calendar entries, con tacts, or any o ther personal data. ⢠Edit user data â Allow the application to add personal data, such as ent ries to Contacts. ⢠Positio ning â Allow the applicati on to use the location data in you r device . ⢠Landma rks â Allow the ap plication to use the landmarks in your device. You can define how you are prom pted to confirm the Ja va application's access to the device functions. Select one of the following values: ⢠Ask every time â Require the Java a pplication to ask for your confirmation each time it uses the functionality. ⢠Ask first time â Require the Java application to ask for initial confirmation to use the functionality. ⢠Always allowed â Allow the Java applicati on to use the functionality without your confirmation. The securit y settings help protect your device ag ainst harmful Java applications that m ay use the functions of your device without your permis sion. Only select Always allowed if you know the supplier and trustworthiness of the application. ⢠Not allowed â Prevent the Java ap plication from using the functionality. Activation keys Select Menu > Tools > Actv. keys . Some media files, such as imag es, music, or video clips, are protected by digital usag e rights. The activati on keys for such files may allow or restrict their usage. For example, with some activation keys you may lis ten to a music track on ly a limited number of times. During one playback session you may rewind, fast-forward, or pause the track, bu t once you stop it, you have u sed on e of the instances allowed. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 106
Use activation keys Digital rights manag ement (DRM) protected content comes with an ass ociated activ ation key th at defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected cont ent, to back up both the activation keys a nd the content, use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Suite. If your device has WMDRM-protected c ontent, both the activation keys and the cont ent will be lost if the device memory is formatted. Y ou may also lose the activation keys and the content if the files on you r device get corrupted. Losing the activati on keys or the content may limi t your ability to use the sa me content on your device agai n. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activat ion keys ma y be connected to a speci fic SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view your activation keys by type, select Valid keys , Invalid keys , or Not in use . To view the key details, select Option s > Key deta ils . The following details are disp layed for each media file: ⢠Status â The status is Activation key is valid , Activation ke y expired , or A ctivation key not yet valid . ⢠Content se nding â Allowed means th at you can send the file to another device. Not allowed mean s that yo u cannot send the file to another device. ⢠Content in phone â Yes means that the file is in the device and the path of the file is displayed. No means that the related file is not currently in the device. To activate a key, go to the Activation keys main view, and select Invalid keys > Option s > Get act ivation key . Establish a network connect ion at the prompt, and you are directed to a web site where yo u can purchase rights to the media. To remove file rights, open the valid keys tab or the keys not in use tab, scroll to the desired file, and select Option s > Delete . If there are several rights related to the same media file, all the rights are deleted. The group key view displays all of the files related to a group right. If you have downloaded multiple media files with the same rights, they are all displa yed in this view. You can open the group view from either the va lid keys or invalid keys tabs. To access these files, open the group rights folder. Data synchronisation Select Menu > Tools > Sync . With Sync, you can synchronis e your contacts, calen dar entries, or notes with corresponding applications on a compatible computer or remote internet server. Your synchronisation settings ar e saved in a synchronisation profile. The Sync application uses SyncML techn ology for remote synchronisation. Fo r information on SyncML compatibility, contact the su pplie r of the applications with which you want to synchronis e your device. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 107
You may rec eive the sy nchronis ation settings as a message from your service provider. Th e available applications you ca n synchronise may vary. C ontact yo ur service provider for more information. Create a synchr o nisation profile There is a Nokia PC Suite sync hronisation profile available in your device. You d o not need to edit it if you synch ronise your device with a computer usin g Nokia PC Suite. To create a new profile, select Options > New sync profile and as sign a name fo r the profile, select the applications to synchronise with the profile, and specify the needed connection settings. Contact your service provider for details. Select applications to synchronise 1. To select the applications to synchronise with a synchronisation profile, select Options > Edit sync profile > Applications . 2. Select the desired application, and select Include i n sync > Yes . 3. Specify the Remote database and Synchronisation type settings. Synchronisation connection settings To define the connection settings of a new profile, select Options > New sync prof ile > Connection settings and define the following settings: ⢠Server ve rsion â Select the SyncM L version you can use with the remote server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the server ID of the remote server. This setting is only available if you select 1.2 a s the SyncML version. ⢠Data bearer â Select the data bearer to connect to the remote server duri ng synchronisation. ⢠Access point â Select the a ccess point to use for the synchronisation connection, or create a new access point. You can also choose to be as ked for the access point every time you start synchronising. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the server that contains the database with which you want to synchronise your device. ⢠Port â En ter the port nu mber of the remote dat abase server. ⢠User name â Enter your user name to identify your device to the server. ⢠Password â Enter your password to identify your device to the server. ⢠Allow sync requests â To allow synchronisation to start from the remote database server, select Yes . ⢠Accept all sync reque sts â To have your device ask for your confirmation before a ccepting synchronisation from the server, select No . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 108
⢠Network aut henticati on â To authenticate your device to the network before synchronisation, select Yes . Enter your network user name and network password. Mobile VPN Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > VPN . The Nokia mobile virtual privat e network (VPN) client creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, such as e- mail. Your device connects from a mobile network, through the intern et, to a corporate VP N gateway that acts as a front door to the compatible corp orate network. VPN client uses IP Security (IPSec) technology . IPSec is a framework of open standards for supporting secure exchange of data over IP networks. VPN policies define the method used by the VPN client and a VPN gateway to au thenticate each oth er, and the encryption algorithms that they use to help protect the confidentiali ty of data. Contact your compan y's IT department for a V PN policy. To install and configure the VPN client, certificates, and policies, contact the IT administra tor of your organisation . Manage VPN Select VPN management , and f rom the following: ⢠VPN policies â Install, view, an d update VPN policies. ⢠VPN policy servers â Edit the connection settings of VPN policy servers from which you can install and update VPN policies. A policy server refers to a Nokia Security Service Manager (NSSM), which is not necessarily required. ⢠VPN log â View the lo g for your VPN policy installations, updates and synchronisations, and other VPN connections. Create VPN access points An access point is where your phone connects to the network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to browse web pages you must first define inte rnet access points for these servic es. VPN ac cess p oints pair VPN p olicie s with re gular internet access points to create secure connections. Your service provider may preset some or all acces s points for your device, and you may not be ab le to create, edit, or remove them. Contact your company's IT department for the correct settings. Open a destination , select a VPN access point, select Edit , and define the following: ⢠Connection name â Enter a name for the VPN access point . ⢠VPN policy â Select the VPN poli cy to combine with the internet access point. ⢠Internet access point â Select the internet access point with which to combine the VPN policy to create secure connections for data trans fer. ⢠Proxy server ad dress â Enter the proxy ser ver address of the private network. ⢠Proxy port number â Enter the proxy port number. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 109
Use a VPN connection in an application You may have to prove your identity when you log on to the enterprise network. Contact your company's IT department for the credentials. To use a VPN connection in an application, the applicati on must be associated wit h a VPN access p oint. Tip: You can configure the application's connection setting to Always ask , in which case you select the VPN access point from a list of connections when a connection is established. 1. In the application in which you want to create a VPN connection, select a VPN acces s point as the access point. 2. If you are using legacy authentication, enter your VPN user name and passcode or password. I f the SecurID token has become out of synchronis ation with the clock of the ACE/Server, enter the next passcode. If y ou are using certificate-based authenti cation, you may have to en ter the key store password. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 110
Settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings . You can define a nd modify various setti ngs of your device. Modifying these settings affects the operation of your devi ce across sever al applications. Some settings may be preset fo r the device or sent to you in a special messag e by your se rvice provider. You may not be able to change such settings. Select the setting you want t o edit to do the following: ⢠Switch between two values , such as on or off. ⢠Select a value from a list. ⢠Open a text editor to enter a value. ⢠Open a slider to decrease or increase the value by scrolling left or right. General settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General . Select from the following: ⢠Personalisation â Change the display settings and personalise the device. ⢠Date and time â Change the date and time. ⢠Enhancemen t â Define the settings for your enhancements. ⢠Security â Define the s ecurity settings. ⢠Factory settings â R estore the original settings of the device. ⢠Positioni ng â Define the positioning method and server for GPS-based appl ications. Personalisation settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Personalisation . Display settings To define the level of light that the device needs before switching on the backlight, select Display > Light sensor . To change the text size, select Display > Fo nt size . To adjust the length of time th e display can be left idle before the screen saver is activat ed, select Display > Power saver time-out . To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select Display > Welcome note / logo . You can either choose the default welcome note, enter your own text, or select an image. To set how quickly the display di ms after the last keypres s, select Display > Light time-out . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 111
Standby mode settings To select whether to use the home screen, select Home screen > Home scre en . To change the home screen mode setti ngs, select Home screen > Mode se ttings . To assign shortcuts for the device key s, select Home screen > Key shortcuts . These shortcuts are not available in the home screen. Tone settings To select a ringing tone for voice calls, select Tones > Ringing tone . To select a ringing tone for video calls, select Tones > Video call tone . To set the ringing type, select Tones > Ringing typ e . You can also set the device to sound a ringing t one that is a combination of the spoken name of the caller and the selected ringing tone, when someone from your contacts list calls you. Select Tones > Say caller's name . To set the volume level of the ringing tone, select Tones > Ringing volume . To set the v arious alert tones, select To nes > Message al ert tone , E-mail alert tone , Calendar alarm tone , or Clock alarm tone . To set the device to vibrate when you receive a call, select Tones > Vibrating alert . To set the volume level of th e device keypad tones, select Tones > Keypad tones . To set the warning tones on or off, select Tones > Warning tones . Language settings To set the language used on the device display, se lect Langua ge > Pho ne langu age . To select the langua ge in which you write notes and messages, select Language > Writing language . To select whether to use the predic tive text i nput, selec t Langua ge > Pr edictive te xt . To define the settings for the predictive text in put, select Predicti ve text setti ngs . Notification light When you receive a message or miss a call, the scroll key starts blinking to indicate the even t. To set the length of time you want the scroll key to blink, select Notification light > Blink light for . To select of which events you want to be notified, select Notification light > Notified even ts . Settings for One-touch keys Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Personalisation > One-touch keys . To select which application an d task is opened when you press a One-touch key, select the key and Option s > Open . To restore the preset appl ications and tasks, sele ct Restore defaults . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 112
Date and time settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Date and time . To set the current date and time, select Date and Time . To define your time zone, select Time zone . To update the time, date, an d time zone information automatic ally (network ser vice), select Network operato r time > Auto-update . To select whether to us e the 12-hour or 24-hour clo ck system and with which symbol to sepa rate hours and min utes, select Time format and Time separator . To determine the date format and separator, select Date format and Date separat or . To define the clock type, s elect Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To select the tone for the alarm clock, s elect Clock alarm tone . To determine the week days that are work days for you, select Workdays . Enhancement settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Enhancement . Common enhancement settings With most en hanc ements, you can do the following: To determine which profile is activated when you attach an enhancement to your device, select the enhancement and Default profile . To let the device an swer phon e calls automatically after 5 seconds when an enhancem ent is atta ched, select Automatic answer > On . If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent in the selected profile, the automatic answer is disabled. To illuminate the device while it is attached t o an enhancement, select Lights > On . E-mail key settings To select which mail box to open with the e-mail key, select E-mail key settings > E-mail key , and press the scroll key. Security settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Security . Define the following security settings: ⢠Phone and SIM card â Adjust the security settin gs for your dev ice and S IM card. ⢠Certificate manageme nt â Manage your security certificates. ⢠Security modul e â Manage your security module. Avoid using codes that are si milar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks. When you change a cod e, enter the current code, then the new code twice. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 113
Device and SIM card security To change the PIN code, select Phone an d SIM card > PIN code . The new code must be 4 to 8 digits long. The PIN code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use and is provided with the SIM card. A f ter three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is bloc ked, and you need to use the PUK code to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. To set the keypad to lock automat ically after a defined period, select Phone and SIM card > Keypad autolock period . To set a time-out after which the device is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered, select Phone an d SIM card > Phone autol ock period . Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select Non e to set off the autolock period. When th e device is locked, you can still answer incoming calls, an d calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To set a new lock code, select Phone and SI M card > Lock code . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the current code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alp habets and digits can be used, and both uppercase and lowercase alphabets are poss ible. The device notifies you if the lock code is not properly formatted. Restore original settings To restore the original device settings, select Factory settings . To do this, you need your device lock code. After resetting, the device may take a longer time to power on. Documents, co ntact information , calendar entr ies, and files are unaffected. Telephone settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone . Select from the following: ⢠Call â Define general call settings. ⢠Call divert â Define your call divert settings. See "Call divert" , p. 36 . ⢠Call barring â D e f in e y o u r c a ll barring settings. See "Call barring" , p. 37 . ⢠Network â Adjust the network settings. Call settings To display your phone number to the person you a re calling, select Call > Send my caller ID > Yes . To let the network determine whether your ca ller ID is sent, select Set by network . To display your net call addres s to the person you are callin g using a net call, select Call > Send my internet call ID > Yes . To be notified of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress, select Call > Call waiting > Options > Activate . To check i f the function is active on th e network, select Option s > Check status . To select whether net calls alert or not, selec t Call > Internet call alert . You a re notified of mis sed net calls with a notification. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 114
To set the default call type, select Call > Default call type and select Vo ice cal l if you make a GSM calls, or Intern et call if you make net calls. To send a text message automa tically to the person who is calling you informing why y ou cannot answ er the incoming call, select Call > Reject call with SMS > Yes . To set the text for the message, se lect Call > Message text . Network settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Network . To select the network mode, select Network mode and Dual mode , UMTS , or GSM . In the dual mode, the device switches automatically betw een networks. Tip: UMTS enables faster data transfer, but may increase the demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. In regions close to both GSM and UMTS networks, selecting Dual mode may cause constant jumping between the two networks, which also increases the demand on battery power. To select the operator, select Operator sel ection and Manual to choose from availa ble networks, or Autom atic to have the device select the network automatically . To set the device to indicate wh en it is used in Micro Cellular Network (MCN), select Cell info di splay > On . Connection settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection . Select from the following: ⢠Bluetooth â Edit the Bluetooth settings. See "Send and receive data with Bluetooth" , p. 94 . ⢠USB â Edit th e data cable setti ngs. See "Data cable" , p. 93 . ⢠Access points â Set up new or edit existing ac cess points. S o m e o r al l a c c e s s p o i n t s m a y b e p r e s e t f o r y o u r d e v i c e b y your service provider, and you may not be able to crea te, edit, or remove them. ⢠Packet data â Determine when pa cket d ata connections are used, and enter the access point if you use your device as a modem fo r a computer. ⢠Wireless L AN â Determine if the device displays an indicator when a WLAN is available, and ho w often the device searches for networks. ⢠SIP settings â View or create session initiati on protocol (SIP) profiles. ⢠Internet tel. â Define settings for net calls. ⢠Configurations â View and delete trusted servers from which your device may rece ive configurat ion settings. ⢠APN control â Restrict packet data connections. See "Restrict packet data" , p. 120 . This option is only available when a USIM card that suppor ts this feature is inserted. Access points Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a data connect ion to the network. To use e-mail and mult imedia services or to browse é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 115
web pages, you must first defi ne access points for these services. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. To create a new access point, select Options > New access point o r s e l e c t a n e x i s t i n g a c c e s s p o i n t f r o m t h e l i s t a n d t h e n Options > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for the new one. Packet data (GPRS) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connectio n > Packet data . Your device su pports packet da ta connections, such as GPRS in the GSM network. When you are using your device in GSM and UMTS networks, it is poss ible to have multiple data connections active at the same time; a ccess points can share a data connection, and data connections remain active, for example, during voice calls. See "Connection manager" , p. 99 . To define the packet data settings, select Packet data connection and select When avail able to register the device to the packet data network wh en you switch the device on in a supported network, or When need ed to establish a packet data connect ion only when an application or action requires it. Select Access point and enter the access point name provided by your service provider to use the device as a packet data modem to your computer. These settings affect all a ccess points for packet data connections. WLAN settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Connection > Wireless LAN . To have an indicator disp layed when there is a WLAN available in your current location, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for available WLANs and update the indicator, select Scan for networks . This setting is not availa ble unless you select Show WLAN availability > Yes . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings . The advanced WLAN settings are norma lly defined automati cally, and changing them is not recommended. To edit the settings manually , select Automa tic configuration > Disabled , and define the following: ⢠Long retry limit â Enter the maximum number of transmission attempts if th e device does not receive a receiving acknowledgement signal from th e network. ⢠Short retry limit â Enter the maximum number of transmission attempts if th e device does not receive a clear-to-send signal from the network. ⢠RTS threshold â Sel e ct t he d at a pa c k et size at which the WLAN access point device issu es a request to send before sending the packet. ⢠TX power lev el â Select the power level of your device when sending data. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 116
⢠Radio measurem ents â Enable or disable the radio measurements. ⢠Power saving â Select whether to use the WLA N power saving mechanism to sa ve the power in the device bat tery. Using the power saving mech anism enhances the battery performance but may weaken WLAN interoperability. To restore all settings to their original values, select Options > Restore defaults . WLAN security settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points > Options > New access point , or select an access point and Opti ons > Edit . In the access point settings, select WLAN security mode and the desired mode. WEP security settings Select WEP as the WLAN security mode. The wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption method encrypts data before it is transmitted. A ccess to the network is denied to users who do not have the required WEP keys. When the WEP security mode is in use, and your device receives a data packet not encrypted with the WEP keys, the data is discarded. In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same WEP key. Select WLAN securit y settings and from the fo llowing: ⢠WEP key in use â Select the desired WEP key. ⢠Authentica tion type â Select Open or Shared . ⢠WEP key setti ngs â Edit the settings for the WEP key. WEP key settings In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the sa me WEP key. Select WLAN securi ty settings > WEP key settings and from the following: ⢠WEP encryption â Select the desired WEP encryption key length. ⢠WEP key form at â Select whether you want to enter t he WEP key data in ASCII or Hexadecimal format. ⢠WEP key â Enter the WEP key data. 802.1x security settings Select 802.1x as the WLAN security mode. 802.1x authenticates and authorises devices to access a wireless network, and prevents access if the authorisation process fails. Select WLAN securi ty settings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WP A2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â If you selecte d WPA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug-ins defined in your device t o use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shared key â I f you selecte d WPA/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connect. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 117
WPA security settings Select WPA/WPA2 as the WLAN security mode. Select WLAN securit y settings and from the fo llowing: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Sel ect EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â I f you select WPA/WP A2 > EAP , select which EAP pl ug-ins defined in you r device to use with the access point . ⢠Pre-shared key â I f you select WPA/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which y ou connect. ⢠WPA2 only mode â To allow both TKIP and AES (Advanced Encryption Stan dard) encryption, select Off . To allow AES only, select On Wireless LAN plugins Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . The EAP (extensible authentic ation protocol) plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authentication servers, and the different EAP plu g-ins make possible the use of various EAP metho ds (network service). You can view t he EAP plug-ins curr ently installed in your device (network service). EAP plug-ins 1. To define the EAP plug-in settings, select Op tions > New access point and define an access point that uses WLAN as a data bearer. 2. Select 802.1x or WPA/WPA2 as the securi ty mode. 3. Select WLAN security sett ings > WPA/WPA2 > EAP > EAP plug-in settings . Use EAP plug-ins To use an EAP plug-i n when you connect to a WL AN using th e access point, selec t the desired plug -in and Options > Enable . The EAP plug -ins enabled for us e with this access point have a check mark nex t to them. To not use a plug-i n, select Option s > Disable . To edit the EAP plug-in settings, select Options > Edit . To change the priority of th e EAP plug-in settings, select Options > Raise priorit y to attempt to use the plug-in before other plug-ins when co nnecting to the netw ork with the access point, or Options > Lower priority to use this plug-in for network authe ntication after attemp ting to use other plug- ins. See the device help for more information on EAP plugins. Session initiation protocol (SIP) settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Connection > SIP settings . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 118
Session initiation protocols (SIP) are used for creating, modifying, and terminati ng ce rtain types of communication sessions with one or more participants (network service). Typical communication session s are video sharing and net calls. SIP profiles include settin gs for these sessions. The SIP profile used by default fo r a communication session is underlined . To create a SIP profile, select Options > New SIP pr ofile > Use default profile or Us e existing profile . To select the SIP profile y ou want to use by defa ult for communication sessions, select Options > Default profile . Edit SIP profiles Select Options > Edit , and select from the following: ⢠Profile nam e â Enter a name for the SIP profile. ⢠Service profile â Select IETF or Noki a 3GPP . ⢠Default acces s point â Select the access poin t to use for the internet connection. ⢠Public user na me â Enter your user name received from your service provider. ⢠Use compr ession â Select if compression is used. ⢠Registration â S elect the registra tion mode . ⢠Use secur ity â Select if security negotiation is used. ⢠Proxy server â Enter the proxy server setti ngs for this SIP profile. ⢠Registrar server â Enter the registra tion server settings for this SIP profile. Edit SIP proxy servers Select Options > New SIP profile or Edit > Proxy server . Proxy servers are intermediate servers between a browsing service and its users use d by some service provider s. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Select from the following: ⢠Proxy server ad dress â Enter the host name or IP address of the proxy server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the proxy server realm. ⢠User name and Password â Enter your user name and password for the proxy server. ⢠Allow loose routin g â Select if loose routing is allowed. ⢠Transport ty pe â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the proxy server. Edit registration servers Select Options > New SIP profil e or Edit > Registrar server . Select from the following: ⢠Registrar server address â Enter the host name or IP address of the registrar server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the registrar server realm. ⢠User name and Password â Enter your user name and password for the registrar server. ⢠Transport ty pe â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the registrar server. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 119
Net call settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Internet te l. . To create a new net call profile, select Options > New profile . To edit an existing profile, select Options > Edit . Configuration settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Configurations . You can receive messages from your service provider or company information ma nagement containing configuration settings for trust ed servers. These sett ings are automatic ally saved in the Co nf igurations folder. You may receive configuration settings for access points, multimedia, or e-mail services, and synchr onisation settings from trusted servers. To delete configu rations fo r a trusted serv er, select Options > Delete . The configuration settings for other applications provided by this server are also deleted. Restrict packet data Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > APN control . With the access poin t control se rvice, you can restrict packet data connections from your device to cert ain access points only. Your SIM card may not support the access point control service. Contact your service provider for more information. To restrict the packet data connections from your device, select Options > Activate restrictions . You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate access point con trol or to edit the packet data access p oints on the control list. To add access points that ca n be used for packet data connections to the control list, select Options > Add name manually . To enable connections to an operator-provided access point, create an empty access point. To remove access points from the list, select O ptions > Remove . Application settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Applicat ions . Select an application from th e list to adjust its setting s. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 120
Shortcuts Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in your device. Shortcuts can m ake th e use of the applications more efficient. General shortcuts General shortcuts Power key Press and hold to switch your device on and off. Press once to switch between profiles. Home screen Left selection key function key Lock and unlock the keypad. Call key Open the call log. 0 Press and hold to open your home p age in the Web browser. 1 Press and hold to call your voice mailbox. Number key (2âÂÂ9) Call a phone number using speed dialling. You must first activate speed dialling at Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On . Web * Zoom in the page. # Zoom out the page. 2 Open the search dialog. 5 View the active pages. 8 View the page overview. 9 Open the dialog for entering a new web address. 0 Open the bookmarks folder. Image viewer Call key Send the image. 0 Zoom out. 5 Zoom in. 7 Zoom in. Press twice for the full screen size. 4 Scroll left in the zoomed image. 6 Scroll right in the zoomed image. 2 Scroll up in the zoomed image. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 121
8 Scroll down in the zoomed image. 3 Rotate clockwise. 1 Rotate counte rclockwise. * Switch between the fu ll screen size and normal view. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 122
Glossary Glossary 3G 3rd generation mobile communications. A digital system for mo bile communi cations which aims at glo bal use and provides increased bandwidth. 3G lets a mobile device user access a wide variety of services, such as multimedia. Ad-hoc operating mode A WLAN network mode where two or more devices connect to each other using WLAN directly without a WLAN access point. Cookies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the server to you, to store information about your vis its to a web site. When you accept cookies, the server is able to evaluate your use of the web s ite, what you are interested in, w hat you want to read, and so on. DNS D omain name service. An internet service that trans lates domain names such as www.nokia.com into IP addresses such as 192.100.124.195 . Domain names are easier to remember but this translation is needed because the internet is based on IP addresses. DTMF tones Dual-tone multifrequen cy tones. The DTMF system is used by touch-tone telephones. DTMF assigns a specific freque ncy, or tone, t o e a c h k e y s o t h a t i t can easily be identified by a microprocess or. DTMF tones allo w you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised teleph ony systems, and so on. EAP Extensible authentica tion p rotocol. EAP plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authentication se rvers. EGPRS Enhanced GPRS. EGPRS is similar to GPRS, but it enables fast er connection. For availability and da ta transfer speed, contact your service provider. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 123
GPRS General packet radio se rvice. GPRS enables wireless access for mobile phones to data networks (network service). GPRS uses packet data technology where information is sent in short bursts of data over the mobile network. The benefit of sending data in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiving data. As GPRS uses the network efficiently, it allows for quick da ta conn ection s etup and fast data transmiss ion speeds. You must subscribe to the GPRS service. For availability and su bscription to GP RS, contact your service provider. During a voice call, yo u cannot establish a GPRS connection, and any existing GPRS connection is put on hold unless the network supports du al transfer mode. GPS Global positioning system. GPS is a worldwide radio navigat ion system. HTTP Hypertext t ransfer protocol. A document transfer protocol used in the web. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. IMAP4 Internet mail access protocol, version 4. A protocol used for accessing your remote mailbox. Internet access point An access point is where your device connects to a network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to connect to the internet and browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Infrastructure operating mode A WLAN network mode where devices are connected to WLAN using a WL AN access point . PIN Personal identity number. The PIN code protects your device from unaut horised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN cod e request is selected, the code is required each time the device is switched on. The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain function s supported by the SIM card. The length of the PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digits. POP3 Post office protocol, version 3. A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing your remote mailbox. PUK and PUK2 Personal Unblocking Key. PUK and PUK2 codes are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. The length of the code is 8 digits. SIP Session Initiation Prot ocol. SIP is used for creating, modifying, and terminating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 124
SSID Service set identifier. SSID is the name that identifies the specific WLAN. Streaming Streaming audio and video files means playing them directly from the web without downloading them first to your device. UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System. UM TS is a 3G mobile communication system. B esides voice and data, UMTS enables audio and video delivery to wireless devices. When you use your devi ce in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, an d access points can share a data connection. I n the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can, for example, browse the web faster than previously possible while simultan eously speaking on the phone. UPIN PIN code used in UMTS network. UPUK UPIN Unblocking Key. UPUK code is required to change a blocked UPIN code or PIN2 co de. The length of the code is 8 digits. USIM SIM card used in UMTS network. USSD command A service request, such as request to activate an application or configure various settings remotely, th at you can sen d to your operator or service provider with your device. VoIP Voice over IP technology. VoIP is a set of protocols that facilitate phone calls over an IP network, such as th e internet. VPN Virtual private network. VPN crea tes a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, such as e-ma il. WAP Wireless application protocol. WAP is an international stan dard for wireless communication. WEP Wired equivalent p rivacy. WEP is an encryption method that encryp ts data before it is transmitted in WLAN. WLAN Wireless local area network. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access. Security me thod for WLAN. WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access 2. Security meth od for WLAN. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 125
Nokia original accessories Warning: Use only batter ies, chargers, and accessories approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalida te any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. In pa rticular, use of unapproved chargers or batteries may pres ent a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. For availability of approved accessories, check with your dealer. An extensive range of accessories is available for your device. For more details, see www.nokia-asia. com/ accessories. Practical rules about accessories ⢠Keep all accessories out of the reach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect the po wer cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. ⢠Check regularly that accessories installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly. ⢠Installation of any complex car accessories must be made by qualified personnel only. Battery Type Talk time Standby BP-4L Up to 4 hours 30 minutes / 11 hours (WCDMA/ GSM) Up to 20 days / 17 days (WCDMA/ GSM) Important: Battery talk and stand-by times are estimates an d only poss ib le under optimal network conditions. Actual battery talk and standby times depend on SIM cards, features used, battery age and conditio n, temperatures to which battery is exposed, network conditions, and many other fact ors, and may be significantly shorter than those specified ab ove. Ringing tones, hands free call handling, use in digital mo de, and ot her features will also consume the battery, and the amount of time a device is used for calls will affect its stand-by time. L ikewise, the am ount of time that the device is turn ed on and in the standby mode will affect its talk time. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 126
Troubleshooting To see frequent ly asked questions about your device, visit the product support pages at the Nokia web site. Q: What is my lock, PIN, or PUK code? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you ha ve not received such a code, contact your network service provider. Q: How do I clo se an application that is no t responding? A: Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, an d press the backspace key to close the application. Q: Why do images look smudg y? A: Ensure that the camera len s protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I switch on my device? A: This is a characteristic of th is type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots tha t remain on or off. This is normal, not a fa ult. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connectivity? A: Check that both devices are compat ible, have activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in the hidden mode. Check also that the distance between t he two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I en d a Bluetooth connectio n? A: If another device is connecte d to your device, you can end the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Select Menu > Connectivi ty > Bluetooth > Bluetoot h > Off . Q: Why can't I se e a WLAN access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: Check that the Offline profile is not in use in your device. The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can on ly access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID, and have created a WLAN access point for the network on your Nokia device Check that the WLAN access p oint is not on channels 12-1 3, as they cannot be associat ed with. Q: How do I sw itch WLAN off on my Nok ia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device s witches off when you are not trying to con nect, not connected to anoth er access point, or not scanning for availabl e networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can sp ecify that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for avai lable networks in the background. WLAN switches off in between background scans. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 127
To stop the background scans, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wi reless LAN > Sho w WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLAN networks and con nect to WLAN net works as usual. To increase the background scan interval, select Show WLAN availability > Yes , and define the interva l in Scan for networks . Q: Why can't I browse th e web even though the WLAN connection is working and the IP settings are correct? A: Check that you have define d the HTTP/ HTTPS prox y settings correctly in the advanc ed settings of your WLAN access point. Q: How do I check the si gnal quality of my WL AN connection ? Select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. > Active data connections > Options > Detail s . If the signal quality is weak or moderate, you may encounter connection problems. Try again closer to the a ccess point. Q: Why do I have prob lems with the security mode? A: Check that you have configured th e security mode correctly, and that it is the same that the network uses. T o check the security mode the network uses, select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. > Active data co nnecti ons > Options > Details . Check also the following: you ha ve the correct WPA mode (preshared key or EAP), you ha ve disabled all EAP typ es that are not needed, and all the EAP type settings are correct (passwords, user names, certificates). Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a con tact for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an address, or an e- mail address. Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts , and edit the contact card. Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to re trieve a mult imedia message from the multimedia messaging centre . This note is shown if you have selected Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimed ia message > Multimedia retrieval > Always a utomatic . Check that the settings for multimedia messag ing are defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. See "Multimedi a message settings", p. 57 . Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message ce ntre. To stop the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multim edia message > Multimedia re trieval > Manual to ha ve the multimedia messaging centre sa ve messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia m essages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when there is a new multimedia message that you ca n retrieve in the multimedia message ce ntre. If you s elect Off , the device does not make any network connection s related to multimedia messaging. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 128
To set the device to use a pa cket data connection only if you start an applicati on or action that needs it, se lect Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet dat a > Packet data connection > When needed . If this does not help, s witch th e device off, and switch it on again. Q: How do I save battery p ower? A: Many features in your de vice increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, do the following: ⢠Switch off Bluetooth when you do not need it. ⢠Stop the back ground scans fo r WLAN. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connec tion > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN av ailability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLAN networks and conn ect to WLAN networks as usual. ⢠Set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Conn ection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . ⢠Prevent the device from automatically downloadin g new maps in the Maps application. Select Menu > GPS > Maps > Options > Tools > Settings > Internet > Go online at start-up > No . ⢠Change the time-out after which the backlig ht is switched off. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display > Light time-out . ⢠Close the applications you do not use. Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, and press the backspace key to c lose the application. Product and safety information Battery Battery and charger information Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. Th e battery intended for use with this device is BP-4L . Nokia may make additional battery models av ailable for this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the following chargers: AC-8. The exact charger model number may vary depending on th e type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 129
standby times are noticeably shorter tha n normal, replace the battery. Use only N okia approved batteries, an d recharge your battery on ly with Nokia ap proved chargers desig nated for this device. If a battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been us ed for a prolonge d period, it may be nec essary to connect the charger, then disconn ect and reconnect it to begin charging the ba ttery. If the battery is complet ely discharged, it may take severa l minutes before t he charging indicator appears on the displa y or before any calls can be made. Safe removal. Always switch th e device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Proper charg ing. Unp lug the ch arger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overch arging may shorten its lifetime. If left u nused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Avoid extreme temperatures. Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme temperatures redu ce the capacity a nd lifetime of the ba ttery. A device with a hot or cold ba ttery may not work temporarily. Battery performance is particul arly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not short-circuit. Accident al short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the po sitive ( ) and negat ive (-) terminals of the battery . (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happ en, fo r example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals ma y damage the batter y or the connecting object. Disposal. Do not dispose of batt eries in a fire as they m ay explode. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Leak. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, puncture, or shred cells or batteries . In the event of a battery leak, prevent battery liquid contact with the skin or eyes. If this happens, flush the affected areas imme diately with water, or seek medical help. Damage. Do not modify, remanu facture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, or immerse or expose it to water or other liquids. Batt eries may explode if damaged. Correct use. Use the battery on ly for its intended purpose. Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and you believe the battery has been damaged, take it to a service centre for inspection before continuing to use it. Never use a ny charger or batt ery that is damaged. Keep your battery out of the reach of small children. Important: Talk and standby tim es are estimates only. Actual performance depends on many factors such as network conditions, device sett ings selected, device features being used (or running in the background), battery condition and ambient temperature. Making calls wit h the device affects the standby time and the amount of time in standby mode affects the talk time. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 130
Taking care of your device Your device is a product of su perior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitati on, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals tha t will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry comp letely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in high or cold temperature. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plast ics. When the device warms to its normal temperature from a cold temperature, moisture can fo rm inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the dev ice other than as ins tructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device . Only use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean the surface of the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved . 131
⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauth orised antennas, modifications, or attachments could da mage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, su ch as contacts and calendar notes. ⢠To reset the devi ce from time to time for op timum performance, power off the device and remove the battery . These suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any accessory. Recycle Always return your used elec tronic products, batteries, and packaging materials to dedicated collection points. This w ay you help prevent uncontrolled waste disposal and promote the recycling of materials. Check product environmental information and how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/werecycle, or nokia.mobi/ werecycle. Additional safety information Small children Your device and its accessories are not toys. They may contain small parts. Keep th em out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines in the normal use position at the ear or at leas t 2.2 centimetres (7/8 inch) away from the body. Any carry case, belt clip, or holder for body- worn operation should not cont ain metal and should position the device the above-stated dis tance from your body. To send data files or messages requires a quality connection to the network. Data files or mess ages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Follow the separation distance instructions until the tran smission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Meta llic materials may be attracted to the device. Do no t place credit cards or other magnetic st orage media near th e device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of radio transmit ting equipment, inc luding wireless phones, may interf ere with the function of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physicia n or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine whether they are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Switch off your devi ce when regulations posted instruct you to do so. Hospita ls or health care facilities may use equipment sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical de vices re commend a minimum separation of 15.3 centimetre s (6 inches) between a wireless device and an implanted medica l device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 132
interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) from the medical device. ⢠Not carry the wireless devi ce in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical devic e. ⢠Turn the wireless device off if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking p lace. ⢠Follow the manufacturer dire ctions for the implanted medical device. If you have any questions about u sing your wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult you r health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. Vehicles RF signals may affect improper ly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection, electronic antilock braking, electronic speed control, an d air bag systems. For more information, check with the manu facturer of your vehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate your wa rranty. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or exp los ive materials in the same compartment as the device, its p arts, or accessories. Remember that air bags inflate wi th g reat force. Do not place your device or accessories in the air bag deployment area. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an airc raft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device in any ar ea with a potentially explos ive atmosphere. Obey all posted instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Switch off the device at refue lling points such as near gas pumps a t service station s. Observe restri ctions in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plan ts; or where blasting operations ar e in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere a re often, but not always, clearly marked. They include areas where you would be advised to turn off your vehicle engine, below deck on boats, chemical trans fer or storage facilities and where the air contains chemicals or pa rticles such as grain, dust, or meta l powders. You should check with the ma nufacturers of vehicles using liquefied petr oleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determin e if this devi ce can be safely used in their vicinity. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 133
Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landline ne tworks, and user-pro grammed functions. If your device suppo rts voice calls over the internet (internet calls), a ctivate both t he internet call s and the cellular phone. The device ma y attempt to make emergency calls over both the cellular networks and through your internet call provider if both ar e activated. Connection s in all conditions cannot be guaran teed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. De pending on your device, you may also need to complete the following: ⢠Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. ⢠Remove certain call restrictions you ha ve activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile from Offli ne or Flight profile to an active profile. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. When making an emergency ca ll, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of a n accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile d evice meets guidelines f or exposure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limi ts for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the indepe ndent scientific organisation ICNIRP and include safe ty margins designed to assu re the protection of all persons, re gardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mo bile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the IC NIRP guid elines is 2. 0 watt s/ kilogram (W/kg) average d over 10 grams of tissue. Tes ts for SAR are conducted us ing standard operating p ositions with the device transm itting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual S AR level of an operating device can be below the maximum va lue because the device is designed to use on ly the p ower required to reach the network. That a mount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close yo u are to a network base station . The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear i s 1.03 W/kg. Use of device accessories may re sult in different SAR values. SAR values may vary dependin g on national reporting and testing requirements and the network ban d. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 134
Index Symbols/Numbers 3-D ringing tones 86 802.1x security settin gs 117 A access points creating 115 VPN 109 activation keys 107 Active n otes 87 settings 87 alarm clock 91 alert ton es 112 altitude calibrat ion 71 animated screen saver 85 antennas 1 6 application set tings 1 20 application s common actions 21 installing 105 modifying installations 105 attachments e-mail 47 multimedia messages 52 sound cl ips 52 audio files details 80 sending 80 autolock period 114 B background image 85 backing up data 104 battery charge level 20 charging 15 inserting 14 blogs 62 Blueto oth authorising devices 95 pairing 95 passcode 95 receiving data 94 security 96 sending data 94 bookmarks 62 browsing intranet 63 offline 62 web 61 C cable 93 cache emptying 62 Calculator 87 Calendar settings 27 calendar entries creating 27 viewing 26 calendar key 26 calendar views changing 26 call barring 37 net calls 37 call divert 36 caller ID 11 4 calls answering 32 barring net calls 37 call waiting 114 caller ID 114 conference call 32 fixed dialling 102 making 32 making a call from Log 42 making a net call 35 muting the ringing ton e 32 net call alert 114 PTT 40 rejecting 32 rejecting with text message 114 selecting type 114 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 135
settings 114 speed dialling 36 voice commands 39 voice dialling 39 voice ma il 38 camera capturing images 73 recording video clips 73 settings 74 car kit remote SIM access 96 cell broadcast 56 settings 59 certificates details 103 settings 103 charging the battery 15 Clock alarms 9 1 settings 91 world clock 91 computer connections 93 See also data connections conference calls 32 configuration messages 1 20 connection methods Bluetooth 94 data cable 93 connections ending 99 GPRS settings 63, 64 PC connection 65 WLAN settings 64 connectors 12 contact groups adding ringing tones 28 creating 28 making conference calls 28 contacts adding 28 adding ringing tones 28 searching 28 settings 28 contacts directories managing 28 contacts key 2 5 converting currencies 89 measurements 89 currency conversions 89 D data connections PC connectivity 93 date settings 113 decrypting device memory and memory card 102 destination removing 71 setting 71 Device manager 9 display changing the look 85 indicators 20 settings 111 DTMF tones 37 E e-mail 4 6 automatic retrieval settings 59 connecting to mailbox 47 connection settings 58 creating folders 4 8 deleting 48 POP or IMAP 46 replying 47 retrieval settings 59 sending 4 8 setting up 46 user settings 58 writing 48 e-mail key 26 e-mail key se ttings 113 EAP plug-in se ttings 118 using an EAP plug-in 118 encrypting device memory and memory card 102 ending internet connections 62 network connectio ns 99 enhancements remote SIM access 96 settings 113 equaliser 77 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 136
F feeds 62 File manage r 88 files downloading 78 flash files 80 sending 8 8 fixed dialling 102 flashlight 29 free memory 100 G Gallery 78 GPRS access point settings 63 advanced access point settings 64 settings 116 H headset connecting 16 home key 2 5 home screen 24 settings 85, 112 switching 25 I IM application settings 55 blocking users 55 groups 5 4 settings 53 starting a conversa tion 54 images adding to contacts 79 display background 79 rotating 78 sending 79 sharing online 77 zooming 78 indicators 20 inserting battery 14 memory card 15 SIM card 14 installation log 105 installing applications 105 internet 61 ending connections 62 internet calls 35 Internet radio listening 82 saving stations 82 searching 82 settings 83 intranet browsing 63 J jad files 105 jar files 105 Java applications 105, 106 K key store 104 keyguard 22 keypad lock settings 114 locking 22 tones 112 keys 12 activation keys 107 shortcuts 112 WEP keys 117 L landmarks categories 72 creating 72 editing 72 receiving 72 sending 7 2 language settings 112 lock code 100, 114 locking device 100 device autolock 114 keypad 22, 114 Log 41 adding numbers to Co ntacts 42 deleting 42 making a call 42 sending messag es 4 2 settings 42 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 137
transfer log 20 logos welcome logo 111 M Mail for Exchange 46 mailboxes connecting 47 creating 46 making a call 32 Maps 67 browsing 68 driving 70 finding locations 68 indicators 68 routes 69 traffic information 70 travel guides 70 walking 6 9 measurements converting 89 measuring system changing 71 memory 100 memory card backing up data 104 ejecting 15 formatting 101 inserting 15 locking 101 microSD 101 passwords 101 setting password 88, 101 unlocking 101 menu 18 message reader 44 selecting voice 44 message s 43 call rejection messages 114 cell broadcast settings 59 configuration messages 120 other settings 59 sending sound clips 52 service messages 56 text message settings 57 Messaging folders 43, 44 microS DHC 101 modem 65 multimedia messages attachments 52 creating 50 creating presentations 51 forwarding 52 receiving 51 replying to 51 sending 50 sending options 53 settings 57 multitas king 29 Music player Music Sto re 76 playing 75 playlists 76 Music Store 76 N net calls 35 alert settings 114 barring 3 7 connecting 35 making a call 35 profiles 34, 120 settings 120 network settings 115 Nokia original accessories 126 Nokia Ovi Player 76 Nokia support info rmation 9 Notes 9 2 notification light 112 O One-touch keys 112 operator selecting 115 original settings 114 Ovi 29 Ovi Contacts 30 Ovi Files 29 Ovi Store 29 P packet data access point settings 63 advanced access point settings 64 restricting 120 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 138
settings 116 pairing devices 95 passcode 95 passwords memory card pa ssword 88, 101 PDF reader 89 personalisat ion 8 5 changing language 112 display 111 home screen 112 tones 112 picture message s forwarding 50 viewing 49 PIN code changing 114 playing messages 44 recordings 78 video and audio 79 podcasting 74 directories 74 searching 75 settings 75 positioning settings 67 predict ive text inpu t 23, 112 presentations 51 printer settings 90 printing 90 profiles creating 84 customising 84 net call profile 34, 120 selecting ringing tones 84 PTT contacts 41 created calls 40 creating a channel 41 exiting 41 logging in 40 making a call 40 settings 40 R radio listening to 81 saved stations 81 settings 81 viewing visual content 81 RealPlayer playing media clips 79 sending files 80 settings 80 viewing clip details 80 recorder playing recordings 78 recording a sound clip 77 settings 78 recording sound clips 77 video clips 73 remote configuration 9 remote lock 100 remote synchronisation 108 restoring origi nal settings 114 ringing tones 112 3-D 86 contacts and contact g roups 28 in profiles 84 vibrating aler t 112 S satellite si gnal strength 71 saving current position 71 files 21 settings 21 screen saver 85, 111 search modes switching 28 searching available WLANs 99 security Bluetooth 96 device and SIM card 114 Java app lication 106 memory card 101 security module 104 sending files 21, 88 using Bluetooth 94 videos 33 service commands 56 service messages 56 settings 59 session in itiation prot ocol See SIP é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 139
settings Active notes 87 advanced WLAN 116 application installations 105 applications 120 Calendar 27 calls 114 camera 74 cell broadcast 59 certificate 103 clock 91 contacts 28 date 113 display 111 e-mail connection 58 e-mail key 113 e-mail retrieval 59 e-mail user 5 8 EAP plug-ins 118 enhancements 113 GPRS 63, 64, 116 home screen 112 IM 53 Internet radio 83 Java application security 106 keypad lock 114 language 112 Log 42 multimedia messages 57 net call 120 network 115 packet data 116 podcast ing 7 5 positioning 67 printer 90 PTT 40 radio 81 RealPlayer 80 recorder 78 restoring 114 service messages 59 SIP 118 text messages 57 time 113 tones 112 voice commands 39 web 62 WEP security 117 WLAN 116 WLAN access point 64, 65 WLAN security 117 Settings wizard 17 shortcuts 121 keys 112 signal strength 20 SIM access profile 96 SIM card inserting 14 text messages 49 SIP creating profiles 11 8 editing profiles 119 editing proxy servers 119 editing registration servers 119 settings 118 sis files 105 sisx files 105 software packages installation settings 105 installing 105 software updat es 10 sound clips recording 77 sending 5 2 Speech 44 speed di alling 36 standby mode settings 112 support 9 switching device on and off 17 Symbian applicat ions 105 synchronisation 20 settings 108 synchronisation profiles 108 synchronising applications 108 T tabs 21 text changing size 111 predictive input 23 writing 23 text messages messages on SIM card 49 sending 4 8 sending options 49 settings 57 writing 48 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 140
themes changing 85 downloading 86 time settings 113 tones 112 settings 112 Transfer log 20 transferring data 19 transferring music 76 trip destinat ion 7 1 trip meter 71 troubleshootin g 12 7 U updates 1 0 UPIN code changing 114 USB data cable 93 V vibrating alert 112 video calls making a call 33 switching to voice call 33 video clips 73 details 80 playing 79 sending 8 0 video sharin g 33 receiving invitations 34 virtual privat e netwo rk access points 109 use in applications 110 Voice aid 38 voice comm ands changing profiles 39 launching an application 39 settings 39 voice mail calling 38 changing nu mber 3 8 voice ov er IP 35 VoIP 35 volume 23 VPN access points 109 use in applications 110 W wallpaper 7 9 warning tones 112 Web connection security 61 web settings 62 weblogs 62 Welcome applicat ion 1 7 welcome not e 111 WEP keys 117 security settings 117 wireless keyboard 92 WLAN 802.1x security settings 117 access point settings 64 access points 98 advanced access point settings 65 advanced settings 116 availability 97 MAC address 97, 116 searching for networks 99 security settin gs 117 settings 116 WEP keys 117 WPA security set tings 118 WLAN wizard 98 world clock 91 WPA security set tings 118 writing 23 Z Zip manager 89 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 141
DECLARATIO N OF CONFORMI TY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION decl ares that this RM-450 product is in co mpliance with the essential req uirements and other relev ant provisions of Directive 1999/ 5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/. é 2010 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Con necting People, Nokia Origin al Enhancements l ogos, Eseries, Nokia E6 3, Ovi, and Visual Radio are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other pr oduct and company names mentioned herein may b e trademark s or trad enames of their respective owners. Reproduction, transfer, di stribution , or storage of par t or all of the contents in this document in any form without t he prior written permission of Nokia is prohib ited. Nokia operates a policy of continuo us development. Nok ia reserves the right to make chang es and improvements to any of the prod ucts descri bed in th is document without prior notice. This product inclu des software licensed fro m Symbian Software Ltd é1998-2009. Sy mbian and Sy mbian OS are tradema rks of Symbian Ltd. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps softwar e are é1996-2009 The FreeType Project. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in conne ction with information wh ich has been encoded in compli ance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a cons umer engaged in a personal and no ncommercial activity and (ii) f or use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No l icense is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional informatio n, including that related to promotional , internal, and commercial uses, ma y be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http: //www.mpegla.com. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERM ITTED BY APPL ICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CI RCUMSTANCES SHALL NOK IA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSOR S BE RESPONSIBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF D ATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUE NTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT AR E PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS RE Q U I RE D B Y A P PL I C A B L E L A W , N O W A RR A N T I E S OF A N Y K I N D, E I T H E R E X P RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITE D TO, THE IMP LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNE SS FOR A PARTICULA R PURPOSE, A RE MADE IN RELATI ON TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT . NOKIA RE SERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCU MENT OR WITHDRA W IT AT ANY TI ME WITHOUT PR IOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of software in the de vice is prohibited to the extent permitted by a pplicable law. Insofa r as this user gu i de contains any limitati ons on Nokia's representations, wa rranties, damages a nd liabilities, such limi tations shall l ikewise limit any represe ntations, warra nties, da mages and liabilities of Nokia's l icensors. The third-party applications provided wit h your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entities n ot affili ated with or related to Nok ia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellectual property rights to the third-party a pplications. As such, No kia does not take a ny r esponsibility for en d-user support,
functionality o f the applications, or the info rmation in the a pplications or these materia ls. Nokia does n ot provide a ny warran ty for the third-party applica tions. BY USING THE APPL ICATIONS YOU ACKN OW LEDGE THAT THE A PPLICATIONS ARE PROV IDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, E XPRES S OR IMPLIE D, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FU RTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA N OR ITS AFFILIATES MA KE ANY REPRESENT ATION S OR W ARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN CLUDING B UT NOT LIMITE D TO WARRANTIES OF TI TLE, MERCHAN TABILITY OR FI TNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOSE , OR THAT TH E APP LICATIONS WILL N OT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGH TS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. The availability of p articular products an d applications and services for these pro ducts may vary by region. Pleas e check with your Nokia dealer for details and avail a bility of language options. This device may cont ain commodities, technology or software s ubject to export laws and regula tions from th e US and other countri es. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited . FCC/INDUSTRY CA NADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interferen ce (for example, when usin g a telephone in clo se proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canad a can require you to stop using yo ur telephone if such inter ference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, co ntact your local service fa cility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fo llowing two conditions: (1) This device ma y not cause harmful interferen ce, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includi ng interfer ence that may cause und esired operation. Any changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by Nokia co uld void the user's authority to operate this equipment. /Iss u e 2.0 EN
Contents Safety................. ................... .............. ............... ..7 About your device......................... ................................ .............7 Network services................................. .................... ..................8 Find help......... ............ ............... .............. .............9 Support.......................................................................................9 Remote configuration...............................................................9 Update software using your PC..............................................10 Further information................................. .................... ...........10 Key features........................ .................. .............11 Keys and parts..................... ............................... 12 Set up your device..............................................14 Insert the SIM card and battery... ................................... ........14 Charge the battery..... .............................. ........................... .....15 Insert the memory card....................................................... ...15 Eject the memory card............................................................15 Connect the headset....... .......................... ........................ .......16 Attach the wrist strap..................... ..................... ................ ...16 Antennas......... .................... .................... ..................... .............16 Get started............. ............ ................. ................ 17 First start-up..... ................... .................. .................. ............... ..17 Welcome.......... .................................... ................................. ....17 Settings wizard. .......................................................................17 Home screen............................ ....................... ...................... ...18 Menu.........................................................................................18 Transfer content from other dev ices ........................ ............19 Display indicators.............................................................. ......20 Common actions in several a pplications........... ....................21 Lock the keys................. ................................ ...........................22 Volume control........................... .............................. ...............23 Write text............................................ .................................... .23 New from Eseries........ ......... ........ ........... .......... .24 Access tasks quickly................. ......................................... .......24 Home screen......................... ............................. ......................2 4 One-touch keys............................................................. ...........25 Nokia Calendar for Eseries................................................. .....26 Nokia Contacts for Eseries.. ................... .................... ..............27 Multitasking........................................................ .....................29 Flashlight................... .......................................................... .....29 Open Ovi............................................................. ......................29 About Ovi Store........................................................................ 29 Ovi Files................ ...................... ........................ .......................29 About Ovi Contacts........................... .................. .................. ...30 My Nokia...................................................................................30 Phone............................................ .....................32 Voice calls...................................................... ...........................32 Video calls............. .................... ...................... .................... ......33 Net calls....................................................................................34 Speed dialling................................................... .......................36 Call divert.............. ........................... ......................... ................36
Call barring................................................................... ............37 Bar net calls........ ............................................ ..........................37 Send DTMF tones........ ............................... ............................ ...37 Voice mail.................................................... .............................38 Voice aid...................................................................................38 Voice commands............. .......................... ........................ .......38 Push to talk................................................................... ...........40 Log............................................................. ...............................41 Messaging................... ............... ............. ...........43 Messaging folders............. ....................................... ................43 Organise messages... .................................. .............................44 Message reader........................ ................................................44 Speech............. .................... ...................... ..................... ...........44 E-mail messages......................................................................44 Text messages. .................. ................... ............... ................... ..48 Multimedia messages ............. ................. .............. .............. ...50 Instant messaging. ................................................. .................53 Special message types............................... ...................... .......55 Cell broadcast..................... .................................... ..................56 Messaging settings. .................................................................56 Internet..............................................................61 Web..................... ..................................................... .................61 Browse the intranet ........................................... ....................63 Internet access points..................... ........................................63 Connect PC to web...................................................................65 Travelling......................................... ..................66 About GPS and satellit e signals..............................................66 Positioning settings............................................. ...................67 Maps............................. ........................................... ..................67 GPS data.......... ......................... ............................ .....................71 Landmarks................ .................................... ............................71 Media................ ........................ ...................... ....73 Camera.......................... ..................................... .......................73 Nokia Podcasting...................... .......................................... .....74 Music player.............. .................. .................. ................... .........75 Share online.............................................................................77 Recorder................................................ ...................................77 Gallery................................................ .......................................78 RealPlayer.................. .................................. .............................79 Flash player..............................................................................80 Radio..................................... ............................................ ........80 Internet radio.... ..................... ................. ....................... ..........82 Personalisation.............................. ....................84 Profiles............................ .................................... ......................84 Select ringing tones.. ................... .................... .................. ......84 Customise profiles...................................................................84 Personalise the home screen..................... ............. ...............8 5 Change the display theme......................................................85 Download a theme..................................................................86 3-D ringing tones. ..................................... ...............................86 Noki a Of fic e Too ls... ........... ........... ........... ........ ..87 Active notes.................... ................................. ......................... 87 Calculator..... .......................... ........................... ........................87 File manager.................................................................... ........88 Quickoffice....................... ............................. ........................... .88 Converter..................................................................................89 Zip manager.............................................................................89 PDF reader................................................................................89
Printing............. ..................................... ...................................90 Clock......................................... .................................................91 Notes............... ............................... .................................. .........91 Nokia Wireless Keyboard........................................................92 Connectivity............. ............. ........... ......... .........93 PC connections................. ........................................................93 Data cable....................... .......................... ................................93 Bluetooth....... ........................... ......................... .......................93 SIM access profile................ ......................... ......................... ...96 Wireless LAN.......... ......................... ............................ ..............97 Connection manager...............................................................99 Security and data management.. ................. ....100 Lock the device......................................................................100 Memory.................. ........................... .................... ..................100 Memory card security.................... ........................................101 Encryption..............................................................................101 Fixed dialling......... .................. .................. ................... ..........102 Certificate manager... ........................... .............................. ...103 Security modules...................................................................104 Back up data................................................. .........................104 Application manager... ...................... ....................... .............104 Activation keys......... ........................ ................... ...................106 Data synchronisation........................................................ ....107 Mobile VPN........................................................... ..................109 Settings.............................. ......................... .....111 General settings........ ......................... ............................ ........111 Telephone settings........ ....................... .............................. ...114 Connection settings.... ..................... .................... ..................115 Application settings......................................... .....................120 Shortcuts................................................ ..........121 General shortcuts................................. ................. ................121 Glossary................................. ...........................123 Noki a ori gina l ac cesso ries ............... ............... .126 Practical rules about accessories .................. ................. ......126 Battery............................................................. .......................126 Troubleshooting.............. .......... ........ ......... .....127 Product and safety informatio n.......................129 Index............................................ ....................135
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safe ty. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN RESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical eq uipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. QUALIFIED SERVI CE Only qualified personnel ma y install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESIST ANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 networks and UMTS 850/2100 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. Your devic e supports s everal connectivi ty methods and like computers may be expose d to viruses and other harmful content. Exercise caution with messages, connect ivity requests, browsing, and downloads. Only install and use services and software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate security and prot ection, such as applica tions that are Symbian Sign ed or have pass ed the Java Verified⢠testing. Consider installing antivirus and other security software on your device and any connected computer. Your device ma y have preins talled bookmar ks and links for third-party internet s ites and may allow you to a ccess third- party sites. These are not affi liated with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you access such sites, take pr ecautions for security or content. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 7
Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device mu st be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protect ion may prevent some images, music, and other co ntent from being copied, modified, or transferred. Make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other de vice, read its user guide for detailed safety in structions. Do not connect incompatible products . The images in this guide may di ffer from your device display. Refer to the user guide for ot her important information about your devi ce. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Some features are not available on all networks; other features may require that you make specific arrangements with your serv ice provider to use them. Network services involve tran smission of data. Check with your service provider for detai ls about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provider can explain wha t charges will a pply. Some networks may have limitations tha t affect how you can use some features of this device requ iring netwo rk su pport such as support for specific technologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/ IP protocols and language- dependent charact ers. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your devi ce menu. Your device may also h ave customized it ems such as menu names, menu order, and icons. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 8
Find help Support When you want to learn more about how t o use your product or you are unsure how your device should funct ion, go to www.nokia.com/support , or using a mobile device, nokia.mobi/s upport. You can als o select Menu > Help > Help in your device. If this does not resolve your issue, do one of the following: ⢠Switch off the device, and remove the battery. After about a minute, replace the battery, an d switch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factory settings. ⢠Update your device software. If your issue remains unsolv ed, contact Nokia for repair options. Go to www.nokia-asia .com/repair. Before sending your device for repair, always ba ck up the data in your device. Remote configuration Select Menu > Tools > Device mgr. . With Device manager, you can manage settings , data, and software on your device remotely. You can conn ect to a server, and receive config uration settings for your device. You may receive server profiles and different configuration set tings from your service providers or company information management department. Configuration settings may in clude connection and other setting s used by differe nt a pplications in your device. The available options may vary. The remote configuration con nection is usually started by the server when the device sett ings need to be updated. To create a new server profile, select Options > New server profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configuration message. If not, define the following: ⢠Server name â Enter a name for the configuration server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server password â Enter a passwor d to identify your device to the server. ⢠Session m ode â Select the preferred connection type. ⢠Access point â Select the a ccess point to use for the connection, or create a new access point. Yo u can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start a connecti on. This settin g is available only if you have selected Internet as the bearer type. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the configuration server. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User name â Enter your user ID for the configuration server. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 9
⢠Password â Enter your password for the configuration server. ⢠Allow configuratio n â Select Yes to allow the server to initiate a configuration session. ⢠Auto-accept all requests â Select Yes if you do not want the server to ask for your conf irmation when it initiates a configuration session. ⢠Network auth entication â Select whether to use http authentication. ⢠Network us er name â Enter your user ID for the http authentication. This setting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticatio n to be used. ⢠Network passw ord â Enter your password for the http authentication. This setting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticatio n to be used. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device, select Optio ns > Start configuration . To view the configuration log of the selected profile, select Options > View log . Update software using your PC Nokia Software Updater is a PC application that enables you to update your device software. To update your device software, you need a compatible PC, broadband internet access, and a compatible USB data cab le to conn ect your device to the P C. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updat er application, go to www. nokia-asia.com/ softwareupdate. Further information Instructions in yo ur device To read instructions for th e current view o f the open application, select Options > Help . To browse the help topics and conduct searches, select Menu > Help > Help . You can select categories for which you want to see instructions. Select a category, such as Messaging, to see wha t instructions (help topics) are available. While you are reading the topic, scroll left or right to see the other topics in that category. To switch between the applic ation and help, pr ess and hold the home key. Tutorial The tutorial provides you info rmation about your device and shows you how to use it. Select Menu > Help > Tutorial . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 10
Key features Model number: Nokia E63-3 (RM-450). Hereinafter referred to as Nokia E63. Your new Nokia E63 helps you ma nage your business and personal information. Some of the key features are highlighted here: Move your contact and calendar informat ion from a previous device to your Nokia E63 with Switch . Receiv e and se nd me ssag es whil e on t he move . Browse the intern et with Web . Browse your company intranet with Intranet . Use your device as a flashlight. Stay up-to-date and plan your meetings with Calendar . Manage your business partners and free tim e friends with the new Co ntacts application. Make calls using voice over IP services with Internet tel. . Connect to WLAN with WLAN wizard . Find points of interest with Maps . Switch from business to personal mode. Edit the appearance an d setup of your home screen with Modes . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 11
Keys and parts 1 â Loudspeaker 2 â Earpiece 3 â Navi⢠key (scroll key). Press the scroll key to make a selection, or to scroll left, righ t, up, and down on the display. Press and hold the scroll key to acceler ate the scrolling. Use the scroll key together with the function key to adjust the volume. 4 â Selection key. Press the selection key to perform the function shown above it on the display. 5 â Call key 6 â Microphone 7 â Charger connector 8 â Backspace key 9 â Power/End key. Press the ke y to reject a call, and end active calls and call on hold, or switch between profiles. Press and hold the key to switch the device on or off. 10 â Selection key 11 â Light sensor 12 â Headset connector 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â Calendar key 4 â E-mail key 1 â Function key. To enter digits or cha racters printed on the grey part of the keys, press and hold the function key and é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 12
press the correspondin g key, or press and hold the corresponding key only. 2 â Shift key. To switch be tween the different character cases, press the shift key. 3 â Chr key. When writing text , press the chr key to insert characters not shown on the keypad. 4 â Ctrl key. Acces s the shortcut s behind the ctrl key, such as ctrl C. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 13
Set up your device Set up your Nok ia E63 following these instruct ions. Insert the SIM card and battery 1. To open the back cover of th e device, with the back facing you, unlock the back cover re lease button an d lift the back cover off. 2. If the battery is inserted, li ft the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3. Insert the SIM card. Ensure th e contact area on the card is facing the connectors on the dev ice and that the bevelled corner is facing the top of the device. 4. Insert the ba ttery. Align th e contacts of the battery with the corresponding connectors on the battery compartment and insert in the direction of the arrow. 5. Close the back cover, and lock the back cover release button. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 14
Charge the battery 1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the charger to the device. If the battery is completely discharged, it ma y take a while before the charging indicator starts scrolling. 3. When the battery is fully ch arged, disconnect the charger from the device, th en from the wall ou tlet. Your battery has been precharg ed at the factory, but the charging levels may vary. To reach the full operation time , charge the battery until it ha s been fully charged according to the battery lev el indicator. Tip: You can use older st yle Nokia chargers with your device by attaching the CA-44 ada pter to the old charger. The adapter is ava ilable as a separate enhancement. Insert the memory card Use a memory card to save th e memory on your device. You can also back up information fr om your devi ce to the memory card. The sales package of your device may not include a memory card. Memory cards are availa ble as separate accessories. 1. Open the cover of the memory card slot. 2. Insert the memory card in the slot with the contact ar ea first. Ensure the contact area is facing the connectors on the device. 3. Push the card in until it locks into place. 4. Close the cover. Eject the memory card 1. Press the power key briefly, and select Remov e memory card . 2. Open the cover of the memory card slot. 3. Press the end of the memory card to release it from the memory card slot. 4. Close the cover. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 15
Connect the headset Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the hea dset where it can endanger your safety. Connect the compatible headse t to the headset connector of your devi ce. Attach the wrist strap Thread the wrist strap, an d tighten it. Antennas Your device may have internal and external antennas. Avoid touching the antenna a rea unnecessarily while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Co ntact wi th antennas affects the communication quality and may cause a higher power level during operation and may reduce the battery life. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 16
Get started After you have set up your device, switch it on and start to explore what is new in Eseries. First start-up 1. Press and h old the power key until you feel the device vibrate. 2. If prompted, enter the PIN code or lock code, and select OK . 3. When prompted, ente r the country in which you are located and the current date and t ime. To find your country, enter the first letters of the country name. It is important to select the correct country, because scheduled calendar entries ma y change if you change the country later and the new count ry is located in a different time zone. 4. The Welcome application open s. Select from the options, or select Exit to close the applicat ion. To configure the settings in your device, use the wizards available in the home scr een and the Settings wizard application. When you switch the device on, it may recognise the SIM card provider and configure some settings automatically. You can also contact your service provi der for the correct settings. You can switch the device on without inserting a SIM card. The device starts up in the offli ne profile, and you cannot use the network-dependen t phone functions. To switch the device off, press and hold the powe r key. Welcome When you switch on your de vice for the first time, the Welcome application opens. Select from the following: ⢠Tutorial provides information about your device and shows you ho w to use it. ⢠Switch enables you to transfer content, such as contacts and calendar ent ries, from a compatible No kia device. See "Transfer content between devices" , p. 19 . ⢠E-mail se ttings h elps you configur e e-mail settings. ⢠Sett. wizard help s you configure various settings. See "Settings wizard" , p. 17 . To open the Welcome application later, select Menu > Help > Welcome . The available options ma y vary. Settings wizard Select Menu > Tools > Sett. wizard . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 17
Settings wizard configures your device for settings based on your network operator information. To use these se rvices, you may have to contact your service provider to activate a data connection or other services. The availability of the differe nt settings items in Set tings wizard depends on the feature s of the devi ce, SIM ca rd, wireless service provider, and th e availabi lity of the data in the Settings wizard da tabase. If Settings wizard is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in th e menu of your device. To start the wizard, select Start . When you use the wizard for the first time, you are gu ided through the set tings configuration. If there is no SIM card inserte d, you need to select the home country of your service provider, and your service provider. If the country or service pr ovider suggested by the wizard is not correct, se lect the correct one from the list. If the settings configu ration is interrupted, the settings are not defined. To access the main view of the Se ttings wizard aft er the wizard has finished the settings configuration, select OK . In the main view, select from the following: ⢠Operato r â Configure operator-s pecific settings such as MMS, internet, WAP, and streaming settings. ⢠E-mail setup â Configure e-ma il settings. ⢠Push to talk â Configure push -to-talk settings. ⢠Video sharing â Configure video sharing settings. If you are not able to use Settings wizard, vis it the Nokia phone settin gs web site. Home screen From the home screen you can qu ickly access features t hat you use the most, and see at a glance any missed calls or new messages. You can define two separate home screens for different purposes, such as one screen to show your business e-mail and notifications, and a nother to s h o w y o u r p e r s o n a l e - m a i l . This way, you do not h ave to see business-related messages outside office hours. Menu Select Menu . The menu is a sta rting point from which you can open all applications in the device or on a memory card. The menu contains applications and folders, which are groups of é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 18
similar applications. All applic ations you install in the device yourself are by default saved in the Installations folder. To open an application, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view the applications in a list, select Options > Change Menu view > List . To return to the grid vi ew, select Options > Change Menu view > Grid . To view the memory consumpt ion of different applications and data stored on the device or memory card and to check the amount of free memory, select Optio ns > Memory details . To create a new folder, select Options > New folder . To rename a new folder, select Options > Rename . To rearrange the folder, scroll to the applica tion you want to move, and select Options > Move . A check mark is placed beside the application. Scroll to a new location, and select OK . To move an application to a different folder, scroll to the application you want to move, and select Options > Move to folder , the new folder, and OK . To download applications from the web, select Options > Download applications . To switch between several open applications, press and hold the home key. Select an appl ication, and press the scroll key to switch to it. Leaving applications running in the background increases the de mand on batte ry power and reduces the battery life. Transfer content from other devices Select Menu > Tools > Switch . You can transfer content, such as contac ts, from a compatible Nokia device to your new Eseries device using different connectivity methods . The type of content that can be transferred depends on the devi ce model. If the other device supports synchronisation, you can also synchronise data between the two devices or send data from this device to the other device. When you transfer data from your previous device, it may require you to insert the SIM card. Your new Eseries device does not need a SIM card when transferring data. Content is copied from the memo ry of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. Copying time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. You can al so cancel and continue later. The necessary steps for data transfer may var y depending on your device, and whether you have interrupted data transfer earlier. The items that you ca n transfer vary depending on the other device. Transfer content between devices To connect the two devices, follow the instructions on the display. For some device models, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a message. To install Switch on é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 19
the other device, open th e message, and follow the instructions on the display. On your new Eseries device, select the content you want to copy from th e other device. After the data transfer, you ca n save the shortcut with the transfer settings to the main view to repe at the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select Op tions > Shortcut settings . View transfer lo g A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the transfer details, scroll t o the transferred item in the log, and select Options > Details . To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a transfer shortcut, if available, in the main view, and select Options > View log . Any unresolved transfer conflicts are also displayed in the log view. To start solving conflicts, select Options > Solve conflicts . Synchronise, retrieve, and send data If you have previously transferred data to your device with the Switch application, select from t he following icons in the Switch main view: Synchronise data with a co mpatible device if the other device supports synchronisation . With synchronisation, you can keep the data up-to- date in both devices. Retrieve data from the other device to your new Eseries device. Send data from your new Eseries device to your other device. Display indicators The device is being used i n a UMTS network (network service). The battery charge level. The higher the bar, the stronger the charge in the battery. You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in th e remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder in Messaging. You have one or more missed phone calls. The keys of the device are locked. An alarm is active. You have selected the Silent profile, and the device does not ring for an incoming call or message. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 20
Bluetooth connectivity is acti ve. Data is being transm itted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indica tor is blinking, your device is tryi ng to conn ect with another dev ice. A GPRS packet data connec tion is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. An EGPRS packet data connection is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. A UMTS packet data connect ion is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs (WLAN), and a WL AN is available. A WLAN connection is active in a network that does not have encryption. A WLAN connection is active in a network that has encryption. Your device is connected to a computer with a USB cable. The second phone line is being used (network service). All calls are forwarded to another number. If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A headset is connected to the devi ce. The connection to a headset with Bluetooth connectivity has been lost. A hands-free car kit is connected to the devi ce. A loopset is connected to the device. A text phone is connected to the device. Your device is synchronising. You have an ongoing pu sh-t o-talk connection. Your push-to-talk connection is in do not disturb mode, because the ring ing type of your device is set to Beep once or Silent , or you have an incoming or ongoing phone call. In th is mode, you can not make PTT calls. Common actions in several applications You can find the following ac tions in severa l applications: é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 21
To change the profile, or switch off or lock the device, press the power key briefly. If an application consists of several tabs (see figure), open a tab by scrolling right or left. To save the se ttings that you have configured in an application, select Back . To save a file, select Options > Save . There are different saving options depending on the application you use. To send a file, select Optio ns > Send . You can s end a file in an e-mail or multimedia message, or using different connectivity meth ods. To copy, press and hold th e shift key, and select the text with the scroll key. Press and hold the shift key, and select Copy . To paste, scroll to where you want to paste the text, press and hold the shift key, and select Paste . This met hod may not work in applications that ha ve th eir own copy and paste commands. To select different items, s uch as messages, files, or contacts, scroll to the item you want to select. Select Op tions > Mark/ Unmark > Mark to select one item or Options > Mark/ Unmark > Mark all to select all items. Tip: To select almost all items, first select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark all , then select the items you do not want, and Options > Mark/Unmark > Unmark . To select an object (for ex ample, an attachment in a document) scroll to the object so that square ma rkers appear on each side of the object. Lock the keys When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency nu mber programmed into your device. The keypad of your device locks automati cally to prevent the keys from being accidentally pressed. To change the time period after which the keypad is locked, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phon e and SIM card > Keypad autolock period . To lock the keys manually in th e home screen, press the left selection key and the function key. To lock the keys manually in th e menu or in an open application, press the power key briefly, and select Lock keypad . To unlock the keys, press the left selection key and the function key. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 22
Volume control To adjust the earpiece volume during a phone call, scroll left or right. To adjust the volume of the media applications, press and hold the function key, and scroll up or down. Write text The input methods provided in the device m ay vary according to different sales markets. Write text with the keyboard Your device has a full keyboard. To insert punctuation marks, press the corresponding key or a combination of keys. To switch between the different ch aracter cases, press th e Shift key. To insert digits or characters printed at th e top of keys, press and hold the corresponding ke y, or press and hold the function key and press th e corresponding key. To erase a character, press the backspace key. To erase several characters, pres s and hold the backspace key. To insert characters and symb ols that are not shown on the keyboard, press the Chr key. To copy text, press and hold the Shi ft key, and scroll to highlight the word, phrase, or li ne of text you want to cop y. Press Ctrl C. To insert the text into a document, move to the correct place, and press Ctrl V. To change t he writin g language, o r to activa te predictive tex t input, select Options > Input options and from the available options. Predictive text input To activate predictive text in put, press the function ke y spacebar and select Predictive text > On . The indicator is shown on the display. When you start writing a word, your device suggests poss ible words. When the correct word is found, scroll right to confirm it. While writing, you can also scroll down to access a list of sugg ested words. If the desired word is on the list, scroll to it and press the scroll key. If the word you are writing is not in the dictionary of the device, the device suggests a possible word, while the word you were writing is shown above the sugge sted word. Scroll up to select your word. The wo rd is added to the dictionary when you start writing the next word. To switch predictive text input off, press the functi on key spacebar and select Predictive text > Off . To define the settings for text input, select O ptions > Input options > Settings . To change the writing lan guage, select Opti ons > Input options > Writing language . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 23
New from Eseries Your new Eseries device contains new versions of the Calendar and Contac ts applications, as well as a new h ome screen. You can also access the Ovi services wi th your device. Access tasks quickly Whenever you see the icon on the home screen, or in the Contacts or Calendar applications, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. When yo u navig ate in these applications, to go back to the previous level, scroll left. Home screen From the home screen you can quickly access feat ures that you use the most, and see at a glance any missed calls or new messages. Navigate in the home screen To access the home screen, press the home key briefly. The home screen consists of: ⢠application shortcuts (1) To access an applic ation qu ickly, scroll to its shortcut and press the scroll key. ⢠information area (2) To check an item displayed in the information area, scroll to the item and press the scroll key. ⢠notifications (3) To view the notifications, scroll to a box. Each box is only visible if ther e are items in it. To hide the boxes, press the backspace key. Work on the home screen To check your received mes sages, scroll to the message box in the notifi cation area. To re ad a message, scroll to it and press the scroll key. To access other tasks, scroll right. To view your missed calls, scroll to the calls box in the notification area. To return a call, scroll to a call and press the call key. To send a text message to a ca ller, scroll to a call, é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 24
scroll right and select Send text msg. from the list of available actions. To listen to your voice mail, scroll to the voice mail box in the notification area. Scroll to the desired voice mailbox and press the call key to call it. Switch home screens You can define t wo home screen modes for different purposes, such as one mode to show your business e-mail and notific ations, and an other to show your personal e-mail. This way, you do not ha ve to see busine ss-related messages outside office hours. Your operator may have set you a third home screen with operator-specific items. To change from one home screen mode to another, scroll to and press the scroll key. One-touch keys With the One-touch ke ys you can access applica tions and tasks quickly. Each key has been assigned an application and a task. To change these, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisati on > On e-touch keys . Your network operator may have assigned applications to the keys, in which case yo u cannot change them. 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â Calendar key 4 â E-mail key Home key To access the home screen, press the home key briefly. Press the home key briefly again to access the menu . To view the list of active appl ications, press the home key for a few seconds. When the lis t is open, press the home key briefly to scroll the list. To open the selected application, press the home key for a few seconds, or press the scroll key. To close the selected applic ation, press the backsp ace key. Leaving applications running in the background increases t he demand on battery power an d reduces the battery life. Contacts key To open the Contacts appli cation, press the contac ts key briefly. To create a new contact, press th e contacts key for a few seconds. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 25
Calendar key To open the Calendar applic ation, press the calendar key briefly. To create a new meeting entry, press the calendar key for a few seconds. E-mail key To open your default mailbox, press the e-mail key briefly. To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key for a few seconds. Nokia Calendar for Eseries Select Menu > Office > Calendar . Create and view scheduled ev ents and appointments, and switch between differe nt calendar views. Calendar views You can switc h between the following views: ⢠Month view shows the curr ent month and the calendar entries of the selected day in a list. ⢠Week view shows the events for the selected week in seven day boxes. ⢠Day view shows the events for the selec ted day grouped into time slots according t o their starting time. ⢠To-do view shows all to-do items. ⢠Agenda view shows the events for the selected day in a list. To change the view, select Option s > Change view and th e desired view. Tip: To open the week view, scroll to a week number and press the scroll key. To move t o the nex t or the pr evious day in month, week, day, and agenda views, scroll right or left. To change the default view, select O ptions > Settings > Default view . View calendar information In the mont h view, calendar entries are marked with a triangle. Anniversary entries are also marked with an exclamation mark. The entries of the selected day are shown in a list. To open calendar entries, open a calendar view, scroll to an entry, and press the scroll key. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 26
Create calendar entries You can create the following types of calendar entries: ⢠Meeting entries remind you of events that ha ve a specific date and ti me. ⢠Memo entries are related to the whole day but not to a specific time of the day. ⢠Anniversary entries remi nd you of birthdays and special dates. They refer to a cert ain day but not a specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. ⢠To-do entries remind you of a task tha t has a due date but not a specific time of the day. To create a calendar entry, scroll to a date, select Options > New entry and the entry type. Tip: To create a meeting en try, start entering the subject. Create meeting, memo, anniversa ry, or to-do entries 1. Enter the subject . 2. For meeting entries, enter the start and end times, or select All-day event . 3. For meeting and memo entries , enter the start and end dates. For anniversary entries, enter the date and for to- do entries, enter the due date. 4. For meeting entries, enter the location. 5. For meeting, anniversa ry, and to-do entries, you can set an alarm. 6. For recurring meeting entrie s, set the recu rrence time. 7. For to-do entries, set the priority. To set the priorit y for meeting entries, select Options > Prior ity . 8. For memo, a nniversary, and to-d o entries, define h ow the entry is handled during synchronisation. Select Private to hide the entry from viewers if the calendar is available online, Public to make the entry visible to viewe rs, or None to not copy the entry to yo ur computer. 9. Enter a description. To send the entry, select Options > Send . Calendar settings Select Options > Settings . To change the alarm tone, select Calendar alarm tone . To change the view displayed when you open the calendar, select Default view . To change the first day of the week, select Week starts on . To change the week view title, s elect Week view title and Week number or Week dates . Nokia Contacts for Eseries Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts . Save and update c ontact informat ion, such as ph one numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing tone or a th umbnail é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 27
image to a contact. Y ou can also create contact groups, w hich allow you to communicate with s everal contacts at the s ame time, and send c ontact infor mation (bus iness cards) to o r receive it from compatible devices. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. T o cl ose the list, scroll left. Add contacts Select Options > New contact , and enter the conta ct's information. To copy a contact's information from the memory card, select Options > Copy > From memory card . Contact groups Select each contact you wa nt to add to the contact group, select Options > Mark/Unma rk > Mark to mark it, select Options > Group > Add to group > Create new group > Group name , and en ter a name for the grou p. If you want to make conference calls to the group, define als o the following: ⢠Conf. se rvice nu mber â Enter the conference call service number. ⢠Conf. servi ce ID â Enter the conference call ID number. ⢠Conf. servi ce PIN â Enter the conference call PIN code number. To make a conference call to the group, select the group, scroll right, and select Call conf. service from the list of available actions. Search for contacts To search for contacts, st art entering the contact's name i n the search field. Manage contacts directories To change the contacts directory, scroll to the top of the names list, press t he scroll key, and select from the list of available directories. To organise contacts directories, select Opt ions > Organise contact lists and a directory. Scro ll up to move it to the desired place. Add ringing tones for contacts You can set a ringing tone for a co ntact or contac t group. The ringing tone sounds when the contact calls you. To add a ringing tone for contacts, open a contact, select Options > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To add a ringing to ne for contact group s, select a contact group, Opt ions > Group > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To remove the assigned ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Change contacts settings Select Options > Settings . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 28
To change the way the contacts' names a re displayed, select Name display . To select which contacts dire ctory opens when you open the Contacts application, select Default contact list . Multitasking You can have several application s open at the same time. To switch between act ive applications , press and ho ld the home key, scroll to an applicat ion, and press the sc roll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Example: When you have an acti ve phone call and want to check your calendar, press the home key to access the menu, and open the Calendar application. The phone call remains active in the background. Example: When you are writing a mes sage and want to check a web site, press the home key to access the menu, and open the Web application. Select a bookmark or enter the web address manually , and select Go to . To return to your mess age, press and hold the home key, scroll to the message and press the scroll key. Flashlight The camera flash can be used as a flashlight. To switch the flashlight on or off, in the ho me screen, press and hold the space bar. Do not point the flashlight at anyone's eye. Open Ovi Ovi is your door to different Nokia services. For a tour and more information, see www.ovi.com. About Ovi Store In Ovi Store, you can download mobile games, applications, videos, im ages, and ring ing tones to your device. So me of the items are free of charge; others you need to purchase using your credit card or through your phone bill. Ovi Store offers you content that is compa tible with yo ur mobile device and relevant to your tastes and locat ion. The content in Ovi Store is sorted into the following categories: ⢠Recommended ⢠Games ⢠Personalisation ⢠Applications ⢠Audio & video Ovi Files With Ovi Files, you can use your Nokia E63 to access content on your computer if it is switched on and connected to the internet. You will need to inst all the Ovi Files application on every computer you want to access with Ovi Files. You can try out Ovi Files for a limited trial period. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 29
With Ovi Files, y ou can: ⢠Browse, search, and view your images. You do not need to upload the images to the we bsite but you can access your computer content with your mobile device. ⢠Browse, search, and view your file s and documents. ⢠Transfer songs from your computer to your de vice. ⢠Send files and folders from your computer without moving them to and from your device first. ⢠Access files on your computer even when your computer is switched off. Just choose which folders and files you want to be available, and Ovi Fi les automatically keeps an up-to-date copy stored in a protected, online storage for access even when your co mputer is switched off. For support, see files.ovi.com/support . About Ovi Contacts With Ovi Contacts, you can stay con nected to the people who matter most. Sear ch for contacts, and discov er friends in the Ovi community. Keep in touch with your friends - chat, share your location and pr esence, and easily follow what your friends are up to and where they are. You can even chat with friends who use Google Talkâ¢. You can also sync your cont acts, calendar, and oth er content between your Nokia device an d Ov i.com. Your important information is stored and kept up-to-date both in your device and on the web. With Ovi Contacts , you can make your contacts list dyna mic and be confident that you r contacts are stored on Ovi.com. You must have a Nokia Account to use the service. Create an account on your mobile device, or visit www.ovi.com on your PC. Using Ovi Contacts may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data th rough your service provider's network. Contact your network service provider for information about data transmission charges. My Nokia My Nokia is a free service that regularly sends you text messages containing t ips, tricks, and sup port for your Nokia device. It also allows you to browse the My Nokia WAP site where you ca n find details about N okia devices and download tones, graphics, g ames, and applic ations. To use the My Nokia service, it mus t be available in your country and supported by your service provider. You must sign up to use the service. Call charges apply wh en you send messages to sign up or unsubscri be. For terms and conditions, see the documentation supplied with your device, or www. nokia.com/mynokia. To start using My Nokia: 1. Select Menu > Help > My Nokia . 2. Select Sign up to My Nokia . 3. Read the information on the display, and select Accept . My Nokia sends you a text mes sage with further instru ctions. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 30
To launch the My Nokia WAP site in your browser, select My Nokia > Go to My Nokia mo bile . To unsubscribe from the My Nokia service, select My Nokia > Unsubscr ibe . To see the inst ructions for My Nokia, select My Nokia > Instructions . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 31
Phone To make and receive calls, the device must be switched on, the device must have a valid SI M card installed, and you must be located in the service area of a cellular network. To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. To connect to a net call service, your device must be in the coverage of a connection ne twork, such as a WLAN access point. Voice calls Note: The actual invoice for ca lls and ser vices from your service provider may vary, de pending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Answer a call To answer a call, press the ca ll key. To reject a call, press the end key. To mute the ringing tone inst ead of answering a call, select Silence . When you have an active call a nd the call waiting function (network service) is activated, press the call key to answer a new incoming call. The first ca ll is put on hold. To end the active call, press the end key. Make a call To make a call, enter the ph one number, including the area code, and press the call key. Tip: For international calls, add the character that replaces the international access code, and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading 0, if necessary), and phone number. To end the call or cancel the call attempt, pres s the end key. To make a call using the saved cont acts, press the conta cts key. Enter the first letters o f the name, scroll to the name, and press the call key. See "Nokia Contacts for Eseries" , p. 27 . To make a call using the log, pr ess the call key to view up to 20 numbers that you last called or attempted to call. Scroll to the desired number or name, and press the call key. See "Log" , p. 41 . To adjust the volume of an ac ti ve call, scroll right or left. To switch from a voice ca ll to a video call, select Options > Switch to video call . T he device ends the voice call and makes a video call to the recipient. Make a conference call 1. To make a conference call, enter a participant's phone number, and press the call key. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 32
2. When the participant an swers, select Options > New call . 3. When you have made a phone call to all the participants, select Options > Conference to merge the calls into a conference call. To mute the microphone of your device during the call, select Options > Mute . To drop a participant from the conference call, scroll to the participant, and select Op tions > Con ference > Drop participant . To discuss priv ately with a conf erence call participant, scroll to the participant , and select Options > Conference > Private . Video calls T o b e a b l e t o m a k e a v i d e o c a l l , y o u n e e d t o b e i n t h e c o v e r a g e of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network operator or service provider. While talking, you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the reci pient of the call, if the recipient has a compatible mo bile phone. The v ideo image capture d by the camer a in your d evice i s shown to the vi deo call recipient. A video call ca n only be made between two parties . Make a video call To make a video call, enter th e phone number or select the recipient of the call from Contacts, and select Options > Call > Video call . When the video call starts, th e camera of the device is activated. If the camera is alread y in use, video sending is disabled. If the reci pient of the call does not want to send a video back to you, a still image is shown instead. You can define the still image in Menu > Tools > Settings > Ph one > Call > Im age in v ideo call . To disable the sending of aud io, video, or video and audio, select Option s > Disable > Sendin g audio , Sending video , or Sending aud. & vid eo . T o a d j u s t t h e v o l u m e o f a n a c t i v e video call, scroll right or left. To use the loudspeaker for receiving audio, select Options > Activate loud speaker . To mute the loudspeaker and use the earpiece, select Options > Activate handset . To swap the places of images, select Op tions > Change image order . To zoom the image on the display, select Options > Zoom in or Zoom out . To end the video call and make a new voice call to the same recipient, select Options > Switch to voice ca ll . Share a video Use Video sharing (network service) to send vi deo from your mobile device to another compat ible mobile device during a voice call. To use this feature, the device must be within the coverage of a UMTS network. 1. Make a phone call to the selected recipient. You can start sharing a video once the phon e call is established and your device has been registered to the SIP server. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 33
2. To send video from your device, select Options > Share video , and a sharing option, if available. To preview the clip, select Options > Play . 3. Select the recipient from Cont acts, or enter the recipient's SIP address manually to send an invitation to the recipient. Shar ing begins au tomatically when the recipient accepts the video sharing. 4. To end sharing the video, se lect Stop . The voice call continues normally. Receive a video sharing invitation When you receive a video sharing invitation, a message is displayed showing the caller's name or SIP address. To accept the invitation and begin the sharing se ssion, select Accept . To reject the invitation, select Reject . The voice call continues normally. Net calls Select Menu > Communic. > Intern et tel. . Your device supports voice calls over the internet (net calls). Your device attempts emergenc y calls primarily over cellular networks. If an emergency call using cellular networks is not successful, your device attempts a n emergency call through your net call provider. Due to the established nature of cellular telephony, you should use cellular networks for emergency calls, if possible. If you have cellular network coverage available, make sure that your cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls before you attem pt an emergency call. The capability for an emergency call using internet telephony depends on th e availabilit y of a WLAN an d your net call provider's impl ementation of emergency call capabilities. Contact your ne t call provider to check the internet telephony emer gency call capability. With the n et call servic e (netwo rk service), yo u can make and receive calls over the intern et using the VoIP (voice over internet protocol) technology. Net calls can be establish ed between computers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional te lephone. To make or receive a net call, your device must be within WLAN coverage, for example. The availability of the net call service may vary according to your country or area. Create a net call profile Before you can make net calls, you need to create a net call profile. 1. Select Menu > Tools > Se ttings > Connection > SIP settings > Options > New SIP profil e , and enter the required information. To make the login to the net call service automa tic, select Regis tration > Al ways on . Contact your net call provider for the correct settings. 2. Select Back until you return to the Connecti on settings main view. 3. Select Internet tel. > Options > New profile . Enter a name for the profile, and se lect the SIP profile you just created. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 34
To set the created profile to be used automati cally when connecting to the net call service, select Menu > Communic. > Intern et tel. > Preferred profile . To login to the net call service manually, select Registration > When needed in the SIP settings when creating a net call profile. To make secure net calls, ask yo ur service provider for secure net call settings. Th e proxy serv er selected for the net call profile must support se cure net calls. A secure net call is indicated with . Connect to the net call service Select Menu > Communic. > Intern et tel. . To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. If you have selected automati c login, your device automati cally connects t o the net call servi ce. If you login to the service manually, select an available n etwork from the list and Select . The list of networks is re freshed automatically every 15 seconds. To refresh the list manually, select Options > Refresh . Use this option if your WLAN is not shown on the list. To select a net call service for outgoing calls if the device is connected to more than one service, select Optio ns > Change service . To configure new services, select Opt ions > Co nfigure service . This option is shown only if there are services that have not been config ured. To save the netw ork to whi ch you are currently connec ted, select Option s > Save network . The saved networks are marked with a star on the list o f networks . To connect to a net call service using a hidden WLAN, select Options > Use hidden n etwork . To end the connection to a net call service, select Options > Disconnect fr om service . Make net calls You can make a net call from all applications where you can make a regular voice call. For example in Contacts, scroll to the desired contac t, and select Cal l > Internet call . To make a net call in the home screen, enter the SIP address, and press the call key. To set net call as the preferre d call type for outgoing calls, select Menu > Communic. > Internet tel. > Options > Settings > Default call type > Internet call . When your device is connected to a net ca ll service, all calls are made as net calls. Net call service settings Select Options > Settings , scroll to the sett ings of the desired service, and press t he scroll key. To login automatically to the net ca ll service, select Logi n type > A utomatic . I f you use th e automatic log in type for WLANs, the device periodically scans for WLANs, which increases the dema nd on ba ttery power and reduces the battery life. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 35
To login manually to the net call service, select Login type > Manual . To view the networks you have saved for the ne t call service and the networks detected by the ne t call service, select Saved conn. networks . To define the service-sp ecific settings, select Edit service settings . This o ption is only avai lable if a service-specific software plug-in has been inst alled in the device. Speed dialling Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On . Speed dialling allows you to make a call by pressing and holding a number key when in the home screen. To assign a number key to a phone nu mber, select Menu > Communic. > Speed dial . Scroll to the number key (2 - 9) on the display, and select Options > Assign . Select the desired number from Contacts. To delete the phone number assi gned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Remove . To modify a phone number assi gned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Change . Call divert Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call divert . Divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to another phone number. For details, co ntact your service provider. Select to divert voice, data, or fax calls, and select from the following options: ⢠All voice calls , All da ta calls , or All fax calls â Divert all incoming voice, data, or fax calls. ⢠If busy â Divert incoming calls when you ha ve an active call. ⢠If not answered â Divert incoming calls after your device rings for a specified period of time. Select the time you let the device ring before diverting the call in the Delay time: list. ⢠If out of reach â Divert calls when the device is switched off or out of network coverage. ⢠If not available â Activate the last three settings at the same time. This option diverts calls if your device is busy, not answered, or out of reach. To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type and a diverting option, then select Options > Activate > To voice mailbox . To divert calls to another ph one number, select a call type and a diverting option, then select Opti ons > Activat e > To other number . Enter a number in the Number: field, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in Contacts . To check the current diverting s tatus, scroll to the diverting option, and select Options > Check status . To stop diverting calls, scroll to the diverting option, and select Option s > Cancel . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 36
Call barring Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring . You can bar the calls that can be made or received with the device (network service). To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring affects all call types. To bar calls, select from the following: ⢠Outgoin g calls â Prevent making voice calls with your devic e. ⢠Incoming calls â Prevent incoming calls. ⢠International calls â Prevent calling to foreign countries or regions. ⢠Incoming calls when abroad â Prevent incoming calls when outside your home country. ⢠International calls except to h ome country â Prevent calls to foreign countries or re gions, but allow calls to your home country. To check the status of voice call barrings, select the barring option and Option s > Check stat us . To stop all voice call barrings , select a barring option and Options > Cancel all barrings . To change the password us ed fo r barring voice, fax, and data calls, select Option s > Edit barring password . Enter th e current code, then the new code twice. The barring password must be four digits long. For details, contact your service provider. Bar net calls Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Call barring > Internet call barring . To reject net calls from anonymous callers, select Anonymous call barring > On . Send DTMF tones You can send dual tone multi-frequency (D TMF) tones during an active call to control your voice mailbox or other automated phone services. Send a DTMF tone sequence 1. Make a call, and wait un til the other end answers. 2. Select Options > Send DTMF . 3. Enter the DTMF tone sequence, or select a predefined sequence. Attach a DTMF tone sequ ence to a contact card 1. Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts . Open a c ontact, and select Options > Edit > Options > Add de tail > DTMF . 2. Enter the tone sequence. To inse rt a pause of about 2 seconds before or between DTMF tones, enter p . To set the device to send the DTMF tones only after you select Send DTMF during a call, enter w . 3. Select Done . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 37
Voice mail Select Menu > Communic. > Call mailbox . When you open the Voice mail application for t he first ti me, you are asked to enter the number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mail, select Options > Call voice mailbox . If you have configured net call settings to your device and have an internet call mailbox, select Internet call mailbox > Optio ns > Call internet call mbx. to call it. To call your voice mail when in the home screen, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. If you have defined an internet call mailbox, select whether you want to call your voice mail or internet call mailbox. To change the voice mailbox nu mber, select the mailbox and Options > Change number . To change the int ernet call mailbox address, select the mailbox and Options > Change address . Voice aid Select Menu > Tools > Voice aid . The Voice aid application reads text on the display, allowing you to use the basic fu nctions of your device without looking at the display. To hear the entries in your contacts list , select Contacts . Do not use this option if you ha ve more than 500 contacts. To hear information on your missed and received calls, dialled numbers, and frequent calls, select Recent calls . To listen to your v oice messages, select Voice mailbox . To dial a telephone number, select Dialler . To use voice commands to ma ke a phone call, select Voice commands . To have your r eceived messag es read al oud, se lect Message reader . To hear the current time, select Clock . To hear the current date, scroll down. If the Voice aid application is open when a calendar alarm is due, the application reads the calendar alarm cont ent aloud. To hear more options, select Opti ons . Voice commands Select Menu > Tools > Voice comm. . Use voice commands to make p hone calls and launch applications, profiles, or ot her functions on the device. The device creates a voice tag fo r the entries in Contacts and for the functions designated in the Voice commands application. When a voice co mmand is spoken, the device compares the spoken words to the voice tag in the device. Voice commands are not dependent on a speakerâÂÂs voice; however, the voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to reco gnise voice commands better. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 38
Make a call A voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the contact in Conta cts. Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emer gency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. To listen to a voice tag, open a contact, and select Options > Play voice tag . 1. To make a call using a voice command, press and hold the voice key. 2. When you hear the tone or see the visual display, clearly speak the name save d on the contac t. 3. The device plays a synth esised voice tag for the recognised contact in the se lected device language, and displays the name and num ber. After a timeout of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognised contact was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel dialling. If several numbers are saved under t he contac t, the dev ice selects the default number, if it h as been set. Otherwise, the device selects the first available number of the following fields: Mobile , Mobile (home) , Mobile (business) , Te lephone , Tel. (home) , and Tel. (business) . Launch an application The device creates voice tags fo r the applications liste d in the Voice commands application. To launch an ap plication using a voice command, p ress and hold the voice key, and clea rly speak the name of the application. If the recognised application was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel. To add more applications to the li st, select Options > New application . To change the voice command of an application, select Options > Change command , and enter the new command. Change profiles The device creates a voice tag for each profile. To set on a profile using a voice command, press and hold the voice key, and say the name of the profile. To change the voice command, select Profiles > Options > Change command . Voice command settings To switch off the syn thesise r that plays recognised voice commands in the selected device language, select Options > Settings > Synthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition learni ng when the main user of the device has changed, select Remove voice adapts. . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 39
Push to talk Select Menu > Communic. > PTT . Push to talk (PTT) (n etwork se rvice) provides direct voice communication connected with the push of a key. With PTT, you can use y our device as a w alkie-talk ie. You can use PTT to have a conversat ion with one person or with a group of people, or join a channel. A channel is like a chat room: you can call the channel to s ee if anyone is online. The channel call does not alert the other users; the users just join the channel and start sp eaking with each other. In PTT communication, one person talks while the other users listen through the built-i n loudspeaker. Users take turns responding to each other. Beca use only one user can talk at a time, the ma ximum duration of a speech tu rn is limited. For details of the speech turn duration for your network, contact your service provider. PTT settings Select Options > Settings and select User setti ngs to define your preferences for PTT, or Connection settings to change the connection details. Conta ct your service provider for the correct settings. Tip: You may al so receive the settings in a message from the provider of the PTT service. Log in to PTT service If you have set Application start-up on in User s ettings , PTT automatically logs in to the service when started. If not, you must log in manually. To log in to the PTT service manually, select Opti ons > Log in to PTT . When the Ringing type setting of your device is set to Beep once or Silent , or there is an ongoin g phone call, you cannot make or receive PTT calls. Make a PTT call To make a PTT call, select Option s > Contacts , select one or several contacts from the list, and press the voice key. Remember to hold the device in front of you during the call so you can see the display. Th e display informs you when it is your turn to speak. Speak towards th e microphone, and do not cover the loudspeaker with your hands. Pres s and hold the voice key the entire time yo u are talking. When you have finished talking, release the key. To end the PTT call, press the end key. When you receive a PTT call, pr ess the call key to answer the call or the end key to dismiss the call. Created PTT calls Select Options > PTT log > Created PTT , and a call. To make a PTT call to a contact, select Options > Talk 1 . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 40 to 1
To send a request to a contact to call y ou, select Options > Send callback request . To crea te a conta ct, sele ct Options > Save to Contacts . Manage PTT contacts To view, add, modify, delete, or call contacts, select Options > Contacts . A list of names from the Contacts application is displayed with informat ion about their login status. To call a selected contact, select Opt ions > Talk 1 to 1 . To make a group call, sele ct several con tacts and Options > Talk to many . To send the contact a request to call you, select Options > Send callback request . To answer a callback request, select Show to open the callback request. To make a PTT call to the sender, press the voice ke y. Create a PTT channel To create a channe l, selec t Options > New channel > Create new . To join a channel, select the channel you wa nt to talk to, and press the voice key. To invite a user to a channel, se lect Options > Send invitation . To view the currently active users of a channel, select Options > Active membe rs . When you log in to PTT, you are automatically connected to the channels that were acti ve when the application was last closed. Exit PTT To exi t P T T, s el ec t Opti ons > Exit . Select Yes to log out and close the service. Select No if you want to keep the application active in the backgro und. Log Select Menu > Log . Log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and r eceived calls only if the network supports these func tions, the device is switched on and within the network service area. Call and data registers To view recently missed, rece ived, and dialled calls, select Recent calls . Tip: To open Dialled numbe rs when in the home screen, press the call key. To view the approximate durat ion of calls to and from your device, select Call duration . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 41
To view the amount of data t ransferred during packe t data connections, select Packet d ata . Monitor all communications To monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the device, open the general log tab. To view detailed information about a communication event, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. Tip: Subevents, such as a te xt message sent in more than one par t and packet da ta connections, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia mess aging centre, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add the phone number fr om a communication event to Contacts, select Options > Save to Co ntacts , and se lect to create a new contact or to add the phone n umber to an existing c ontact. To copy the number, for example to paste it to a text message, select Options > Copy number . To view a single type of communication event or communication events with one other party, select Options > Filter , and select the desired filter. To erase the contents of the lo g, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Options > Clear log . Call and send messages from Log To call back a caller, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller, and Options > Call . To reply to a caller with a mess age, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller, and select Options > Create message . You can send text messages and multimedia messages. Log settings To set the time for keeping all communication events in the log, select Options > Settings > Log durati on , and the time. If you select No l og , all log contents are permanently deleted. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 42
Messaging Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . In Messaging (network service), you can send and receive text messages, mult imedia messages , audio messages, and e - mail messages. You can als o receive web service m essages, cell broadcast messages, and special messa ges containing data, and send serv ice commands. Before sending or receiving messages, you m ay need to do the following: ⢠Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located in the service area of a cellular network. ⢠Verify that the network supports the messaging feat ures you want to use and that they are activated on your SIM card. ⢠Define the internet access point settings on the device. See "Internet access points" , p. 63 . ⢠Define the e-mail account settin gs on the device. See "E- mail account settings" , p. 58 . ⢠Define the text message setting s on the device. See "Text message setting s" , p. 57 . ⢠Define the multimedia message sett ings on the device. See "Multimedia messa ge settings" , p. 57 . The device may recognise the SIM card provider and automatically configure some of the message settings. If not, you may need to define the settin gs manually; or contact your service provider to configure the settings. Messaging folders Messages and data received using Bluetooth connect ivity are stored in the Inbox folder. E-mail messages are stored in Mailbox . Messages that you have been writing can be stored in the Drafts folder. Messages that are waitin g to be sent are stored in the Outbox folder, and messages that have been sent, excluding Bluetooth messages, are stored in the Sent folder. Tip: Messages are placed in Outbox, for example, when your device is outside ne twork coverage. You can also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the nex t time you connect to your remote mailbox. Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not indicate that the message is received at the intended destination . To request the network to send you a delivery report of the text message s and multimedia messa ges you have s ent (network service), select Options > Settin gs > Text message or Multimedia message > Receive report . The reports are saved in the Reports fold er. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 43
Organise messages To create a new folder to or ganise your me ssages, select My folders > Options > New folder . To rename a folder, select Options > Rename folder . You can only rename folders that you have created. To move a message to anoth e r folder, select the message, Options > Move to folder , the folder, and OK . To sort messages in a specific order, select Optio ns > Sort by . You can sort the message s by Date , Sender , Subject , or Message type . To view the properties of a me ssage, select the message and Options > Message details . Message reader The message reader reads received text and multimedia messages al oud. To play a mess age, press and h o ld the left selection key when you receive a message. To start reading the next messa ge in Inbox, scroll down. To start reading the m essage again, scroll up. I n the beginning of the message, scroll up t o hear the previous m essage. To pause the reading, press th e left selection key briefly. To continue, press the left selection key briefly again. To end the reading, press the end key. Speech Select Menu > Tools > Speech . With Speech, you can set the langu age, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. Edit the voice properties To set the language for the messa ge reader, select Langua ge . To download additional languages to your device, visit the Nokia web site. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice is language- dependent. To set the speaking rate, select Voice settings > Speed . To set the speaking volume, select Voice settings > Volume . To listen to a voice, open the voice tab, select the voice, and select Option s > Play voice . E-mail messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Mailbox . To receive and send e-mail, y ou must have a remote m ailbox service. This service may be o ffered by an internet service provider, a network service provider, or your company. Your device is compliant with in ternet standards SMTP, IMAP4 (revision 1), and POP3, and with different vendor-specific e- mail solutions. Other e-mail pr oviders may offer services with é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 44
different settings or features than those described in this us er guide. For more details, contact your service provider or e- mail service provider. You may be able to install the following e-mails to your device: ⢠Regular POP or IMAP e-mail. You need to con nect to the mailbox, and download the e-mails to your device befor e you can read them. ⢠Nokia Messaging. N okia Messaging is used with different internet e-mail providers, such has Google e-mail services. Nokia Messaging pushes the ne w e-mails t o your d evice as long as the Nokia Messag ing application is open. ⢠Mail fo r Exchan ge. Mail for Ex change is usually used for accessing work e-mails. Your company's IT department may have further instructions on how to install and use Mail for Exchange with your company's e-mail servers. Other e-mail solution s may be available. If you have defined several ma ilboxes, for example a POP or I M A P e - m a i l a n d M a i l f o r E x c h a n g e , s e l e c t o n e o f t h e m a s y o u r default mailbox. That mailbox is used every time you start composing a new e-mail messa ge. To define the default mailbox in Messaging, select Options > Settings > E-mail > Default mailbox and the mailbox. E-mail in home screen To select the mailbox that is shown in the home screen, select Menu > Tools > Settin gs > General > Personalisation > Home screen > Mode settings > Home screen applications > E-mail 1 notifi cation > Mailbox and the e-mail account. To check that th e mailbox that yo u selected can be shown in the home screen, select Menu > Tools > Settin gs > General > Personalisation > Home screen > Mod e settings > Home screen applications > Enabled applications and E-mail 1 notifi cation or E-mail 2 notification . Nokia Messaging The Nokia Messagin g service automatically pushes e-mail from your existing e-mail address to your Nokia E63. You can read, respond to, and organise your e-mails on the go. The Nokia Messaging service works wi th a number of internet e- mail providers that are often used for personal e-mail, such as Google e-mail services. The Nokia Messagin g service may be char geable. For information on possible costs, contact your service provider or the Nokia Messaging service. The Nokia Messaging service must be supporte d by your network and m ay not be av ailab le in all regions. Install the Nokia messaging applic ation 1. Select Menu > Noki a E-mail > New . 2. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 3. Select Connect to allow your device to ac cess the network. 4. Enter your e-mail address an d password. The Nokia Messagin g service can run on your device even if you have installed other e-mail applications, such as Mail for Exchange. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 45
Mail for Exchange With Mail for Exchange, you ca n receive your work e-mail to your devi ce. You can read and re ply to your e-mails, view and edit compatible attachments , view calendar information, receive and reply to meeting requests, schedule meetings, and view, add, and ed it contact inform ation. ActiveSync Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Mail for Exchange can be set up only if your company has Microsoft Exchange Server. In additi on, your company's IT administrator must have activa ted Mail for Exchange for your account. Before starting to set up Mail for Exchange, ensure that y ou have the following: ⢠A corporate e-mail ID ⢠Your office network user nam e ⢠Your office network password ⢠Your network domain name (contact your company's IT departm ent) ⢠Your Mail for Exchange server name (contact your company's IT dep artment) Depending on your company's Mail for Exchange server configuration, you may need to enter other information in addition to those listed. If you do not know the correct information, contact your company's IT department. With Mail for Excha nge, the use of th e lock code may be m a n d a t o r y . T h e d e f a u l t l o c k c o d e o f y o u r d e v i c e i s 1 2 3 4 5 , b u t your company's IT administrator may ha ve set a different one for you to use. You can access and modify the Mail for Exch ange profile and settings in the Messaging setti ngs. Regular POP or IMAP e-mail Your device can download e-ma ils from a POP or IMAP e-mail account. POP3 is a version of the post office protocol that is used to store and retrieve e-mail or in ternet mail messages from a server. IMAP4 is a version of the internet me ssage access protocol that lets you access and mana ge e-mail messages while the messages are still on the e-mail server. You can then choose which messages to download to y our device. Set up POP or IMAP e-mail 1. Go to the home screen, scro ll to the e-mail wizard, and press the scroll key. 2. Select Start e-mail setup . 3. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 4. Select Yes to allow your device to access the ne twork. 5. Enter your e-mail address an d password. 6. Read the information on the display, and select OK to finalise e-mail setup. The na me of your new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main v iew. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 46
Tip: Af ter you have set up a POP or I MAP e-mail, in the Messaging mai n view, sele ct Optio ns > Settings > E-mail and the mailbox to edit the setting s, for example a possible signature, or the name of your mailbox. Connect to a remote mailbox E-mail addressed to you is not automa tically received by yo ur device, but by your remote mailbox. To read your e-mail, you must first connect to the remote mailbox; then select the e- mail messages you wish to retrieve into your device. 1. To retrieve received e-mail messages to your device and view them, select your ma ilbox in the Messaging main view. When the device asks Connect to mailbox? , select Yes . 2. Enter your user name and password, if prompted. 3. Select Option s > Retrieve e-mail > New to retrieve new messages that you have neither read nor retrieved, Selected to retrieve only messages you select from the remote mailb ox, or All to retrieve all messages not previously retrieved. 4. To manage your e-mail offline to save in co nnection costs and work in conditions th at do not allow a dat a connection, select Options > Disconnect to discon nect from the remote mailbox. Any changes you ma ke in the remote mailbox folders while offline, take effect in your remote mailbox the next time you go online and synchronise. Read and reply to e-mail Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. To read a received e-mail, open it from the mailbox. To open an attachment, select Option s > Attachments . Scroll to the attachment, and press the scroll key. To reply only to the sender of an e-mail, select Opt ions > Reply > To se nder . To reply to all recipients of an e-mail, select Options > Reply > To all . Tip: If you reply to an e-mail that con tains attached files, the attachments are not included in the rep ly. If you forward the received e-mai l, the attachments are included. To forward an e-ma il, select Options > Forward . To attach a file to an e-mail messa ge, select Optio ns > Insert and the attachment you want to add. To delete an attachment from an e-mail that you are sending , select the attachment and Opti ons > Remove . To set the message priority, select Options > Sending options > Priority . To set the sending time for th e e-mail message, select Options > Sending optio ns > Send message . Select Immediately , or select When conn. avail. if yo u are working offline. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 47
To call the sender of the e-mail message, if the sender can be found in Contacts, select Options > Call . To reply to the sender of th e e-mai l with an audio message or multimedia message, select Opti ons > Create message . Write and send e-mail 1. To write an e-mail, select New message > E-mail . 2. Select Options > Add recipient to select the recipients' e-mail addresses from Cont acts, or enter the e-mail addresses in the To field. Use a semicolon to separate entries. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipient s, or the Bcc field t o send a bl ind cop y to reci pient s. 3. In the Subject field, enter the subject o f the e-mail. 4. Enter your e-mail message in the text area, and select Options > Send . Delete messages To free up memory space on your device, regularly delete messages from th e Inbox and Sent folders, and delete retrieved e-mail messages. To delete e-mail from the device only, and keep the original on the server, select Options > Delete > Phone (h eader remains) . To delete e-mail both from th e device and the remote server, select Options > Delete > Phone and server . To cancel the deleting, select Options > Restore . Subfolders in your remote e-mail If you create subfolders in yo ur IMAP4 mailboxes on a remote server, you can view and manage these folders with your device when you subscribe to them. You can only subscribe to folders in your IMAP4 mailboxes. To view folders in your IMAP4 mailbox, establish a connection, and select Opti ons > E-mail settings > Retrieval se ttings > Fold er subscriptions . To view a remote folder, select a folder and Options > Subscribe . Every time you go online, the subscribed folders are updated. This may take some time if the folders are large. To update the list of fold ers, select a folder and Options > Update fo lder list . Text messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Write and send text messages Your device supports text messag es beyond the limit for a single message. Longer messag es are sent as two or more messages. Your service provid er may charge accordingly. Characters with accent s, ot her marks, or some languag e options take more spa ce, and limit the number of ch aracters that can be sent in a single message. 1. To write a text message, select Ne w message > Text message . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 48
2. In the To field, enter a recipien t's number, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Conta cts. If you enter more than on e number, sepa rate the numbers with a semicolon. 3. Enter the text of the message. To use a templa te, select Options > Insert > Template . 4. Select Option s > Send . Sending options for text messages To select a message ce ntre to send the message, select Options > Sending option s > Message centre in use . To have the network send you delivery reports on your messages (ne twork service), se lect Options > Sending options > Receive report > Yes . To define how long the me ssage centre resends your message (network service) if the first attempt fails , select Options > Sending option s > Message validity . If the recipient cannot be reached wi thin the validity period, the message is delet ed from the message centre. To convert the message t o another format, select Op tions > Sending o ptions > M essage sent as > Text , Fax , Paging , or E-mail . Change this option only if you are sure that your message centre is able to convert text messages into these other form ats. Contact y our service provider. Text messages on the SIM card Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > SIM messages . Text messages may be stored on your SIM card. Before you can view SIM messages, you must copy the messages to a folder in the device. After copying the messages to a folder, you can view them in the folder or delete them from the SIM card. 1. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark every message. 2. Select Options > Copy . 3. Select a folder and OK to begin copying. To view SIM card messages, open the fo lder where you copied the messages, and open a message. View picture messages The appearance of a pictu re message may vary depen ding on the receiving device. To view a picture message, op en the message from the Inbox folder. To view information about the picture message, select Options > Message details . To save a message in a different folder, select Optio ns > Move to folder . To add the sender of the message to Contac ts, select Options > Save to Contacts . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 49
Forward picture messages 1. To forward the message, open the message from the Inbox folder and select Options > Forward . 2. In the To field, enter a recipien t's number, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Conta cts. If you enter more than on e number, sepa rate the numbers with a semicolon. 3. Enter the text of your messa ge. To use a template, select Options > Insert > Template . 4. Select Option s > Send . Multimedia messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Only devices that have compat ible features can receive and display multimedia m essages. The ap pearance of a message may vary depending on the receivi ng device. A multimedia message (MMS) ca n contain text and objects such as images, sound clips, or video clips. Before you can send or receive multimedia messages on your de vice, you must define the multimedia message settings. Your devi ce may have recognised the SIM ca rd provider and automatically configured the multimedia message settings. If not, use Settings wizard, or contact yo ur service provider for the correct settings. See "Multimedia message settings" , p. 57 . Create and send multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. To create a new message, select New mess age > Multimedia me ssage . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 3. In the Subject field, enter a subject for the message. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Address fields . 4. Enter the text of the message, an d select Options > Insert object to add media objects. You can add objects such as Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . The wireless ne twork may limit th e size of MMS me ssages. If the inserted picture exceed s this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. 5. Each slide of your message can contain only one video or sound clip. To add more slides to your message, select Options > Insert n ew > Slide . To change the order of slides in your message , select Opti ons > Move . 6. To preview a multimedia message before sending it , select Optio ns > Preview . 7. Select Options > Send . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 50
To delete an obj ect from a multimedia message, select Options > Remove . To set the sending options for the current multimedia message, s elect Opti ons > Sending options . Receive and reply to multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain maliciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Tip: If you receive multimedia messages that contain objects unsupported by your device, you cannot open them. Try to send these objects to another device such as a computer, and open them there. 1. To reply to a multimedia mess age, open the message, and select Options > Reply . 2. Select Op tions and To sender to reply to th e sender with a multimedia message, Via text message to reply wit h a text messag e, Via audio message to reply with a n audio message, or Via e-mail to reply with an e-mail message. 3. Enter the text of the message, and select Options > Send . Create pres entations Creating multimedia presentations is not possible if the MMS creation mode setting is s et to Restricted . To change the setting, sele ct Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > MMS creati on mode > Free . 1. To create a presentation, select New message > Multimedia me ssage . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 3. Select Options > Create present ation and a presentation template. A templa te may define which media objects you can include in the presentation, where they appear, and which e ffects are displayed between images and slides. 4. Scroll to the text area and enter the text. 5. To insert images, sound, video, or notes in your presentation, scroll to the co rresponding object area, and select Optio ns > Insert . 6. To add slides, select Insert > New slide . To select the background colo ur for the presentation and background images for di fferent slides, select Options > Background settings . To set effects between images or slides, select Options > Effect settings . To preview the presentation, select Options > Preview . Multimedia presentations may on ly be viewed in compatible devices that support prese ntations. They may a ppear different in different devices. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 51
View presentations To view a presentation, open the multimedia message from the Inbox folder. Scroll to the presentation, and press the scroll key. To pause the presentation, press either selection key. To resume playing the prese ntation, select Opt ions > Continue . If the text or images are too la rge to fit on the display, select Options > Activate scro lling , and scr oll to see the entire presentation. To find phone numbers and e-ma il or web addresses in the presentation, select Options > Find . You ma y use these numbers and addres ses to make calls, send mess ages, or create bookmarks, for example. View and save multimedia attachments To view multimedia messages as complete presentations, open the message, and select Options > Pl ay presentation . Tip: To view or play a multimedia object in a multimedia message, select View image , Pla y sound clip , or Play vide o clip . To view the name and size of an at tachment, open the message, a nd select Options > Objects . To save a multimedia object, select Optio ns > Objects , the object, and Options > Save . Forward a multimedia message Open Inbox, scroll to a multimed ia notification, and press the scroll key. To send the message to a compat ible device without r etrieving it t o your device, select Opti ons > Forward . If the server does not support multimedia message forwarding, this option is not available. 1. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 2. Edit the message, if desired, and select Options > Send . Tip: To edit the delivery settings of the message, select Options > Sending options . Send a sound clip 1. To compose an au dio messa ge, select New message > Audio message . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 3. Select Options > Insert sound clip , and select whether to record a sound clip or select one from Gallery. 4. Select Options > Send . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 52
Sending options for multimedia messages Select New message > Multimedia message > Options > Sending option s and from the following options: ⢠Receive report â Select Yes if you want to receive a notification when the me ssage has been successfully delivered to the recipient. Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging centre tries to send the mess age. If the recipient of a message cannot be reached with in the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. The net work must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximu m amount of time allowed by th e network. ⢠Priority â Set th e sending priority t o High , Normal , or Low . Instant messaging Select Menu > Communic. > IM . Instant messa ging (IM) (netwo rk service) allows you to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service providers maintain IM servers that you can log in to after you register to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their support of features. If IM is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in the menu of your device. Contact your service provider for more information about signing up for IM services and cost s of services . For more information on IM settings, contact your service provider. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the IM service. If not, enter the settings manually. Other instant messaging solution s, such as WindowsLive and Yahoo, may be available in Download. Define IM settings To define the IM application settings, select Opti ons > Settings > Pre ferences . You can, for example, set your screen name and IM alert tones . To converse with an IM user or users, and to view and edit your IM contacts, you must log into an instant messagin g server. To add an IM server, select Options > Settings > Servers . For the correct settings, contact your service provider. To set the server as the one to which your device automatically lo gs in, select Options > Settings > Default server . To define how your device connects to the IM server, select Options > Settings > IM login typ e . To establish a connection between your device and the default server automatically, select Automati c . To automate the connection only when in your home network, select Auto in home netw. To connect to the se rv er when you open the IM application, select On app. start-up . To connect to the server manually, select Manual and log into the server in the IM é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 53
main view by selecting Opt ions > Log in . Enter your user ID and password at the prompt. You can obtain t he user name, password, and other se ttings to log i n from your service provider when you register for the service. Start a conversation Open Conver sations . To search for IM users and user IDs, select IM contacts > Options > New IM contact > Search . You can search by User's name , User ID , Phone number , and E-mail address . To view a conversation, select a participant. To continue the conversa tion, enter your message, and select Options > Send . To return to the conversations list without closing the conversation, select Back . To close the conversation, select Options > End conversation . To start a new conv ersation, select Options > Ne w conversation . You can start a new convers ation with a contact while you are in side an active conversation. However, you cannot have two acti ve conversatio ns with the sa me contact. To insert an image to an ins tant message, select Options > Send image , and se lect the image you w ant to send. To save a conversation p articipant to your IM contacts, select Options > Add to IM contacts . To save a conversation, while in the conversation vi ew, select Options > Record chat . The conversation is saved as a text file that can be opened and vi ewed in the Notes application. IM groups Open IM groups . IM groups is available only if you are logged into an IM server, and the server supports IM groups. To create an IM group, select Options > Create new group . To join an IM group or to continue a group conversation, scroll to the group, and press the scroll key. Enter a message, and select Option s > Send . To join an IM group that is no t on the list, but for which you know the group ID, select Opti ons > Join new group . To leave the IM group, select Options > Leave IM group . To search for IM groups and group IDs, select IM groups > Options > Search . You can search by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID) . To add an IM user to the group, select Options > Add member . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the contact ID. To remove a member from the IM group, select Options > Remove . To provide members with editin g rights to th e group, select Options > Add editor . Se lect a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. IM users with editing rights can edit group settings and invite other users to join the group or ban them from the group. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 54
To remove editing rights from a group member, select Options > Remove . To prevent IM users from joining the group, select Optio ns > Add to banned list . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. To allow a banned user to join the group , select Opti ons > Remove . Block users Select IM contacts > Options > Blocking opti ons > View blocked list . To find a blocked IM user, enter the first letters of the user's name. Matc hing names a ppear in a lis t. To allow receiving messages fr om a blocked IM user, select Options > Unblock . To prevent receiving messages from other IM users, select Options > Block new contact s . Select the IM user from your IM contacts, or enter the user ID. IM application settings Select Options > Settings > Preferences and define the following settings: ⢠Use scre en name â Change the name th at identifies you in IM groups. ⢠Show my availability â Show your online status to all other IM users or your IM contacts only, or hide y our online status. ⢠Allow messages from â Select to receive instant m e s s a g e s f r o m a l l o t h e r I M u s e r s , y o u r I M c o n t a c t s o n l y , o r not to receive messages at all. ⢠Allow invi tations from â Select to receive invitations to IM groups from all IM users, your IM contacts only, or not to receive invitations at all. ⢠Msg. scrolling speed â To adjust the speed at which new messages are d isplayed, scroll left or right. ⢠Sort IM contacts â List your IM contacts alphabetically or by their online status. ⢠Availability reloading â T o u pd ate th e o nli ne st at us of your IM contacts automa tically, select Automatic . ⢠Offline contacts â Select if IM contacts with an offline status are shown in t he IM contacts list. ⢠Own message colour â Select the colour o f the instant messages y ou send. ⢠Received msg colour â Select the colour of the instant messages you receive. ⢠Show date / time i nfo â View the receiving or sending time of each messag e in an IM conversation. ⢠IM alert tone â Select the tone that is played when you receive a new instant message. Special message types Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . You can receive special messages that contain data, such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or internet access or e-mail account settings. To save the contents of these messages, select Options > Save . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 55
Service messages Service messages are sent to your device by service providers. Service messages may contai n notifications such as news headlines, services, o r links throug h which the message content can be downloaded. To define the service message sett ings, select Options > Settings > Servic e message . To download th e service or mess age content, select Options > Download message . To view information about the sender, web address, expiration date, and other de tails of the mes sage before downloading it, select Options > Message details . Send service commands You can send a service reque st message (also known a s a USSD command) to your service provid er and request activation for certain network services. Contact your service provider for the service request text. To send a service reques t message, select Options > Service command . Enter the service request text and select Options > Send . Cell broadcast Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Cell broadcast . With the cell broadcast network service, you can receiv e messages on various topics fr om your service provider, such as weather or traffic conditions in a particular region. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. Cell broadcas t messages cannot be received when the device is in the remote SIM mode. A packet data (GPRS) connection ma y prevent cell broadcast reception. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS (3G) networks. To receive cell broadc ast messages, you may need to set the cell broadcast reception on. Select Options > Settings > Reception > On . To view messages related t o a topic, select the topic. To receive messages related to a topic, select Options > Subscribe . Tip: You can set important topics as hot topics. While the device is in the standby mode, you are notified when you receive a message related to a hot topic. Select a topic, and select Options > Hotmark . To add, edit, or delete topics, select Options > Topic . Messaging settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings . Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and configure the correct text message, multimedia message, é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 56
and GPRS settings automa tically. If not, contact you r service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, or use the Settings wizard a pplication. Text message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: ⢠Message centres â View the available message centres for your device, or create a new one. ⢠Message centre in use â Select a messag e centre to send the message. ⢠Character encoding â Select Red uced support to use automatic character conv ersion to another encoding system when available. ⢠Receive report â Selec t Yes if you want the network to send you delivery reports on your messages (net work service). ⢠Message validity â Sele ct how long the message centre resends yo ur message if th e first attemp t fails (networ k service). If the recipient ca nnot be reached within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre . ⢠Message sent as â Convert the message to anot her format, suc h as Text , Fax , Pa ging , or E-mai l . Change th is option only if you are sure th at your messag e centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your service provider. ⢠Preferre d connect ion â Select the preferred method of connection when sending text messages from your device. ⢠Reply via same centre â S elect whethe r you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message centre number (net work service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multime dia message . Select from the following: ⢠Image size â Select Sm all or Large to scale images in multimedia messages. Select Original to maintain the original image size. ⢠MMS creation mode â Select Restricted to have your device prevent you from including content in multimedia messages that may not be supported by the network or the receiving device. To receive warnings about including such content, select Guided . To create a multimedia message with no restrictions on attachment typ e, select Free . If you select Re stricted , creating m ultimedia presentations is not possible. ⢠Access point in use â Select the default access point to connect to the multimedia messa ge centre. You may not be able to change the default ac cess point if it is preset in your device by your service provider. ⢠Multimed ia retrieval â S elect Always autom atic to receive multimedia messages always automatically , Auto in home netw. to receive notification of a new multimedia message that you can retrieve from the message centre (for exampl e, when you are travelling abroad and are outside your home network), Manual to retrieve multimed ia messages from the me ssage centre é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 57
manually, or Off to prevent r eceipt of any mult imedia messages. ⢠Allow anon. msgs. â Select whether you want to receive messages from unknow n senders. ⢠Receive adverts â Select whether you want to receive messages defined as advertisements. ⢠Recei ve repo rt â Select Yes to have the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia mess age that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending â Select Yes to not send delivery reports from your device for received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging centre tries to send the mess age (network service). If the recipient of a message cann ot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. E-mail account settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail . If you try to edit mailbox setti ngs but have not set up an e- mail account, the mailbox gu ide opens and helps you set up your e-mail ac count. If you have defined a mailbox, scroll to it, and press the scroll key to edit the settings. The settings available for ed iting may vary. Some settings may be preset by your service provider. Connection settings To define the connection setting s, se lect an e-mail account and Options > Edit > Connection se ttings . To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail . To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail . User settings To define the user settings for an e-mail account, select the account, select Options > Edit > User se ttings , and define the following settings: ⢠My name â Enter a name to appear before your e-mail address when you send e-mail. ⢠Reply-to â Select whether you want replies to be redirected to a different address. Select On , and enter the e-mail address to which you want to direct the replies. You can only enter one address to which replies are directed. ⢠Delete e-mails from â Select whether you wa nt to delete the e-mail messages on ly from the device or from both the device and the server. Select Always ask if you want to confirm from where the e-mail should be deleted every time you delete an e-mail. ⢠Send message â Select to send the e-mail imme diately or when a connection is available. ⢠Send copy to self â Select whether you want to sa ve a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and t o the address defined in My e-mail address in the Outgoing e- mail settings. ⢠Include sign ature â Select whether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 58
⢠New e-mail alerts â Select whether you want to be notified of a new received e-mail messa ge with a tone and a note. Retrieval settings To define the retrieva l setting s, select the e-mail account, select Op tions > Edit > Retrieval sett ings , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail to retrieve â Select whether you want to retrieve only the e-mail header inform ation such as sender, subject and date, e-mail, or e-mail wi th atta chments. This setting is for POP3 mailboxes only. ⢠Retrieval amount â Select the number of e-mail messages you want to retrieve from the remote server to your mailbox. ⢠IMAP4 folder p ath â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. This settin g is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. ⢠Folder subs criptions â Subscribe to ot her folders in the remote ma ilbox and retr ieve content from those folders. This setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. Automatic retrieval settings To define the automati c retrieval settings for an e-ma il account, select the account and Options > Edit > Automatic retri eval , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail retrieval â S e l e c t Enabled to retr ieve new e-mail messages au tomatically fro m your remote mailbo x, or Only in home net w. to retrieve new e-mail messages automatically from your remo te mailbox only when you are in your home network and not, for example, travelling. ⢠E-mail notifications â Receive notifications on received e-mail. Service mess age settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Se rvice message . To receive service messages from service providers, select Service mess ages > On . To select how to download services and service message content, select Download messages > Automatically or Manually . If you select Auto matically , you may still need to confirm some d ownloads since not all serv ices can be downloaded automatically. Cell broadcast settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Ce ll broadcast . To receive cell broadcast m essages, select Reception > On . To select the langua ges in which you want to receive cell broadcast messages, select Language . To display new topics in th e ce ll broadcast topics list, select Topic detection > On . Other settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Ot her . Select from the following: ⢠Save sent mess ages â Select whether to store sent messages in the Sent folder. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 59
⢠Number of s aved msgs . â Enter the number of sent messages to save. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memory in use â Select wher e to save your messag es. You can save messages to th e memory card only if a memory card is inserted. ⢠Folder vie w â Define how you want the mess ages in Inbox to be shown. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 60
Internet With yo ur new E series device you can browse both the internet and your co mpany's in tranet, and downloa d and install new applications to your device. You can also use your device as a modem and connect your PC to the internet . Web Select Menu > Web . To browse the web (network se rvice), you need to configure the internet access point settings. If you are using a data call or GPRS connection, your wire less network must support data calls or GPRS, and the data serv ice must be activated for your SIM card. Tip: You may receive the internet access point settings from your service provider as a special text message or from the service provider's web pages. You can also enter the internet access point settings manually. See "Internet access points" , p. 63 . Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers also give you instructions on how to use their services. If the web page is unreadable or not support ed and garbage code is found while browsing, you can try to select Menu > Web > Options > Settings > Page > Default encoding , and select a corresponding encoding. Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transmi ssion between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between th e gateway and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. Th e service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be re quired for some services, such as banking services. You are noti fied if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Browse the web To browse the web, select a bookmark or enter the web address manually , and select Go to . Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate se curity an d protection against harmful software. Tip: When you start to enter the address, th e addresses of the pages you have previously visited that match your input are displayed. To open a page, scroll to its address, and pre ss the scroll key. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 61
To move on a web page, use the scroll key, whi ch is shown as a pointer on the page. When you move the pointer over a link, the pointer changes into a hand. Press the scroll key to open the link. On a web pa ge, new links usually appear underlined in blue and previou sly visited links in purple. Images that act as links ha ve a blue border around them. The addresse s of the pages you visit are saved in the Aut o. bookmarks folder. Bookmarks To access the bookmarks view whi le browsing, select Options > Bookmarks . To view a bookmarked web page, select the bookmark. To browse to another web page, select Options > Go to web address , enter the web address, and select Go to . To add a bookmark while browsing, select Options > Save as bookmark . To organise your bookmarks, in the bookmarks view, select Options > Bookmark manager . You can move and edit bookmarks, and create new folders. Clear the cache A cache is a memory location tha t is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information re quiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The info rmation or services you have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Clear cache . Feeds and bl ogs Select Menu > Web > Web feeds . Feeds usually contain headlines and articles, often about recent news or other topics. Blog is a short ening of weblog, which is a continuously updated web diary. To download a feed or blog, scroll to it, and p ress the scroll key. To add or edit a feed or blog, select Options > Manag e feed > New fe ed or Edit . End a connection To end the connection and vi ew the browser page offline, select Option s > Tools > Disconnect . To end th e connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . Web settings Select Menu > Web > Optio ns > Settings . The web settings are divided into four groups: ⢠General contains access point, home page, an d browsing security setting s. ⢠Page contains imaging, audio, and pop-up settings. ⢠Privacy contains settings related to your privacy. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 62
⢠Web feeds contains settings related to web feeds and blogs. Browse the intranet Select Menu > Office > Intra net . To browse your company's i ntranet, you must create a company-specific VPN policy. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > VP N . To connect to the intranet, op en the Intranet appli cation, select the connection method a nd Options > Connect . To define which VPN profile to use in the connection, select Options > Use other VPN poli cy . To define the settings for th e intranet connection, select Options > Settings . Internet access points An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a data connection t o the network. To use e-mail and mult imedia services or to browse web pages, you must first defi ne access points for these services. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. Set up an internet access point for packet data (GPRS) 1. Select Menu > To ols > Se ttings > Connection > Access points . 2. Select Options > New access point to create a new access point, or select an ex isting access point from the list and then Optio ns > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for th e new one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descript ive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Packet da ta . ⢠Access point name â Enter the nam e for the access point. The name is usually provided by your service provider. ⢠User name â E nt er y o ur u s er n am e if r eq u ir e d b y th e service provider. User names are often case-sensitive and provided by your service provider. ⢠Prompt password â Select Yes to enter your p a s s w o r d e a c h t i m e y o u l o g i n t o a s e r v e r o r No to save the password in your device memory a nd automate the login. ⢠Password â Enter your password if required by the service provider. The password is often case-sensitive and provided by the service provider. ⢠Authenticat ion â Select Secure to send your password always encrypted, or Normal to send your password encryp ted when possible. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 63
⢠Homepage â Enter the web address of the page you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. 4. After defining the s ettings, select Options > Advanced settings to define the advanced set tings or Back to sa ve the settings and exit. Advanced internet access point settings for packet data (GPRS) Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . After setting up a basic internet access point for packet data (GPRS), select Options > Advanced settings , and define the following advanced settings: ⢠Network t ype â Select IPv4 or IPv6 as the internet protocol type. The internet protocol defines how data is transferred to and from your device. ⢠Phone IP addres s â Enter the IP address of your device. Select Auto matic to have the network pro vide the device IP address. This se tting is shown only if you select Network t ype > IPv4 . ⢠DNS address â Select Primary DNS address and Secondary DNS address and enter their IP addresse s, if required by your service provider. Otherwise, the name server addresses are pr ovided automatically. ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy servers are intermediate servers used by some service providers between a browsing service and its users. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Set up an access point for WLAN manually 1. Select Menu > To ols > Se ttings > Connection > Access points . 2. Select Options > New access point to create a new access point, or select an ex isting access point from the list and then Optio ns > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for th e new one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Wireless LAN . ⢠WLAN network nam e â To enter the service set identifier (SSID), that is, the name that identifies the specific WLAN, select Enter manually . To s elect the network from the WLANs in range, select Search for networks . ⢠Network status â Sel ect Hidden if the network you are connecting to is hidden or Publi c if it is not hi dden. ⢠WLAN network mode â If you select Infrastructure , devices can commu nicate with each other and with wired LA N devices through a WLAN access point. If you sele ct Ad-hoc , devices can send and receive data directly with each other, and no WLAN access point is needed. ⢠WLAN security mode â You mus t select the same security mode that is used in the WLAN access point. If you select WEP (wired equivalent privacy), 802.1x, or WPA/WPA2 (W i-Fi protected access), you must also configure the relevant additional settings. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 64
⢠WLAN security se ttings â Edit the security settings for the selected security mode. ⢠Homepage â Enter the web a ddress of the pa ge you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. To set up a WLAN access p oint automatically, use the WLAN wizard. Select Menu > Connectivi ty > WLAN wiz. . Advanced access point settings for WLAN Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . After setting up a basic access point for WLAN, select Options > Advanced setting s , and define the following advanced settings : ⢠IPv4 settings â Enter the device IP and name server addresses for the IPv4 internet protocol. ⢠IPv6 setti ngs â Select or enter the name server addresses for the IPv6 internet protocol. ⢠Ad-hoc channel â The channel is usually chosen automatically. To enter the chann el number (1-11) manually, select User defined . ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the proxy server address. ⢠Proxy port numb er â Enter the proxy server port number. Connect PC to web You can use yo ur device to connect your PC to the web. 1. Connect the data cable to the USB connectors of your device and your PC. 2. Select Connect PC to web . The necessary software is automatically installed from your device to the PC. 3. Accept the installation in your PC. Accept also the connection, if prompted. When the connection to the web is established, the web br owser of your PC opens. You must have administ rator rights to your PC, and t he autorun option en abled in the PC. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 65
Travelling Need directions? Looking for a restaurant? Your Eseries device has the tools to get you where you want to be. About GPS and satellite signals To use Global Positioning System (GPS), you need a compatible GPS receiver. Use Bluetooth connectivity to connect to the GPS receiver. To start u sing a compatible GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectiv ity, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth . A GPS terminal receives low- power radio signals from the satellites and measures the travel time of t he signals. From the travel time, the GPS receiver can calculate its location to the accuracy of metres. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenanc e. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adju stments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United States Departmen t of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geom etry. Availability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, bui ldings, natural obstacles, and weat her conditions. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete an d metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data fr om the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter ha s limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. To enable or disable different positioni ng methods, such as Bluetooth GPS, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Po sitioning > Posit ioning methods . About satellite signals If your device cannot find th e satellite signal, consider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoo rs to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠If the weather conditions are bad, the sign al strength may be affected. ⢠Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to severa l minutes. Satellite status To check how ma ny satellites your device has found, and whether your device is receiv ing satellite signals, select Menu > Tools > GPS data > Position > Options > é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 66
Satellite stat us . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is sh own in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite signal to calculate the coordinat es of your location, the bar tu rns black. Initially your device must rece ive signals from at least fou r satellites to be able to calculate th e coordinates of your location. When the in itial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calc ulating the coordinates of your location with three satellite s. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Positioning settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Positioning . To use a specific positioning me thod to detect the location of your device, select Positioning methods . To select a position ing server, select Position ing server . Maps Select Menu > Tools > Maps . With Maps, you can see you r current location on the map, browse maps for different cities and countries, search for addresses and different points of interest, plan routes from one location to another, and save locations and send them to compatible devices. You can also purchase licences for extra services, such as travel guides, traffic informa tion, and navigation service with voice guidance. These services are not available for all countries or regions. I f y o u b r o w s e t o a n a r e a w h i c h i s n o t c o v e r e d b y m a p s a l r e a d y downloaded in your device, a map for the area is automatically downloaded through the internet. Some map s may be available in your device or memory card. You can also use the Nokia Map Loader PC so ftware to download m aps. To install Nokia Map L oader to a compatible PC, go to www.nokia.com/maps. Downloading maps may involve the transmission of large amounts of data th rough your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for in formation ab out data transmission charg es. When you use Maps for the firs t time, y ou may need to select an access point for downloading maps. To change the access point later, select Options > Tools > Settings > Internet > Default access point . The GPS function requires an external Bluetooth GPS rec eiver. Y ou r d e v i c e d oe s n o t h a v e a n integrated GPS receiver. To use GPS function and navigation, you need to connect your device to a compatible GPS receiver using Bluetooth. About Maps To connect to the internet automa tically when you star t Maps, select Optio ns > Tools > Settings > Internet > Go online at start-up > Yes . To prevent automatic downloading of maps, select Options > Tools > Settin gs > Int ernet > Go o nline at start-up > No . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 67
To set the device to ask your permission before connecting to the internet , select Options > Tools > Settings > Internet > Go online at start-up > Always ask . To be informed when your devi ce registers to a network other than your ho me network, select Opt ions > To ols > Settings > Internet > Ro aming warning > On (sh own only when you are online). For details and roaming costs, contact your service provider. Tip: To avoid data transfer co sts, you can also use Maps without an internet connection, and browse the maps that are saved in your device or memory card. Almost all digital ca rtography is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the ca rtography that you download for use in this device. Move on a map The map coverage varies by country and region. When you open Maps, the capita l of the country you are in or the location that was saved from your last session is shown. The map of the location is also downloaded, if needed. To zoom in to your GPS position or your last known location, press the function key a nd 0 . When the GPS connection is active, shows your current location on the map. To move on the map, scroll up, down, left, or right with the scroll key. The map is orient ed towards north by default. To zoom in and out on the map, press the function key and * , or the function key and # . When you browse the map on the display, a new map is automatically downloaded if yo u scroll to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. These map s are free of charge, but down loading may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For more information on data transmission charges, contact your service provider. The maps are automatically saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted). Display indicators The GPS indicator on the bottom right corner of the display shows the avai lability and strength of the satellite signal. One bar is one satellite. When the device tries to find a satellite, the bar is yellow. Wh en the device receives enough data from the satellite to establish a GPS conn ection, the bar turns green. The more green bars, the stronger the GPS connection. Initially, your device must rece ive signals from at least four satellites to calculate the coordinate s of your location. After the initial calculation, signal s from three satellites may be enough. The data transfer indicator shows the internet connection used and the a mount of data transferred since the application started. Find locations To find a location in the city or area displayed on the map, enter the full or partial addres s of the location in the search é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 68
field, and press the scroll key. To find a location in another city, enter the city and the full or partial address, such as London Oxfo rd Street , and press the scroll key. To find a specific address, or an address in another country, select Options > Search > Addresses . Country/Region * and City or post c ode are mandatory. Tip: To search for locations in another country using the search field, enter also the name of the country in the search field: Rome Italy . To import a location address from the Contacts application, select Options > Search > Addresses > Options > Select from Contacts . The search results a re grouped by categories. To limit the search to one category, select Options > Search . If you search for locations wi thout an intern et connection, the search results are limited to a radius of 50 km (31 miles). Plan a route To plan a route, select your start point on the map or s earch for a location, press the scroll key, and select Add to route . To define the destin ation and add more locations for your route, select Options > Add route point , and search for the location. To switch between walking or driving mode, select Options > Settings > Transport mode To show the route on the map, select Options > Show route . To navigate to the destinati on by car or on foot, if you have purchased a licence for these extra services, select Options > Start driving or Start walki ng . To save the route, select Optio ns > Save route . Walk to your destination The walking route ignores any possible limitations to car navigation, such as one-way streets and turn restrictions, and includes areas su ch as pedestrian zones and pa rks. It also prioritises walkways and sma ller roads, and omit s highways and motorway s. The route is drawn to the map, and the arrow indicates the direction. The small dots show in which direction you are walking. The length of a walking rout e is limited to a ma ximum of 50 kilometres (31 miles) and the trave lling speed to a maximum of 30 km/h (18 miles/h). If the speed limit is exceeded, navigation stops and is resu med once the speed is back within limits. There is no voice guidance available for pedestrian navigation. To purchase a licence for pedestrian navigation, select Options > Extras > Walk . The licence is region-specific and can be used only in the selected area. You can pay for the licence through a credit card or in your phone bill, if supported by your service provider. Tip: To try out navigation for three day s with a free licence, press the scroll key, and select Walk to . Maps checks if a free licence is available for your device. To é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 69
activate the licence, select OK . You can only use the licence once. To start navigating, select a location and Walk to . To stop navigating , select Stop . Drive to your destination To purchase a licence for pede strian and car navigation with voice gui dance, select Options > Extras > Drive & Walk . The licence is region-specific and can b e used only in the selected area. Tip: To try out naviga tion for three days with a free licence, press the scroll key , and select Drive to . Maps checks if a free licence is available for your device. T o activate the licence, select OK . You can only use the licence once. To start navigatin g by car, select a location , press the scroll key, and select Drive to . When you us e car navigation for the first time, you are asked to select the la nguage of the voice guidance and download the rela ted voice guidance files. To change the langua ge later, in the main view, select Options > Tools > Settings > Navigati on > Voice guidance . Voice guidance is not available for pedestrian navigation. To switch between different views during the navigation, press the scroll key, and sele ct Manoeuvre view , Bird's-eye view , or Arrow view . To repeat the voice guidance, s elect Optio ns > Repeat . To stop navigating , select Stop . Traffic information The real-time traffic information service provides information about traffic events that may affec t your trav el. The traffic information service is an extra service that y ou can purchase and downloa d into your device, if available in your country or region. To purchase a licence fo r the tr affic information service, select Options > Extras > Traffic info . To view information abou t traffic events, select Options > Traffic info . The events are shown on the map as triangles and lines. To view the details of an even t, including possible rerouting options, select the event and Optio ns > Open . To update the tra ffi c information, select Update traffic info . Travel guides Travel guides provide info rmation about at tractions, restaurants, hotels, and other points of interest. Some guides contain videos an d audio clips. The guides must be purch ased and downloaded before use. Downloadin g travel g uides ma y involve the transmission of large amounts of dat a through your service p roviderâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. To purchase and download travel guides, or to view downloaded ones, select Options > Extras > Guides . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 70
To browse travel guide categories, select a category, and press the scroll key. If there are subcategories, select a subcategory, and press the scroll key again. To download a new guide to your device, scroll to the desired guide, and select Yes . You ca n pay for the gu ides through a credit card or in your phone bi ll, if suppor ted by your service provider. GPS data Select Menu > Tools > GPS data . With GPS data, you ca n view your current location, find your way to a desired location, and track distance. Select Navigati on to view navigating i nformation to your trip de stina tion, Po sition to view positioning information about your current location, or Trip distance to view your travelling information s u c h as t h e d i s t a n ce and duration you have travelled, and your average and max imum speeds. The application must receive positioning information from at least three satellites to be used as a travelling aid. The trip meter has limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can al so be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. Use GPS data To check the signal strength of the satellites that provide the positioning informat ion necessary for na vigation, open any of the three views and select Optio ns > Satellite status . To set a landmark or location as the destinati on of your trip, select Navigation > Options > Set destinat ion . You can also enter the destination latitu de and longitude coordinates. To remove the destination set for your trip, select Navigation > Optio ns > Stop navigatio n . To save your current position as a landmark, select Navigation or Posi tion , and Options > Save position . To activate the t rip meter, select Trip distance > Options > Start . To stop the trip meter, select Options > Stop . To reset all fields and start calculating the trip ag ain, select Trip distance > Op tions > Restart . To change the measuring system in use, select Opt ions > Settings > Meas urement sy stem > Metric or Imperial . To enter the altitude calibration to correct the altitude received from the positioning satellites , select Opti ons > Settings > Alti tude calibrat ion . Landmarks Select Menu > Tools > Landmarks . Landmarks are coordinates to ge ographic locations th at you can save to your device for la ter use in different location- based services. You can create landmarks using a Bluetooth GPS accessory or network (network service). é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 71
Create a landmark To create a landmark, select Options > New landmark . Select Current posit ion to make a network request for the latitude and longitude coordinate s of your current location, Select from map to select the location fro m a map, or Enter manually to fill in necessary locat ion information such as a name, category , address, lat itu de, longitude, and altitude. To show the landmark on the map, select Options > Sh ow on map . Edit landmarks To edit a landmark, select Options > Edit > Options and from the following: ⢠Select categories â Organise the landmark to a grou p of similar landmarks. Select a category to modify landmark information such as a name, category, addre ss, latitude, longitude, and altitude. ⢠Retrieve curre nt position â Request and automatically fill in the geographical latitu de and longitude coordinates to make a landmark of your current location. ⢠Delete â Remove the landmark. ⢠Landma rk ico n â Change the icon of the landmark. ⢠Show on map â Show the land mark on the map. ⢠Send â Send the landmark to compatible devices. ⢠Input optio ns â Modify text input settin gs, such as the writing language. ⢠Editin g options â Edit the phone numbers and web addresses assigned to the land mark. Landmark cate gories You can see the landmark catego ries in two views: one lists categories that already contain landmarks, and the other lis ts all the categories your device has. To view the landmarks that a category conta ins, scroll to the category, and press the scroll key. To create a new category, se lect Options > Edit categories > Options > New category . T o c h a n g e t o w h i c h c a t e g o r i e s a l a n d m a r k b e l o n g s , o p e n t h e landmarks tab. Sc roll to th e landmark, and select Opti ons > Edit > Options > Select cate gories . Select the category or categories in which you want to include the landmark and OK . Receive landmarks Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Open a message that contains a landmark you have received from another device. Scroll to the landmark, and press the scroll key. To save the landmark in your device, select Op tions > Save . To forward the landmark to compatible devices, select Options > Send . To show the received land mark on the map, select Opti ons > Show on map . To find out how to navig ate to the received landmark, select Options > Show route . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 72
Media Your device contains a variet y of media applicat ions for both business and leisure time use. For more information, see the extended user guide on the web. Camera Select Menu > Media > Camera . Capture an image Your device supports an image capture resolution of up to 1600x1200 pixels. The image reso lution in this guide may appear different. To capture an image, use the display as a viewfinder, aim at your subject, and press t he scroll key. The device saves the image in Gallery, or in th e folder you have defined. Tip: To zoom in or out before capturing an image, scroll up or down. If you do not want to keep the captured image, select Options > Delete . Select Back to return to the viewfinder to capture another image. Select Optio ns > Go to Galle ry to view the image in Gallery. Select Options > Flash to always us e flash, never use it, or use it automatically accord ing to surrounding light conditions. If the light is di m, select Options > Ni ght mode > On before capturing an image. To adjust the image, select Options > Adjus t > White balance or Colour tone . To capture images in a sequence, select Options > Sequence mode . The camera captures six images in a row. To capture timed images, select Options > Self-time r , and the desired time-o ut. The camera cap tures an image after the time-out has passed. Tip: To access the various came ra modes quickly, select Options > Show toolbar . To view the captured images, select Menu > Media > Gallery > Image s . Record a video clip 1. To start recording a video clip, press the scroll key. The remaining recording time is shown at the top of the display. 2. To pause the recording, select Pause ; to resume the recording, select Continue . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 73
3. To stop the recording, select Stop . The device saves the clip in Gallery, or in the folder you have defined. 4. If you do not want to keep the recorded video clip, select Options > Delete . Select Back to return to the viewfinder to record an other video clip. Select Option s > Play to view the video clip in the RealPlayer application. Camera settings Select Options > Settings . To adjust image qual ity, to se lect whether images remain on the display after capturing th em, and to change resoluti on, default name, or memory in wh ich t o save your new images, select Image . To change the length, resolution, and default name of th e videos you record or the memo ry in which to save them, select Video . Nokia Podcasting Select Menu > Media > Podc asting . Download podcasts to your device and listen them. Play and manage podcasts Podcasting delivers audio or video content over the internet for playback on mobile devices and PCs. With the Nokia Podc asting applica tion, you can s earch, discover, subscribe, and download podcast s over the air; and play, manage, and sha re podcasts with your device. Define the connection and downloading settings before using the application. Select Options > Setti ngs > Connection and Download . To search for new podcast episodes to subscr ibe to, select Directories . To search for podcasts usin g keywords and podcast show titles, select Search . To display the available episod es from the selected podcast, open the Podcasts folder and select Open . To download the selected episode, select Download . To play the downloaded episode, select Play . To update the selected podcast or ma rked podcasts, for a new episode, select Options > Update . To open the web site of the po dc ast (network service), select Options > Open web pag e . Some podcasts provide the opportunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, select Options > View comments . Directories Select Directories . Directories help you find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 74
Contents of the directories change. Select the desired directory folder to update it (network service). The colour of the folder changes, when the update is complete. To subscribe to a podcast, s croll to the podcast title and select Update . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, a nd play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new directory or folder, select Option s > New > Web directory or Fo lder . Select a title, URL of the .opml (outline processor markup language) file, and Done . To import an .opml file st ored on your device, select Options > Import OPML file . To save a received .opml file, open the file to save the file into the Received folder in Directories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to your podcasts. Search podcasts Search helps you find podcasts by keyword or title. The search engine us es the podcast search serv ice you set up in Podcasti ng > Options > Settings > Connecti on > Search service U RL . To search for podcasts, select Search , and enter th e desired keywords. Tip: Search looks for podcast titles and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. General topics, such as football or hip-hop, usually give be tter results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to selected ch annels and add them to your podcasts, select Subscrib e . To start a new search, select Options > New search . To see the details of a podcast, select Options > Description . Podcasting settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connection . To edit the download settings, select Options > Settings > Download . To restore the default settings, open the corresponding settings and select Op tions > Restore default . Music player Select Menu > Media > Music player . Music player supports files formats such as AAC , AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily s upport all features of a file format or a ll the variations of file formats. You can transfer music from other compatible devices to your device. See "Transfer music fr om a computer" , p. 76 . Play a song or a podcast episode To add all available songs and podcasts to the music library, select Option s > Refresh . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 75
To play a song or a podcast episode, select Music or Podcasts and the desired category, then scroll to the song or podcast episode and press the scroll key. To adjust the volume, scroll up or down. To pause playba ck, press the scroll key; to resume , press the scroll key again. To stop playback, scroll down. To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To go to the next item, scroll right. To return to the beginn ing of the item, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 seconds after a song or podcast has sta rted. To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key. Playlists To view and manage play lists, select Music > Playlist s . To create a new playlist, s elect Option s > Create playlist . To add songs to the playlist, se lect the song and Options > Add to a playlist > Saved playlist or New p laylist . To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you wan t to move, and select Options > Reorder list . Nokia Music Store Select Menu > Media > Music store . In the Nokia Music Store (network service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to you r device. To purchase music, you need to register for the service. To check the Nokia Music Store availability in your country, visit mus ic.nokia.com. To find more music in the different categories, select Options > Find in Music store . To select the access point to u se with the Music Store, select Default acc. pt. . Transfer music from a computer You can use the followi ng methods to tran sfer music: ⢠To install Nokia Ovi Player t o manage and organise you r music files, download the PC software from www.ovi.com, and follow th e instructions. ⢠To view your device on a computer as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, ma ke the connection with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are usin g a USB data cable, select Mass storage as the connection mode. ⢠To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect a compatible USB da ta cable, and select Media transfer as the connection mode. To change the default USB connection mode, select Menu > Connectivity > USB and USB connection mode . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 76
Preset frequency settings Select Menu > Media > Music player > Options > Go to Now playing > Options > Equaliser . To use a preset frequency sett i ng when playin g music, select the frequency setting you wa nt to use, and se lect Opt ions > Activate . To modify the frequency of a pres et setting, select Options > Edit , select a frequency band, and scro ll up or down to increase or decrease its value. You hear your frequency adjustment immediat ely in the playback. To reset the frequency ba nds to their original values, select Options > Reset to defau lts . To create your own frequency set ting, select Opt ions > New preset . Enter a name for the frequency setting. S croll up or down to move between the frequency bands and set the frequency on each band. Share online Select Menu > Media > Share online . You can share im ages and vide o clips in compatible online albums, blogs, or in other comp atible online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, a nd view the content of the albums. The supported conte nt types may vary depending on the service provider. To share files online, you must have an account with an on line image sharing service. You can us ually subscrib e to such a service on the web page of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. Share images online To upload a file from Gallery to the online service, select Menu > Gallery , select the desired file and Options > Send > Post t o web . Recorder Select Menu > Media > Recorder . With Recorder, you can record up to 60 minutes of a voice memo, save the voice re cording as a sound c lip, and play the sound clip. Recorder suppor ts the AMR file format. You can also press the voic e key to open the Recorder application. If you have logged in to push to talk, t he voice key works as a push-to-talk key an d does not open Recorder. Record a sound clip To record a sound clip, select Options > Record sound clip . Select Pause to pause the recording, and Record to resume recording. When you finish recording, select Stop . The sound clip is automatically saved to the Sound clips folder in Gallery. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 77
Play a recording To listen to the sound clip that you just recorded, select Play . The progress bar displays th e playing time, p osition, and length of the clip. Select St op to cancel the playback. To pause the playback of a recorded clip, select Pause . Playback resumes when you select Play . Recorder settings Recordings are automatically saved to the device memory unless you change the default location. Recordings that you create or receive after you chan ge th e settings are affected. To change the defaul t location of saved recordings, select Options > Settings > Memory in use . To define the recording quality, select Options > Settings > Recording quali ty . If you select High , the sound clip you record is in waveform file format (.wav) and the maximu m length for the clip is 60 minutes. If you select MMS compatible , the sound clip you record is in adaptive multirate file format (.amr), and the maximum length for the clip is one minute. Gallery Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Use Gallery to access and us e different types of media, including images, videos, mu sic, and sounds. All viewed images and videos, and all re ceived music and so unds are automatically saved to Gallery. Sound clips are opened in the Music player, and video clips and streaming lin ks in the RealPlayer application. Im ages are opened in the image viewer. Work with media files and folders To open a file or a folder, select the file or folder. To create a new folder, select a file and Options > Organise > New folder . You cannot create folders within folders. To copy or move files, select a file and Optio ns > Organise > Move to folder , New folder , Move to memory card , Copy to memory card , Copy to phone me m. , or Move to phone mem. . To download files into Galle ry using the browser, select Downl. graphics , Downld. videos , or Downld. sounds . The browser opens, and you can choose a bookmark or enter the address for the download site. To search for a file, select Options > Find . Write the item you are searching fo r. Files that matc h the search are displayed. View images To open an image for viewing, select Options > Open . To open the next or previous image for viewing, scroll right or left. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 78
To enlarge the image on the disp lay, select Options > Zoom in . To reduce the image on the display, select Zoom out . To view the image in full screen size, select Options > Full screen . To return to normal view, select Options > Norm al screen . To rotate the image, select Options > Rotate . Select Right to rotate the image clockwise by 90 degrees, or select Left to rotate the image counterclockwise by 90 degrees. Manage image files To view detailed informat ion about the image, select Options > View details . To send the image, select Options > Send , and the method for sending. To rename the image , select Options > Rename . To set the image as the displa y background, select Op tions > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To add the image to a contact, se lect Options > Use image > Assign to contact . The Contacts applicati on opens, and you can select the contact for the i mage. RealPlayer Select Menu > Media > Real Playe r . RealPlayer plays video clips an d audio files that are stored in the device memory or on a memory card, transferred to your device from an e-mail message or a compatible computer, or streamed to your device over the web. Supported formats include MPEG-4, MP4 (not streaming), 3GP, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. RealPlayer does not nece ssarily support all variations of a media file format. Play video clips and stream links To play a video clip or audio file, select Options > Open > Most recent clips to play one of the six clips you most recently played, or Saved clip to play a clip or open a web link. Select Pl ay . To play streaming medi a, select a web link th at points to a clip, and select Play ; or connect to the web, browse to a video clip or audio file, and select Play . RealPlayer recognises two kinds of links: an rtsp:// URL and an http:// URL that points to a RAM file. Before the content begins streaming, your device must connect to a web si te and buffer the content. If a network connection problem causes a playback error, RealPlayer attempts aut omatically to reconnect to t he internet access point. To adjust the volume during playback, scroll right or left. To fast-forward during play back, scroll up and hold. To rewind during play, scroll down and hold. To stop the playback or streaming, select Stop . Buffering or connecting to the streami ng site stops, the pla yback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the beginning. To download video clips from the web, select Option s > Download videos . To view the video clip in full-screen size, select Options > Play in full scre en . Full screen increases the size of the video é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 79
to cover the maximum video area possible while the aspect ratio is maintained. Send audio files and video clips To transfer a media clip to a compatible device, select Options > Send . Select the sending method. To send a media clip insi de a message, create a multi media message, select a clip to att ach and Insert o bject > Video clip or Sound clip . View information about a media clip To view the properties of a video c lip, audio file, or web link, select Options > C lip details . Information may include for example the bit rate or the intern et link of a streaming file. To set on file protection for a media clip, select Options > Clip details > Status > Options > Change . File protection prevents others from changing a file. RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a message from yo ur service provider. To define the settin gs manually, select Opt ions > Settings > Video or Streamin g . Flash player Select Menu > Media > Flash Player . With Flash player, you can view, play, and int eract with flash files made for mobile devices. Manage flash files To optimise the use of Flash Pl ayer, insert a memory card in your device. To play a flash file, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To send a flash file to co mpatible devices, select Options > Send . Copyright protection ma y prevent the sending of s ome flash files. To switch between fla sh files saved on your device memory or memory card, scroll to the corresponding tabs. To change the flash fi le quality, select Option s > Qual ity when you are playing the flash file. If you select High , the playback of some flash files ma y appear uneven and slow due to their original settings. Chan ge the quality setting of such files to Normal or Low for improved playback. To organise your flash files, select Options > Organise . Radio Select Menu > Media > Radio . The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 80
The FM radio depends on an antenn a other than the wireless device antenna. At tach a compatible headset or enhancement to the device for th e FM radio to function properly. Listen to the radio To search for a station, s elect or . To set the frequency manually, select Options > Manual tuning . To view available stati ons based on location, select Options > Station directory (network service). To save the current s tation to your station list, select Options > Save station . To select a previousl y saved radio station, select or . To adjust the volume, scroll left or right. To switch from headset use to listening to the radio through the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loud speaker . To return to the home screen and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Option s > Play in background . View visual content To check availability a nd costs, and to subscribe to the service, contact your service provider. Before you can view visual content, you must have an in ternet access point defined at Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . 1. To view available visual content for a tuned station, select Options > Start visual service . If the visual radio service ID has not been saved for the station, enter it, or select Retrieve to s e a r c h f o r i t i n t h e station directory (network service). 2. Select the location neares t to you from the station directory. If your device finds a station that matches the tuned frequency, its visual service ID is displayed. To view the visual content, select OK . Saved stations To open the list of your save d stations, select Options > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Opti ons > Station > Listen . To view available visual conten t for a station with the V isual Radio service, select Options > St ation > Start visual service . To change the station details, select Optio ns > Station > Edit . Radio settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Start-up tone â Select whether a tone is played when the application is started. ⢠Auto-start se rvice â S el e c t Yes t o ha v e t he V is u al R ad io service star t automa tically when y ou select a sa ved station that offers the Vi sual Radio service. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 81
⢠Access point â Select the access point used for the data connection. You do not need an access p oint to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. Internet radio Select Menu > Media > Internet radio . Listen to internet radio stations Warning: Listen to musi c at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume m ay damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ea r when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To listen to a radio station on the internet, select a station from the station directory, sear ch stations by their name from the Nokia Internet Radio service, or select Options > Add station manually . When you have found the correct station, select Listen . To stop the playback, press th e scroll key. To resume the playback, press the scroll key aga in. To adjust the volume, keep the function key pressed down and scroll up or down. To view station information, select Options > Station informati on (not available if you have saved the station manually). If you are listening to a station saved in your favourites, scroll left or right to listen to the previou s or next saved station. Tip: You can browse for station links with the Web application. Comp atible links are automatically opened in the Internet radio application. Search for station s To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by their name, select Search . Enter a station name or the first letters of it in th e search field, and select Search . To listen to the station , select Listen . To save the station to your favourites , select Opti ons > Add to Favourites . To make another search, select Options > Search again . Save stations To view and listen to your fa vourite stations, sele ct Favourit es . To add a station ma nually to favourites, select Options > Add station manually . Enter the web address of the station and a name that you want to ap pear in the favourites list. To add the currently playing station to favourites, select Options > Add to Favourit es . To view station information, to move a station up or down in the list, or to delete a st ation from the fa vo urites, select Options > Station and the desired option. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 82
To view only stations beginning with p articular letters or numbers, start entering the ch aracters. M atching station s are displayed. Internet radio settings To select the default access point to connect to th e network, select Options > Settings > Default access point . Select Always ask if you want the device to ask for the access point every time you open the application. To change the con nection speed for GPRS packet data connections, select Options > Settings > GPRS connection bitrate . To change the con nection speed for 3G packet data connections, select Options > Settings > 3G connection bitrate . To change the connection speed for WLAN connections, select Options > Settings > Wi-Fi connection bitrat e . The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the selected connection speed. The higher the speed, the better the quality. To avoid buffering, us e the highest qu ality only with high speed connections. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 83
Personalisation You can personalis e your devi ce by adjusting the various tones, background im ages, an d screen s avers, for example. Profiles Select Menu > Tools > Profiles . You can adjust and customise th e ringing tones, alert tones, and other device tones for diffe rent events, environments, or caller groups. The profile currently in use is shown at the top of the display on the home sc reen. However, if the active profile is General, only today's date is shown. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new , an d define the settings. To customise a profile, select a profile and Optio ns > Personalise . To change a profile, select a profile and Options > Activate .The Offline profile pr events your device from accidentally switching on, send ing or receiving messages, or using wireless LAN, Bluetooth, or FM radio; it also closes any internet connection that ma y be in operation when the profile is selected. The Offline profile does not prevent you from establishing a wireless LAN or Bluetooth connection at a later time, or from restarti ng the FM radio, so com ply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using these features. To delete a profile that you created, select Options > Delete profile . You cannot delete the predefined profiles. Select ringing tones To set a ringing tone for a profile, select Options > Personalis e > Ringing ton e . Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmark s for downloading tones using the browser. Any downloaded tones are saved to Gallery. To play the ringing tone for a selected con tact group only, select Option s > Personali se > Alert for , and select the desired group. Phone calls comi ng from outside that group have a silent alert. To change the message ton e, select Options > Personalis e > Message alert tone . Customise profiles Select Options > Personali se , and define the following: ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for download ing tones using the browser. If you ha ve two alternate phone li nes in use, you can specify a ringin g tone for each line. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 84
⢠Video call tone â Select a r inging tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â When you select this option and someone from your contacts list calls you, the device sounds a ringi ng tone that is a combination of the spoken name of the contact and the selected ring ing tone. ⢠Ringing type â S elect how you want th e ringing tone to alert. ⢠Ringing volume â Select the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Select a tone for received e-mail messages. ⢠Vibrating alert â Set the device to vibrate when you receive a call. ⢠Keypad to nes â Set the volu me level of the device keypad t ones. ⢠Warning tones â Turn the warning tones on or off. This setting also affect s the tones of some ga mes and Java applications. ⢠Alert for â Set the device to ri ng only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a silent alert. ⢠Profile na me â You can give a name to a new profile or rename an existing profile. The General and Offline profiles cannot be renamed. Personalise the home screen Select Menu > Tools > Modes . T o c h a n g e t h e n a m e o f t h e current home screen, select Mode name . To select which applications and notifications you want to see on the home screen, select Home screen applications . To change the theme of the ho me screen currently in use, select Theme . To change the background image of the home screen currently in use, select Wallpaper . To change from one home screen to another, select Switch mode . Change the display theme Select Menu > Tools > Them es . To change the theme used in all applications, select the General folder. To change the theme used in the main menu, select the Menu view folder. To change the theme for a particul ar application, select the application-specific folder. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 85
To change the background image of the home screen, select the Wallpaper folder. To select an animation for the screen saver, select the Power saver folder. Download a theme To download a theme, select General or Menu view > Download themes . Enter the link from which you wan t to download your theme. Once the theme is downloaded, you can preview, activate, or edit it. To preview a theme, select Options > Preview . To start using the selected theme, select Options > Set . 3-D ringing tones Select Menu > Media > 3-D tones . To enable 3-D sound effects for ringing tones, select 3-D ringing tone effects > On . Not all ringing tones support 3â D effects. To change the 3âÂÂD effect th at is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To select the speed at which sound moves from one direction to another, select Trajectory sp eed . This setting is not available for all effects. To adjust the amount of echo, select Reverberation and the desired effect. To listen to the ringing to ne with the 3âÂÂD effect, select Options > Play tone . To adjust the volume of the ringing tone, select Menu > Tools > Profiles > Options > Personalise > Ringin g volume . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 86
Nokia Office Tools Nokia Office Tools su pport mobile business and enable effective communication with work teams. Active notes Select Menu > Office > Active note s . Active notes allows you to create, edit, and v iew different kinds of notes, for example, meeting memos, hobby notes, or shopping lists. You can in sert images, vi deos, and sound in the notes. You can link notes to other applications, such as Contacts, an d send notes to other s. Create and edit notes To create a note, st art writing. To edit a note, scroll to it, and p ress the scroll key. To insert images, sound clips, video, busin ess cards, web bookmarks, and files, select Options > Ins ert object . To add new item s to the note, select Options > Insert new . You can record sound and video clips, and capture images. To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press and hold the shift key and use the scroll key to select the tex t. Then select Options > Text . To send the note, select Opt ions > Send . To link a note to a conta ct, select Optio ns > Link note to call > Add contacts . You can see the note on the display of your device when making a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings for Active notes Select Sett ings . To save notes to your device memory, select Memory in use > Phone memory . To save them to a memory card, select Memory in use > Memory card . To change the layout of active notes, select Change view > Grid . To view the notes as a list, select Change view > List . To see a note in the backgrou nd when making or receiving phone calls, select Show note during call > Yes . Tip: If you temporarily do not want to see the notes during phone calls, select Show note during call > No . This way you do not have t o remove the links between notes an d contact car ds. Calculator Select Menu > Office > Calculator . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 87
This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, en te r the first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtr act from the function map. Enter the seco nd number of the calculation, and select = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered. The result of the calculation remains in the editor field and can be used as the first number of a new calculation. The device saves the result of the last calculation in its memory. Exiting the C alculator application or switching off the device does not clear the me mory. To recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application, select Options > Last result . To save the numbers or resu lts of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve the results of a ca lculation from the memory and use them in a calculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . File manager With File manage r, you can manage the con tents and properties of files and folder s on your device memory and memory card. You can open, create, move, copy, rename, send, and search for files and folders. Copyright protection may prevent sending some files. Open the device tab or the memory card tab. To select multiple files, sc roll to each file, and select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark . To send the selected files, select Option s > Send . To move or copy files or folders to another folder, select Options > Move to folder or Copy t o folder . Default folders such as Sound clips in Gallery cannot be moved. To search for files, select Options > Find . Enter the search text, and press the scroll key. The folders and files whose names contain the search te xt are displayed. To view information about the selected file, select Options > View details . To view additional in formation about the file online, select Options > Additi onal details . Quickoffice About Quickoffice Select Menu > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quickword for viewing M icrosoft Word documents, Quicksheet for viewing Microsoft Excel worksheets, Quickpoint fo r Microsoft PowerPoint presentations, and Quickman ag er for purchasing software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, 2003, a nd 2007 documents (DOC, XLS, an d PPT fi le formats) with Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. Not all file formats or features are supported. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 88
Converter Select Menu > Office > Converte r . The converter has limited accura cy, and rounding errors may occur. Convert measurements 1. Scroll to the Type field, and select Options > Conve rsion type to open a list of measur es. Select the measure to us e, and select OK . 2. Scroll to the first Unit field, and select Options > Select unit . Select the unit from which to convert, and select OK . Scroll to th e next Unit field, and select the unit to which to convert. 3. Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Set base currency and exchange rate When you change base currency, you must enter new exchange rates because all previously set exchange rates a re cleared. Before you can make currency conversions, you must choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency determines the conversion rates of the other currencies. 1. To set the rate of exchange for the unit of currency, scroll to the Type field, and select Options > Currency rates . 2. Scroll to the currency type and enter the exchange rate you would like to set per single unit of currency. 3. To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Optio ns > Set as base currency . 4. Select Done > Yes to save the ch anges. After you have inserted all the necessa ry exchange rates, you can make currency conversions. Zip manager With Zip manager, you can creat e new archive files to store compressed ZIP formatted file s; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archiv e password for protected archives; and change settings , such as comp ression level, and file name encoding. You can store the archive files on the device mem ory or on a memory card. PDF reader Select Menu > Office > Adobe PDF . With PDF reader you can read PDF documents on the display of your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 89
Printing You can print documents, such as files, messages, or web pages, from the device, preview a print job, define page layout options, select a printer, or print to a fi le. You may not be able to print all t ypes of document s. Print files To configure a p rinter for your devi ce, select Menu > Office > Printers > Options > Add . To set the printer as the default printer, select Options > Printing options > Printers , scroll to the printer and select Op tions > Set as default . B e f o r e y o u p r i n t , m a k e s u r e y o u r d e v i c e i s p r o p e r l y c o n n e c t e d to the printer . To print a document, select Opt ions > Printing options > Print . To print to a file, select Options > Printing options > Print > Print to file , and d etermine the lo cation for the file. To change the prin ti ng options, select Options > Printi ng options . You can select the printer you want to use, the number of copies and the rang e of pages you want to pr int. To change the page layout before printing, select Options > Printing options > Page setup . You can chan ge th e paper size and orientation, define the margins , and insert a header or a footer. The maximum len gth of the header and footer is 128 characters. To preview a file or message before you print, select Options > Printing op tions > Prev iew . Printing options Open a document, such as a file or message, and select Options > Printing op tions > Print . Define the following: ⢠Printer â Select an availabl e printer from the list. ⢠Print â Select All pages , Ev en pages , or Odd pages as the print range. ⢠Print range â Select Al l pages in range or Defined pages as the page range. ⢠Number of copi es â Select the number of copies to print. ⢠Print to file â Print to a file, and define the location for the file. The available options ma y vary. Printer settings Select Menu > Office > Printers . To add a new printer, select Option s > Add . Define the following: ⢠Printer â Enter a name for the printer. ⢠Driver â Select a driver for the printer . ⢠Bearer â Select a bearer for the printer. ⢠Orientation â Select the orientation. ⢠Paper size â Select the paper size. ⢠Media type â Select the media type. ⢠Colour mode â Select the co lour mode. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 90
⢠Printer mode l â Select the printer model. The available options may vary. Clock Select Menu > Office > Clock . In Clock, you can view your local time and time zone information, set and edit a larms, or modify date and ti me settings. Alarm clock Open the alarm clock tab. To set an alarm, select Options > New alarm . When an alarm is active, is displayed. To switch off the alarm, select Stop , or to stop the alarm for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is rea ched while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the ala rm tone. If you select Stop , the devic e asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch o ff the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless ph one use may cause interference or danger. To change the alarm time, select Opti ons > Reset alarm . To remove the alarm, select Op tions > Remove alarm . World clock Open the world clock tab to check the time in different cities. To add a city to the world clock view, select Option s > Add city . T o c h a n g e t h e c i t y t h a t d e t e r mi n e s t h e t i m e a n d d a t e i n y o u r device, select Options > Set as current city . T he city is displayed in the Clock main vi ew, and the time in your device is changed according to the city selected. Check th at the time is correct and matches your time zone. Clock settings Select Options > Settings . To change the time or date, select Tim e or Date . To change the clock shown on the home screen, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone network to u pdate the time, date, and time zone information to yo ur device (network service), select Network operator time > Auto-update . To change the alarm tone, select Clock alarm tone . Notes Select Menu > Office > Notes . You can create and send note s to other compatible devices, and save received plain text files (.txt format) to Notes. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 91
Write and se nd notes To write a no te, start enterin g the text. The note editor opens automatic ally. To open a note, scroll to it, a nd press the scroll key. To send a note to other co mpatible devices, select Options > Send . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Options > Synchronisation . Se lect Start to initialise synchronisation or Settings to define the synchronisation settings for the note. Nokia Wireless Keyboard Wireless keyboards are availabl e as separate enhancements. To set up the Nokia Wireless Key board or other compatible wireless keyboard supporting the Bluetooth Human Interface Devices (HID) profile for us e with your device, use the Wireless keyboard application. 1. Activate Bluetoo th connectivity on your device: select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > On . Make sure that you have set My phone's visibility > Shown to all . 2. Switch on the keyboard. 3. Select Menu > Office > Wlss. keybd. . 4. To start searchi ng for devices with B luetooth connectivity, select Options > Find keyboard . 5. Select the keyboard from th e list, and press the s croll key to start the connection. 6. To pair the keyboard with your device, enter a passcode of your choice (1 to 9 digits) on the device a nd the same passcode on your keyboard. 7. If you are asked for a keyboard layout, select it from a list on your device. When the name of th e keyboard appears, it s status changes to Ke yboard connected , and the indicator of your keyboard blinks slowly; the keyboard is ready for use. For details on the operation and maintenance of your keyboard, see its user guide. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 92
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet, a corporate intranet, or to another device or computer. PC connections You can use your mo bile device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data communicat ions applications. With Nokia Ovi Suite you can, for exam ple, transfer files and images between your device and a comp atible computer. To use Ovi Suite with USB connection mode, select PC Su ite . For more information about Ov i Suite, see the support area at www.ovi.com. Data cable To avoid dama ging the m emory card, d o not remo ve the data cable in the middle of a data transfer. Transfer data between your device and a PC 1. Insert a memory card to your device, and connect the device to a compatible PC with the USB data cable. 2. When the device asks which mode is used, select Mass storage . In this mode, you can see your device as a removable hard drive in your computer. 3. Close the connection from the computer ( for example, from an Unplug or Eject Hard ware wizard in Wi ndows) to avoid damaging the memory ca rd. To use Nokia Ovi Suite with your device, install Nokia Ovi Suite on your PC, connect the data ca ble, and select PC Suite . To use your device to connect yo ur PC to the web, connect th e data cable, and select Connect P C to web . To synchronise the music in your device with Ovi Player, install the Ovi Player software on your PC, connect the data cable, and select Media transfer . To change the USB mode you norma lly use with the data cable, select Menu > Connectivity > USB > USB connecti on mode and the desired option. To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the USB data cable to the device, select Menu > Connectivity > USB > As k on conne ction > Yes . Bluetooth Select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth . About Bluetooth Bluetooth technology in your device enables wireless connections between electronic devices within a range of 10 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 93
metres (33 feet). A Bluetooth connection can be used to send images, videos, tex t, business cards, calendar not es, or to connect wirelessly to devices that use Bluetooth techn ology. Since devices using B luetooth technology communicate using radio waves, your device an d the other devices do not need to be in direct line-of- sight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 10 me tres of each other, although the connection can be subj ect to interfer ence from obstructions such as walls or other electronic devices. Several Bluetooth conn ections ca n be active at a ti me. For example, if your device is connected to a headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible dev ice at the same time. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the following pr ofiles: Dial-Up Networking, Object Push, File Transfer, Han dsfree, Headset, Ba sic Imaging, Remote SIM Access, Stereo Au dio streaming, Generic Audio/ Video Distribution, Audio/Video Remote Control, and Advanced Audio Distribution. To ensure interoperability between other devices s upporting Bluet ooth technology, use Nokia approved accessories for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other de vices to determine their compatibility wi th this device. Features using Bluetooth techno logy increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Send and receive data with Bluetooth 1. When you activate Bluetooth for the first time, you are asked to give a name to your device. Give your device a unique name to ma ke it easy to recognise if there are several Bluetooth d evices nearby. 2. Select Bluetooth > On . 3. Select My phone's visibility > Shown t o all or Define period . If y ou select Define perio d , you need to define the time during which your device is visible to others. Your device and the name you en tered can now be seen by other users with devices using Bluetooth technology. 4. Open the application where th e item yo u want to send is stored. 5. Select the item and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . The device searches for ot her devices using Bluetooth technology within range and lists them. Tip: If you have sent da ta using Bluetooth before, a list of the previous search results is displayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 6. Select the device with which you want to connect. If t he other de vice re quires pa iring before data can be transmitted, you ar e asked to enter a passcode. When the connection ha s been established, Sending data is shown. The Sent folder in the Messag ing application does not store messages sent using B luetooth connectivity. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 94
To receive data using Bluetooth, select Bluetooth > On and My phone's visib ility > Shown to all to receive data from a non-paired device or Hidd en to receive data from a paired device only. When you receive data through Bluetooth, depending on the settings of an active profile, a tone sounds, and you are asked if y ou want to accept the message in which the data is inclu ded. If you ac cept, the message is placed in the Inbox folder in th e Messaging application. Tip: You can access the files in the device or on the memory card using a co mpatible acces sory that supports the File Transfer Profile Client service (for example, a laptop computer). A Bluetooth connection is disc onnected automatically after sending or receiving data. Only Nokia PC Suite and some enhancements such as headse ts may maintain a connection even if not actively used. Pair devices Open the paired devices tab. Before pairing, decide on your own passcode (1-16 digits), and agree with the user of th e other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a fixed passcode. Y ou need th e passco de o n l y w he n y o u c o n n ec t t h e devices for the first time. After pairing, it is possible to authorise the connection. Pa iring and authorising the connection makes connecting quicker and easi er, as you do not have to accept the connec tion between paired devices every time you establish a connection. The passcode for remote SIM a ccess must have 16 digi ts. 1. Select Options > New paired device . The device starts to search for Bluetooth device s within range. If you have sent data using Bluetooth befo re, a list of the previous search results is di splayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 2. Select the device with which you want to pair, and enter the passcode. The same passco de must be entered to the other device as well. 3. Select Yes to make the connection between your device and the other device automatic, or No to confirm the connection manually every time a connection attempt is made. After pairing, the devi ce is saved to th e paired devices page. To give a nickname to the paired device, select Options > Assign short name . The nickname is on ly displayed in your device. To delete a pairing, select the device whose pairing you want to delete and Options > Delete . To delete all pairings, select Options > Delete all . I f you are currently connected to a device and cancel the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately, and th e connection is ended. To allow a paired device to connect automati cally to your device, select Set as authorised . Connections between your device and the other device can be made with out your knowledge. No separate acce ptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or comput er, or devices that belong to someone you trust. If you want to accept connection requests from the other device sepa rately every time, select Set as unauthorised . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 95
To use a Bluetooth audio enha ncement such as a Bluetooth handsfree or headset, you need to pair your device with the enhancement. See the enhancement us er guide for the passcode and further instructio ns. To connect to the aud io enhancement, switch on th e enhancement. Some audio enhancements connect au tomatically to your device. Otherwise open the paired devices tab, scroll to the enhancement, and select Options > Connect to audio device . Security tips When you ar e not using Bluetooth connect ivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidde n . Do not pair with an unknown device. SIM access profile With the SIM access profile, you can access the SIM card of your device fr om a comp atible car kit device. This way, you do not need a separate SIM card to access SIM card data and connect to the GSM network. To use the SIM access profile, you need the following: ⢠Compatible car kit device that supp orts Bluetooth wire less technology ⢠Valid SIM card in your device When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible conn ected accessory, s uch as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this mode. To make calls, you must first leave the remote SIM mode. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. For more information about car kit devices and compatibility with your device, see the Nokia web site and your car kit user guide. Use the SIM access profile 1. Select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Re mote SIM mode > On . 2. Activate Bluetooth in the car kit. 3. Use your car kit to start a search for compatible devices. For instructions, see the us er guide of your car kit. 4. Select your device from the list of compatible devices. 5. To pair the devices, ente r the Bluetooth passcode shown on the display of the car kit to your device. Tip: If you have already accessed the SIM card from the car kit with the act ive user prof ile, the car kit searc hes automatically for a device with the SIM card. I f it finds your device, and automatic authorisation is activated, the car kit auto matically con nects to the GSM network when you switch on the car ignit ion. When you activate the remote SIM access profi le, you can use applications on your device that do not need network or SIM services. To make connections between yo ur device and the car kit without sep arate acceptance or authorisation, select Menu > é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 96
Connectivity > Bluet ooth , and open the paired devices tab. Scroll to the car kit, press the scroll key, and enter the Bluetooth passcode. When the device asks to make the connection automatic, select Yes . If you select No , connection requests from this car kit must be accepted separately every time. To end the remote SIM access connection from your device, select Menu > Connectivity > Blueto oth > Remote SIM mode > Off . Wireless LAN Note: Using WLAN may be restricted in some countries. For example, in France, you are only allowed to use WLAN indoors. For more information, contact your local authorities. Your device can detect and co nnect to a wireless local area network (WLAN). To use a WL AN, a network must be available in the location and your devi ce must b e connected to it. WLAN connectio ns Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryp tion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. To use WLAN, you must crea te an internet access point in a WLAN. Use the access point for a pplications that need t o connect to the internet. A WLAN connection is es tablished when you create a data connection using a WLAN access point. The active WLAN connec tion is ended when you end the data connection. Y ou ca n also end the connection manually. See "Connection manager" , p. 99 . You can use WLAN du ring a voice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the Offli ne profile, you can still use WLAN, if availa ble. Remember to com ply with any ap plicable safety requirements when es tablishing and using a WLAN connection. If you move the device to another locat ion within the WLAN and out of range of a WLAN access point, the roaming functionality can automatica lly connect your device t o another access point that be longs to the same WLAN. As long as you remain within range of access points th at belong to the same network, your device can stay connected to the network. Tip: To check the unique media access control (M AC) address that identifies your device, for ex ample to configure the MAC address of your device to a WLAN router, enter *#62209526# on the device keypad. The MAC address is shown on the device display. See WLAN availability To have your device show WLAN availability, select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Connecti on > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability . If WLAN is available, is shown on the display. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 97
Tip: You can also scan fo r networks in range. WLAN wizard Select Menu > Connectivity > WLAN w iz. . The WLAN wizard helps you find an d connect to a wireless LAN. When you open the a pplication, your dev ice starts to scan for available WLANs and lists them. To update the list of available WL ANs, select Options > Refresh . To mark up WLANs in the list of found networks, select Filt er WLAN networks . The selected network s are filtered out the next time the app lication se arches for wireless LANs. To start or continue browsing the web using the access point of the WLAN, scroll to the desired network, an d select Options > Start web browsing or Cont.web browsing . To disconnect the active connection to t he WLAN, select Options > Disconnect WLAN . To view the details of the WLAN, select Options > Details . To save the acce ss point of the WLAN , select Options > Define access point . Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryp tion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. Use the wizard on the home screen On the home screen, the WLAN wizard shows the status of your WLAN connections and network searches. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and press the scroll key. Dependin g on the status, you ca n start the web browser using a WLAN connection, connect to your net call service, disconnect from a WLAN, search for WLANs, or set the network scanning on or off. If WLAN scanning is off and you a re not connected to any WLAN, WLAN scanning of f is displayed on the home screen. To set scanning on and search for available WLANs, scroll to the row showing the status, and press the scr oll key. To start a search for available WLANs, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll key, and select Search for WLAN . To set WLAN scanning off, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll key, and select Switch WLAN scan off . When Start w eb browsing or Use fo r is selected, the WLAN wizard automatically creates an access point for the selected WLAN. The access point can also be used with other applications requiring WLAN connection. If you select a secured WLAN, you are asked to enter the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct service set identifier (SSID). é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 98
To use the found WLAN for a ne t call connection, scroll to the row showing the status, and pr ess the scroll key. Select Use for , the desired net call service, and the WLAN to be used. Connection manager Select Menu > Connectivity > Co nn. mgr. . View and end active connections To see the open data connections, select Active d ata connections . To view detailed information about network connections, select a connection from the list and Options > Det ails . The type of information shown depe nds on the connection type. To end the selected netw ork connection, select Optio ns > Disconnect . To end all active network conn ections simultaneously, select Options > Disconnect all . Search for WLAN To search for WLANs availa ble within range, s elect Available WLAN networks . The available WLANs are listed with their network mode (infrastructure or ad-hoc), signal strength, and network encryption indica tors, and whether your device has an active connection with th e network. To view the details of a networ k, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To create an internet a ccess point for a network, select Options > Define access point . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 99
Security and data management Manage the data and software on your device, and take ca re of the security of the device and its contents. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one appl ication with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. Lock the device To prevent access to the conten ts of your device, lock the device when in home screen. Press the power key, select Lock phone , and enter your lock code. The default lock co de is 12345. To unlock, press the left selection key, enter your lock code, and press the scroll key. To change the lock code, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM card > Lock code . Enter the old code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphab ets and digits can be used, and both up percase and lowercase alphabet s are possible. You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text message to the device. To enable remote locking and to define the text for the message, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM ca rd > Allow remote l ock > Yes . Enter the remote lock message and confirm the message. Th e message must be at least 5 characters long. Memory There are two types of memory into which you can save data or install applications: devi ce memory and memory card. Free memory To see how much memory is currently in use, how much free memory remains, and how much memory is consumed by each data type , select Menu > Options > Memory details > Pho ne memory or Memory card . Tip: To ensure that you have adequate memory, transfer data regu larly to a memory c ard or computer, or use File manager to delete files you no longer need. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.si s, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To mainta in s ufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message at tachment, delete the message from the Messaging inbox. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 100
Memory card Select Menu > Tools > Memory . If you cannot use a memory card in your device , you may have the wrong type of memory card, the card may not be formatted for your device, or the card has a corrupted file system. You r Nokia device sup ports the FAT16 and FAT3 2 file system for memory cards. MicroSDHC This device uses microSD and microSDHC memory cards. To ensure interoperability, use only compatible memory cards with th is device. Check the compatibility of a memory card w ith its manufacturer or provider. Other memory cards than microSD and microSDHC cards are not comp atible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card may damage the memory card as well as the device, an d data stored on th e incompatible card may be corrupted. Use a memory card To format a memory card for your device, select Option s > Format memory card . When a memory card is formatted, all data on the ca rd is lost permanently. Consu lt your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card before you can use it. To change the name of the memory card, select Options > Memory card name . Memory card security Select Menu > Tools > Memory . You can protect a memory card with a password to prevent unauthorised access. To set a password, sele ct Optio ns > Set password . The password can be u p to 8 characters long and is case-sensitive . The password is stored i n your device. You do not need to enter it again while you use the memory card on the same device. If you use the memory card on another device, you a re asked for the password. Not all memory cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, select Options > Remove pass word . When you remove the password, the data on the memory card is not protected against unauthorised use. To open a locked memory card, select Options > Unloc k memory card . Enter the password. If you cannot recall the password to unlock a locked memory card, you may reformat the card , in which case the card is unlocked and password remove d. Formatting a memory card destroys all data stored on the card. Encryption Select Menu > Tools > Encryption . Encrypt your device or memory card to prevent outsiders from accessing your important information. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 101
Encrypt device memory or memory card To encrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To encrypt the memory card, select Memory card and from the following: ⢠Encrypt without savi ng key â Encrypt the memory card without saving the encryption key. If you select this option, you cannot use the me mory card in other devices, and if you restore factory setti ngs, you cannot decry pt the memory card. ⢠Encrypt and save key â Encrypt the memory card and save the key manually in th e default folder. For security, store the key to a safe place outside the device. For example, you can send the key to your computer. Enter a pass phrase for the key and a name for the key file. The pass phrase should be long and complex. ⢠Encrypt with restored key â Encrypt the memory card with a key you have received. S elect the key file, and enter the pass phrase. Decrypt device memory or memory card Always remember to decrypt th e device memory and/or the memory card before updating the device software. To decrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To decrypt the memory card without destroying the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt . To decrypt the memory card an d destroy the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt and turn off encrypti on . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling service, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dialling service. Contact your service provider for more information. 1. To restrict calls from your device, select Op tions > New SIM contact and enter the contact name and phone number to the list of numbers to which calls are allowed, or select Add from Cont acts to copy the conta ct from Contacts. To restrict calls by a country p refix, enter the country prefix in the list of numbers. All phone numbers to which calls are allowed must start with this country prefix. 2. Select Options > Activate fixed dialling . You need your PIN2 code to activ ate and deactivate fixed di alling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Conta ct your service provider if you do not have the code. To cancel the service, select Options > Deactivate fixe d dialling . Tip: To send text messages to the SIM contacts while the fixed dialling service is active, you need to add t he text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 102
Certificate manager Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Security > Certific ate manage ment . Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of software but do not guarantee safety. Th ere are four different types of certificates: authority certific ates, personal certificates, trusted site certificates, and devi ce certificates. During a secure connection, a server may send a server certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is ch ecked through an authority certificate stored in your device. You receive notification if the identity of the server is no t authentic or i f you do no t have the correct certificate in your device. You can download a certificate from a web site, or receive a certificate as a message. Certif icates s hould be used when you connect to an online b ank or a remote server to transfer confidential information. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viru ses or other malicious software, and to check the authenticity of software when you download and install software to your device. Tip: When you add a new certificat e, check its authenticity. View certificate details You can only be s ure of the co rrect identity of a server when the signature and the validity pe riod of a server certificate have been checked. To view certificate details, open a certificate folder, and select a certificate and Options > Certificate details . One of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate n ot trusted â You have not set any application to use the certi ficate. You may want to change the trust settings. ⢠Expire d certific ate â The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate n ot valid yet â The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Certificate trust settings Trusting a cert ificate means that you au thorise it to verify web pages, e-mail servers, software packages, and other data. Only trusted certific ates ca n be used to verify services and software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote co nnections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer an y protection by itself; the certificate manager must co ntain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted li fetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 103
Before changing any cert ificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the own er of the certificate an d that the certificate really belong s to th e listed owner. To change the trus t settings, select a certificate and Options > Trust sett ings . Select an application field and press the scroll key to select Yes or No . You cannot cha nge the trust settings of a personal certificate. Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that can use the certificate is displayed: ⢠Symbian installatio n â New Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet â E-mail and graphics. ⢠App. installat ion â New Java⢠application. ⢠Online certif. check â Online certificate status protocol. Security modules Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Security > Security module . View and edit security modules To view or edit a security mo dule, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information abou t a security module, select Options > Security detail s . To edit the PIN codes for the security module, select Module PIN to edit the PIN code for the security module or Signing PIN to edit the PIN code for digital signatures. You may not be able to change these co des for all security modules. The key store contains the cont ents of the security module. To delete the key store , select Key store , select the desired key store, and Options > Delete . Y ou may no t be able to delete the key store of all security modules. Back up data It is recommended to back up device memory regularly t o the memory card or a compatible computer. To back up information from the device memory to a memory card, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Options > Back up phone memory . To restore information from the memory card to the device memory, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Options > Restore from card . You can also connect your device to a compatible computer and use Nokia PC Suit e to bac k up data. Application manager Select Menu > Installation s > App. mgr. . You can install two types of ap plications and soft ware on your device: ⢠Applications and software specifically intended for your device or compatible with the Symbian operating system. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 104
These software ins tallation files have the extension .sis or .si sx. ⢠Java ME⢠applications comp atible with the Symbia n operating system. The Java a pplication installation file extensions are .jad or .jar. Installation files ma y be transferred to your device from a compatible comput er, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or with Bluetooth. During the installation, the devi ce checks the integrity of the package to be installed. The device shows information about the checks being carried out, and you are given options to continue or cancel the installation. If you install applications that require a network connection, note that the power consumption of your device may increase when you us e these applications. Tip: When browsing web pages, you can download a n installation file and install it immediately. Note, however, that the connection runs in the background during the installation. Install applications Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such a s applications that are Symbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified⢠testing. To download and install soft ware from the web, select Download apps. . Select the application an d Options > Install . To view the details of an installed software package, select the application and Opt ions > View details . To view the installation log, select Optio ns > View log . A list shows what software has be en installed and removed, and the date of the ins tallation or removal. If you encounter problems with the device after installing a software pa ckage, use this list to find out which software package may be the cause of the problem. The info rmation in this list may also help you pinpoint problems that are caused by software packages that are incomp atible with each other. To remove software, se lect Options > Remove . If you remove software, you can only reinstall it by using the original software package file, or by restoring a full backup that contains the removed software p ackage. If you remove a softwar e package, you m ay no longer be able to open files created with th at software. If another software package depends on the software packa ge that you removed, the other so ftware pa ckage ma y stop wo rking. Re fer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Installation settings To modify the installation settings, select Opt ions > Settings and from the following: ⢠Software ins tallation â Select to install signed applications only or all applications. ⢠Online certificate check â To check the validity of certificates when an ap plic ation is installed, select On. If validity cannot be verified, you are asked if you want to continue installation. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 105
⢠Default web address â The vali dity of a certificate is checked from the default addres s if the certificate does not include its own web address. To change the default address, select Default web addre ss , and enter the new address. Java security settings To specify security sett ings for a Java applicat ion, select Options > Settings . You can define which functions the Java application can access. The value that you ca n set for each functionality depends on the pro tection doma in of the software package. ⢠Access point â Select an access p oint that the application may use when making network connections. ⢠Network acc ess â Allow the application to create a data connection to the network. ⢠Messaging â Allow the app lication to send messages. ⢠Application auto-start â Allow the app lication to st art automatica lly. ⢠Connecti vity â Allow the applica tion to activate a data connection, such as a Bluetooth connection. ⢠Multimedia â Allow the appl ication to use the multimedia features of your device. ⢠Read user data â Allow the application to read your calendar entries, con tacts, or any o ther personal data. ⢠Edit user data â Allow the application to add personal data, such as ent ries to Contacts. ⢠Positio ning â Allow the applicati on to use the location data in you r device . ⢠Landma rks â Allow the ap plication to use the landmarks in your device. You can define how you are prom pted to confirm the Ja va application's access to the device functions. Select one of the following values: ⢠Ask every time â Require the Java a pplication to ask for your confirmation each time it uses the functionality. ⢠Ask first time â Require the Java application to ask for initial confirmation to use the functionality. ⢠Always allowed â Allow the Java applicati on to use the functionality without your confirmation. The securit y settings help protect your device ag ainst harmful Java applications that m ay use the functions of your device without your permis sion. Only select Always allowed if you know the supplier and trustworthiness of the application. ⢠Not allowed â Prevent the Java ap plication from using the functionality. Activation keys Select Menu > Tools > Actv. keys . Some media files, such as imag es, music, or video clips, are protected by digital usag e rights. The activati on keys for such files may allow or restrict their usage. For example, with some activation keys you may lis ten to a music track on ly a limited number of times. During one playback session you may rewind, fast-forward, or pause the track, bu t once you stop it, you have u sed on e of the instances allowed. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 106
Use activation keys Digital rights manag ement (DRM) protected content comes with an ass ociated activ ation key th at defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected cont ent, to back up both the activation keys a nd the content, use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Suite. If your device has WMDRM-protected c ontent, both the activation keys and the cont ent will be lost if the device memory is formatted. Y ou may also lose the activation keys and the content if the files on you r device get corrupted. Losing the activati on keys or the content may limi t your ability to use the sa me content on your device agai n. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activat ion keys ma y be connected to a speci fic SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view your activation keys by type, select Valid keys , Invalid keys , or Not in use . To view the key details, select Option s > Key deta ils . The following details are disp layed for each media file: ⢠Status â The status is Activation key is valid , Activation ke y expired , or A ctivation key not yet valid . ⢠Content se nding â Allowed means th at you can send the file to another device. Not allowed mean s that yo u cannot send the file to another device. ⢠Content in phone â Yes means that the file is in the device and the path of the file is displayed. No means that the related file is not currently in the device. To activate a key, go to the Activation keys main view, and select Invalid keys > Option s > Get act ivation key . Establish a network connect ion at the prompt, and you are directed to a web site where yo u can purchase rights to the media. To remove file rights, open the valid keys tab or the keys not in use tab, scroll to the desired file, and select Option s > Delete . If there are several rights related to the same media file, all the rights are deleted. The group key view displays all of the files related to a group right. If you have downloaded multiple media files with the same rights, they are all displa yed in this view. You can open the group view from either the va lid keys or invalid keys tabs. To access these files, open the group rights folder. Data synchronisation Select Menu > Tools > Sync . With Sync, you can synchronis e your contacts, calen dar entries, or notes with corresponding applications on a compatible computer or remote internet server. Your synchronisation settings ar e saved in a synchronisation profile. The Sync application uses SyncML techn ology for remote synchronisation. Fo r information on SyncML compatibility, contact the su pplie r of the applications with which you want to synchronis e your device. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 107
You may rec eive the sy nchronis ation settings as a message from your service provider. Th e available applications you ca n synchronise may vary. C ontact yo ur service provider for more information. Create a synchr o nisation profile There is a Nokia PC Suite sync hronisation profile available in your device. You d o not need to edit it if you synch ronise your device with a computer usin g Nokia PC Suite. To create a new profile, select Options > New sync profile and as sign a name fo r the profile, select the applications to synchronise with the profile, and specify the needed connection settings. Contact your service provider for details. Select applications to synchronise 1. To select the applications to synchronise with a synchronisation profile, select Options > Edit sync profile > Applications . 2. Select the desired application, and select Include i n sync > Yes . 3. Specify the Remote database and Synchronisation type settings. Synchronisation connection settings To define the connection settings of a new profile, select Options > New sync prof ile > Connection settings and define the following settings: ⢠Server ve rsion â Select the SyncM L version you can use with the remote server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the server ID of the remote server. This setting is only available if you select 1.2 a s the SyncML version. ⢠Data bearer â Select the data bearer to connect to the remote server duri ng synchronisation. ⢠Access point â Select the a ccess point to use for the synchronisation connection, or create a new access point. You can also choose to be as ked for the access point every time you start synchronising. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the server that contains the database with which you want to synchronise your device. ⢠Port â En ter the port nu mber of the remote dat abase server. ⢠User name â Enter your user name to identify your device to the server. ⢠Password â Enter your password to identify your device to the server. ⢠Allow sync requests â To allow synchronisation to start from the remote database server, select Yes . ⢠Accept all sync reque sts â To have your device ask for your confirmation before a ccepting synchronisation from the server, select No . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 108
⢠Network aut henticati on â To authenticate your device to the network before synchronisation, select Yes . Enter your network user name and network password. Mobile VPN Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > VPN . The Nokia mobile virtual privat e network (VPN) client creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, such as e- mail. Your device connects from a mobile network, through the intern et, to a corporate VP N gateway that acts as a front door to the compatible corp orate network. VPN client uses IP Security (IPSec) technology . IPSec is a framework of open standards for supporting secure exchange of data over IP networks. VPN policies define the method used by the VPN client and a VPN gateway to au thenticate each oth er, and the encryption algorithms that they use to help protect the confidentiali ty of data. Contact your compan y's IT department for a V PN policy. To install and configure the VPN client, certificates, and policies, contact the IT administra tor of your organisation . Manage VPN Select VPN management , and f rom the following: ⢠VPN policies â Install, view, an d update VPN policies. ⢠VPN policy servers â Edit the connection settings of VPN policy servers from which you can install and update VPN policies. A policy server refers to a Nokia Security Service Manager (NSSM), which is not necessarily required. ⢠VPN log â View the lo g for your VPN policy installations, updates and synchronisations, and other VPN connections. Create VPN access points An access point is where your phone connects to the network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to browse web pages you must first define inte rnet access points for these servic es. VPN ac cess p oints pair VPN p olicie s with re gular internet access points to create secure connections. Your service provider may preset some or all acces s points for your device, and you may not be ab le to create, edit, or remove them. Contact your company's IT department for the correct settings. Open a destination , select a VPN access point, select Edit , and define the following: ⢠Connection name â Enter a name for the VPN access point . ⢠VPN policy â Select the VPN poli cy to combine with the internet access point. ⢠Internet access point â Select the internet access point with which to combine the VPN policy to create secure connections for data trans fer. ⢠Proxy server ad dress â Enter the proxy ser ver address of the private network. ⢠Proxy port number â Enter the proxy port number. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 109
Use a VPN connection in an application You may have to prove your identity when you log on to the enterprise network. Contact your company's IT department for the credentials. To use a VPN connection in an application, the applicati on must be associated wit h a VPN access p oint. Tip: You can configure the application's connection setting to Always ask , in which case you select the VPN access point from a list of connections when a connection is established. 1. In the application in which you want to create a VPN connection, select a VPN acces s point as the access point. 2. If you are using legacy authentication, enter your VPN user name and passcode or password. I f the SecurID token has become out of synchronis ation with the clock of the ACE/Server, enter the next passcode. If y ou are using certificate-based authenti cation, you may have to en ter the key store password. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 110
Settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings . You can define a nd modify various setti ngs of your device. Modifying these settings affects the operation of your devi ce across sever al applications. Some settings may be preset fo r the device or sent to you in a special messag e by your se rvice provider. You may not be able to change such settings. Select the setting you want t o edit to do the following: ⢠Switch between two values , such as on or off. ⢠Select a value from a list. ⢠Open a text editor to enter a value. ⢠Open a slider to decrease or increase the value by scrolling left or right. General settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General . Select from the following: ⢠Personalisation â Change the display settings and personalise the device. ⢠Date and time â Change the date and time. ⢠Enhancemen t â Define the settings for your enhancements. ⢠Security â Define the s ecurity settings. ⢠Factory settings â R estore the original settings of the device. ⢠Positioni ng â Define the positioning method and server for GPS-based appl ications. Personalisation settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Personalisation . Display settings To define the level of light that the device needs before switching on the backlight, select Display > Light sensor . To change the text size, select Display > Fo nt size . To adjust the length of time th e display can be left idle before the screen saver is activat ed, select Display > Power saver time-out . To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select Display > Welcome note / logo . You can either choose the default welcome note, enter your own text, or select an image. To set how quickly the display di ms after the last keypres s, select Display > Light time-out . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 111
Standby mode settings To select whether to use the home screen, select Home screen > Home scre en . To change the home screen mode setti ngs, select Home screen > Mode se ttings . To assign shortcuts for the device key s, select Home screen > Key shortcuts . These shortcuts are not available in the home screen. Tone settings To select a ringing tone for voice calls, select Tones > Ringing tone . To select a ringing tone for video calls, select Tones > Video call tone . To set the ringing type, select Tones > Ringing typ e . You can also set the device to sound a ringing t one that is a combination of the spoken name of the caller and the selected ringing tone, when someone from your contacts list calls you. Select Tones > Say caller's name . To set the volume level of the ringing tone, select Tones > Ringing volume . To set the v arious alert tones, select To nes > Message al ert tone , E-mail alert tone , Calendar alarm tone , or Clock alarm tone . To set the device to vibrate when you receive a call, select Tones > Vibrating alert . To set the volume level of th e device keypad tones, select Tones > Keypad tones . To set the warning tones on or off, select Tones > Warning tones . Language settings To set the language used on the device display, se lect Langua ge > Pho ne langu age . To select the langua ge in which you write notes and messages, select Language > Writing language . To select whether to use the predic tive text i nput, selec t Langua ge > Pr edictive te xt . To define the settings for the predictive text in put, select Predicti ve text setti ngs . Notification light When you receive a message or miss a call, the scroll key starts blinking to indicate the even t. To set the length of time you want the scroll key to blink, select Notification light > Blink light for . To select of which events you want to be notified, select Notification light > Notified even ts . Settings for One-touch keys Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Personalisation > One-touch keys . To select which application an d task is opened when you press a One-touch key, select the key and Option s > Open . To restore the preset appl ications and tasks, sele ct Restore defaults . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 112
Date and time settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Date and time . To set the current date and time, select Date and Time . To define your time zone, select Time zone . To update the time, date, an d time zone information automatic ally (network ser vice), select Network operato r time > Auto-update . To select whether to us e the 12-hour or 24-hour clo ck system and with which symbol to sepa rate hours and min utes, select Time format and Time separator . To determine the date format and separator, select Date format and Date separat or . To define the clock type, s elect Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To select the tone for the alarm clock, s elect Clock alarm tone . To determine the week days that are work days for you, select Workdays . Enhancement settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Enhancement . Common enhancement settings With most en hanc ements, you can do the following: To determine which profile is activated when you attach an enhancement to your device, select the enhancement and Default profile . To let the device an swer phon e calls automatically after 5 seconds when an enhancem ent is atta ched, select Automatic answer > On . If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent in the selected profile, the automatic answer is disabled. To illuminate the device while it is attached t o an enhancement, select Lights > On . E-mail key settings To select which mail box to open with the e-mail key, select E-mail key settings > E-mail key , and press the scroll key. Security settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Security . Define the following security settings: ⢠Phone and SIM card â Adjust the security settin gs for your dev ice and S IM card. ⢠Certificate manageme nt â Manage your security certificates. ⢠Security modul e â Manage your security module. Avoid using codes that are si milar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks. When you change a cod e, enter the current code, then the new code twice. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 113
Device and SIM card security To change the PIN code, select Phone an d SIM card > PIN code . The new code must be 4 to 8 digits long. The PIN code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use and is provided with the SIM card. A f ter three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is bloc ked, and you need to use the PUK code to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. To set the keypad to lock automat ically after a defined period, select Phone and SIM card > Keypad autolock period . To set a time-out after which the device is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered, select Phone an d SIM card > Phone autol ock period . Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select Non e to set off the autolock period. When th e device is locked, you can still answer incoming calls, an d calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To set a new lock code, select Phone and SI M card > Lock code . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the current code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alp habets and digits can be used, and both uppercase and lowercase alphabets are poss ible. The device notifies you if the lock code is not properly formatted. Restore original settings To restore the original device settings, select Factory settings . To do this, you need your device lock code. After resetting, the device may take a longer time to power on. Documents, co ntact information , calendar entr ies, and files are unaffected. Telephone settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone . Select from the following: ⢠Call â Define general call settings. ⢠Call divert â Define your call divert settings. See "Call divert" , p. 36 . ⢠Call barring â D e f in e y o u r c a ll barring settings. See "Call barring" , p. 37 . ⢠Network â Adjust the network settings. Call settings To display your phone number to the person you a re calling, select Call > Send my caller ID > Yes . To let the network determine whether your ca ller ID is sent, select Set by network . To display your net call addres s to the person you are callin g using a net call, select Call > Send my internet call ID > Yes . To be notified of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress, select Call > Call waiting > Options > Activate . To check i f the function is active on th e network, select Option s > Check status . To select whether net calls alert or not, selec t Call > Internet call alert . You a re notified of mis sed net calls with a notification. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 114
To set the default call type, select Call > Default call type and select Vo ice cal l if you make a GSM calls, or Intern et call if you make net calls. To send a text message automa tically to the person who is calling you informing why y ou cannot answ er the incoming call, select Call > Reject call with SMS > Yes . To set the text for the message, se lect Call > Message text . Network settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Network . To select the network mode, select Network mode and Dual mode , UMTS , or GSM . In the dual mode, the device switches automatically betw een networks. Tip: UMTS enables faster data transfer, but may increase the demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. In regions close to both GSM and UMTS networks, selecting Dual mode may cause constant jumping between the two networks, which also increases the demand on battery power. To select the operator, select Operator sel ection and Manual to choose from availa ble networks, or Autom atic to have the device select the network automatically . To set the device to indicate wh en it is used in Micro Cellular Network (MCN), select Cell info di splay > On . Connection settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection . Select from the following: ⢠Bluetooth â Edit the Bluetooth settings. See "Send and receive data with Bluetooth" , p. 94 . ⢠USB â Edit th e data cable setti ngs. See "Data cable" , p. 93 . ⢠Access points â Set up new or edit existing ac cess points. S o m e o r al l a c c e s s p o i n t s m a y b e p r e s e t f o r y o u r d e v i c e b y your service provider, and you may not be able to crea te, edit, or remove them. ⢠Packet data â Determine when pa cket d ata connections are used, and enter the access point if you use your device as a modem fo r a computer. ⢠Wireless L AN â Determine if the device displays an indicator when a WLAN is available, and ho w often the device searches for networks. ⢠SIP settings â View or create session initiati on protocol (SIP) profiles. ⢠Internet tel. â Define settings for net calls. ⢠Configurations â View and delete trusted servers from which your device may rece ive configurat ion settings. ⢠APN control â Restrict packet data connections. See "Restrict packet data" , p. 120 . This option is only available when a USIM card that suppor ts this feature is inserted. Access points Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a data connect ion to the network. To use e-mail and mult imedia services or to browse é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 115
web pages, you must first defi ne access points for these services. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. To create a new access point, select Options > New access point o r s e l e c t a n e x i s t i n g a c c e s s p o i n t f r o m t h e l i s t a n d t h e n Options > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for the new one. Packet data (GPRS) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connectio n > Packet data . Your device su pports packet da ta connections, such as GPRS in the GSM network. When you are using your device in GSM and UMTS networks, it is poss ible to have multiple data connections active at the same time; a ccess points can share a data connection, and data connections remain active, for example, during voice calls. See "Connection manager" , p. 99 . To define the packet data settings, select Packet data connection and select When avail able to register the device to the packet data network wh en you switch the device on in a supported network, or When need ed to establish a packet data connect ion only when an application or action requires it. Select Access point and enter the access point name provided by your service provider to use the device as a packet data modem to your computer. These settings affect all a ccess points for packet data connections. WLAN settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Connection > Wireless LAN . To have an indicator disp layed when there is a WLAN available in your current location, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for available WLANs and update the indicator, select Scan for networks . This setting is not availa ble unless you select Show WLAN availability > Yes . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings . The advanced WLAN settings are norma lly defined automati cally, and changing them is not recommended. To edit the settings manually , select Automa tic configuration > Disabled , and define the following: ⢠Long retry limit â Enter the maximum number of transmission attempts if th e device does not receive a receiving acknowledgement signal from th e network. ⢠Short retry limit â Enter the maximum number of transmission attempts if th e device does not receive a clear-to-send signal from the network. ⢠RTS threshold â Sel e ct t he d at a pa c k et size at which the WLAN access point device issu es a request to send before sending the packet. ⢠TX power lev el â Select the power level of your device when sending data. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 116
⢠Radio measurem ents â Enable or disable the radio measurements. ⢠Power saving â Select whether to use the WLA N power saving mechanism to sa ve the power in the device bat tery. Using the power saving mech anism enhances the battery performance but may weaken WLAN interoperability. To restore all settings to their original values, select Options > Restore defaults . WLAN security settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points > Options > New access point , or select an access point and Opti ons > Edit . In the access point settings, select WLAN security mode and the desired mode. WEP security settings Select WEP as the WLAN security mode. The wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption method encrypts data before it is transmitted. A ccess to the network is denied to users who do not have the required WEP keys. When the WEP security mode is in use, and your device receives a data packet not encrypted with the WEP keys, the data is discarded. In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same WEP key. Select WLAN securit y settings and from the fo llowing: ⢠WEP key in use â Select the desired WEP key. ⢠Authentica tion type â Select Open or Shared . ⢠WEP key setti ngs â Edit the settings for the WEP key. WEP key settings In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the sa me WEP key. Select WLAN securi ty settings > WEP key settings and from the following: ⢠WEP encryption â Select the desired WEP encryption key length. ⢠WEP key form at â Select whether you want to enter t he WEP key data in ASCII or Hexadecimal format. ⢠WEP key â Enter the WEP key data. 802.1x security settings Select 802.1x as the WLAN security mode. 802.1x authenticates and authorises devices to access a wireless network, and prevents access if the authorisation process fails. Select WLAN securi ty settings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WP A2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â If you selecte d WPA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug-ins defined in your device t o use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shared key â I f you selecte d WPA/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connect. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 117
WPA security settings Select WPA/WPA2 as the WLAN security mode. Select WLAN securit y settings and from the fo llowing: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Sel ect EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â I f you select WPA/WP A2 > EAP , select which EAP pl ug-ins defined in you r device to use with the access point . ⢠Pre-shared key â I f you select WPA/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which y ou connect. ⢠WPA2 only mode â To allow both TKIP and AES (Advanced Encryption Stan dard) encryption, select Off . To allow AES only, select On Wireless LAN plugins Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . The EAP (extensible authentic ation protocol) plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authentication servers, and the different EAP plu g-ins make possible the use of various EAP metho ds (network service). You can view t he EAP plug-ins curr ently installed in your device (network service). EAP plug-ins 1. To define the EAP plug-in settings, select Op tions > New access point and define an access point that uses WLAN as a data bearer. 2. Select 802.1x or WPA/WPA2 as the securi ty mode. 3. Select WLAN security sett ings > WPA/WPA2 > EAP > EAP plug-in settings . Use EAP plug-ins To use an EAP plug-i n when you connect to a WL AN using th e access point, selec t the desired plug -in and Options > Enable . The EAP plug -ins enabled for us e with this access point have a check mark nex t to them. To not use a plug-i n, select Option s > Disable . To edit the EAP plug-in settings, select Options > Edit . To change the priority of th e EAP plug-in settings, select Options > Raise priorit y to attempt to use the plug-in before other plug-ins when co nnecting to the netw ork with the access point, or Options > Lower priority to use this plug-in for network authe ntication after attemp ting to use other plug- ins. See the device help for more information on EAP plugins. Session initiation protocol (SIP) settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Connection > SIP settings . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 118
Session initiation protocols (SIP) are used for creating, modifying, and terminati ng ce rtain types of communication sessions with one or more participants (network service). Typical communication session s are video sharing and net calls. SIP profiles include settin gs for these sessions. The SIP profile used by default fo r a communication session is underlined . To create a SIP profile, select Options > New SIP pr ofile > Use default profile or Us e existing profile . To select the SIP profile y ou want to use by defa ult for communication sessions, select Options > Default profile . Edit SIP profiles Select Options > Edit , and select from the following: ⢠Profile nam e â Enter a name for the SIP profile. ⢠Service profile â Select IETF or Noki a 3GPP . ⢠Default acces s point â Select the access poin t to use for the internet connection. ⢠Public user na me â Enter your user name received from your service provider. ⢠Use compr ession â Select if compression is used. ⢠Registration â S elect the registra tion mode . ⢠Use secur ity â Select if security negotiation is used. ⢠Proxy server â Enter the proxy server setti ngs for this SIP profile. ⢠Registrar server â Enter the registra tion server settings for this SIP profile. Edit SIP proxy servers Select Options > New SIP profile or Edit > Proxy server . Proxy servers are intermediate servers between a browsing service and its users use d by some service provider s. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Select from the following: ⢠Proxy server ad dress â Enter the host name or IP address of the proxy server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the proxy server realm. ⢠User name and Password â Enter your user name and password for the proxy server. ⢠Allow loose routin g â Select if loose routing is allowed. ⢠Transport ty pe â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the proxy server. Edit registration servers Select Options > New SIP profil e or Edit > Registrar server . Select from the following: ⢠Registrar server address â Enter the host name or IP address of the registrar server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the registrar server realm. ⢠User name and Password â Enter your user name and password for the registrar server. ⢠Transport ty pe â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the registrar server. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 119
Net call settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Internet te l. . To create a new net call profile, select Options > New profile . To edit an existing profile, select Options > Edit . Configuration settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Configurations . You can receive messages from your service provider or company information ma nagement containing configuration settings for trust ed servers. These sett ings are automatic ally saved in the Co nf igurations folder. You may receive configuration settings for access points, multimedia, or e-mail services, and synchr onisation settings from trusted servers. To delete configu rations fo r a trusted serv er, select Options > Delete . The configuration settings for other applications provided by this server are also deleted. Restrict packet data Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > APN control . With the access poin t control se rvice, you can restrict packet data connections from your device to cert ain access points only. Your SIM card may not support the access point control service. Contact your service provider for more information. To restrict the packet data connections from your device, select Options > Activate restrictions . You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate access point con trol or to edit the packet data access p oints on the control list. To add access points that ca n be used for packet data connections to the control list, select Options > Add name manually . To enable connections to an operator-provided access point, create an empty access point. To remove access points from the list, select O ptions > Remove . Application settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Applicat ions . Select an application from th e list to adjust its setting s. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 120
Shortcuts Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in your device. Shortcuts can m ake th e use of the applications more efficient. General shortcuts General shortcuts Power key Press and hold to switch your device on and off. Press once to switch between profiles. Home screen Left selection key function key Lock and unlock the keypad. Call key Open the call log. 0 Press and hold to open your home p age in the Web browser. 1 Press and hold to call your voice mailbox. Number key (2âÂÂ9) Call a phone number using speed dialling. You must first activate speed dialling at Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On . Web * Zoom in the page. # Zoom out the page. 2 Open the search dialog. 5 View the active pages. 8 View the page overview. 9 Open the dialog for entering a new web address. 0 Open the bookmarks folder. Image viewer Call key Send the image. 0 Zoom out. 5 Zoom in. 7 Zoom in. Press twice for the full screen size. 4 Scroll left in the zoomed image. 6 Scroll right in the zoomed image. 2 Scroll up in the zoomed image. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 121
8 Scroll down in the zoomed image. 3 Rotate clockwise. 1 Rotate counte rclockwise. * Switch between the fu ll screen size and normal view. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 122
Glossary Glossary 3G 3rd generation mobile communications. A digital system for mo bile communi cations which aims at glo bal use and provides increased bandwidth. 3G lets a mobile device user access a wide variety of services, such as multimedia. Ad-hoc operating mode A WLAN network mode where two or more devices connect to each other using WLAN directly without a WLAN access point. Cookies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the server to you, to store information about your vis its to a web site. When you accept cookies, the server is able to evaluate your use of the web s ite, what you are interested in, w hat you want to read, and so on. DNS D omain name service. An internet service that trans lates domain names such as www.nokia.com into IP addresses such as 192.100.124.195 . Domain names are easier to remember but this translation is needed because the internet is based on IP addresses. DTMF tones Dual-tone multifrequen cy tones. The DTMF system is used by touch-tone telephones. DTMF assigns a specific freque ncy, or tone, t o e a c h k e y s o t h a t i t can easily be identified by a microprocess or. DTMF tones allo w you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised teleph ony systems, and so on. EAP Extensible authentica tion p rotocol. EAP plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authentication se rvers. EGPRS Enhanced GPRS. EGPRS is similar to GPRS, but it enables fast er connection. For availability and da ta transfer speed, contact your service provider. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 123
GPRS General packet radio se rvice. GPRS enables wireless access for mobile phones to data networks (network service). GPRS uses packet data technology where information is sent in short bursts of data over the mobile network. The benefit of sending data in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiving data. As GPRS uses the network efficiently, it allows for quick da ta conn ection s etup and fast data transmiss ion speeds. You must subscribe to the GPRS service. For availability and su bscription to GP RS, contact your service provider. During a voice call, yo u cannot establish a GPRS connection, and any existing GPRS connection is put on hold unless the network supports du al transfer mode. GPS Global positioning system. GPS is a worldwide radio navigat ion system. HTTP Hypertext t ransfer protocol. A document transfer protocol used in the web. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. IMAP4 Internet mail access protocol, version 4. A protocol used for accessing your remote mailbox. Internet access point An access point is where your device connects to a network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to connect to the internet and browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Infrastructure operating mode A WLAN network mode where devices are connected to WLAN using a WL AN access point . PIN Personal identity number. The PIN code protects your device from unaut horised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN cod e request is selected, the code is required each time the device is switched on. The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain function s supported by the SIM card. The length of the PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digits. POP3 Post office protocol, version 3. A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing your remote mailbox. PUK and PUK2 Personal Unblocking Key. PUK and PUK2 codes are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. The length of the code is 8 digits. SIP Session Initiation Prot ocol. SIP is used for creating, modifying, and terminating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 124
SSID Service set identifier. SSID is the name that identifies the specific WLAN. Streaming Streaming audio and video files means playing them directly from the web without downloading them first to your device. UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System. UM TS is a 3G mobile communication system. B esides voice and data, UMTS enables audio and video delivery to wireless devices. When you use your devi ce in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, an d access points can share a data connection. I n the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can, for example, browse the web faster than previously possible while simultan eously speaking on the phone. UPIN PIN code used in UMTS network. UPUK UPIN Unblocking Key. UPUK code is required to change a blocked UPIN code or PIN2 co de. The length of the code is 8 digits. USIM SIM card used in UMTS network. USSD command A service request, such as request to activate an application or configure various settings remotely, th at you can sen d to your operator or service provider with your device. VoIP Voice over IP technology. VoIP is a set of protocols that facilitate phone calls over an IP network, such as th e internet. VPN Virtual private network. VPN crea tes a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, such as e-ma il. WAP Wireless application protocol. WAP is an international stan dard for wireless communication. WEP Wired equivalent p rivacy. WEP is an encryption method that encryp ts data before it is transmitted in WLAN. WLAN Wireless local area network. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access. Security me thod for WLAN. WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access 2. Security meth od for WLAN. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 125
Nokia original accessories Warning: Use only batter ies, chargers, and accessories approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalida te any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. In pa rticular, use of unapproved chargers or batteries may pres ent a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. For availability of approved accessories, check with your dealer. An extensive range of accessories is available for your device. For more details, see www.nokia-asia. com/ accessories. Practical rules about accessories ⢠Keep all accessories out of the reach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect the po wer cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. ⢠Check regularly that accessories installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly. ⢠Installation of any complex car accessories must be made by qualified personnel only. Battery Type Talk time Standby BP-4L Up to 4 hours 30 minutes / 11 hours (WCDMA/ GSM) Up to 20 days / 17 days (WCDMA/ GSM) Important: Battery talk and stand-by times are estimates an d only poss ib le under optimal network conditions. Actual battery talk and standby times depend on SIM cards, features used, battery age and conditio n, temperatures to which battery is exposed, network conditions, and many other fact ors, and may be significantly shorter than those specified ab ove. Ringing tones, hands free call handling, use in digital mo de, and ot her features will also consume the battery, and the amount of time a device is used for calls will affect its stand-by time. L ikewise, the am ount of time that the device is turn ed on and in the standby mode will affect its talk time. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 126
Troubleshooting To see frequent ly asked questions about your device, visit the product support pages at the Nokia web site. Q: What is my lock, PIN, or PUK code? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you ha ve not received such a code, contact your network service provider. Q: How do I clo se an application that is no t responding? A: Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, an d press the backspace key to close the application. Q: Why do images look smudg y? A: Ensure that the camera len s protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I switch on my device? A: This is a characteristic of th is type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots tha t remain on or off. This is normal, not a fa ult. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connectivity? A: Check that both devices are compat ible, have activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in the hidden mode. Check also that the distance between t he two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I en d a Bluetooth connectio n? A: If another device is connecte d to your device, you can end the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Select Menu > Connectivi ty > Bluetooth > Bluetoot h > Off . Q: Why can't I se e a WLAN access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: Check that the Offline profile is not in use in your device. The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can on ly access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID, and have created a WLAN access point for the network on your Nokia device Check that the WLAN access p oint is not on channels 12-1 3, as they cannot be associat ed with. Q: How do I sw itch WLAN off on my Nok ia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device s witches off when you are not trying to con nect, not connected to anoth er access point, or not scanning for availabl e networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can sp ecify that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for avai lable networks in the background. WLAN switches off in between background scans. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 127
To stop the background scans, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wi reless LAN > Sho w WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLAN networks and con nect to WLAN net works as usual. To increase the background scan interval, select Show WLAN availability > Yes , and define the interva l in Scan for networks . Q: Why can't I browse th e web even though the WLAN connection is working and the IP settings are correct? A: Check that you have define d the HTTP/ HTTPS prox y settings correctly in the advanc ed settings of your WLAN access point. Q: How do I check the si gnal quality of my WL AN connection ? Select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. > Active data connections > Options > Detail s . If the signal quality is weak or moderate, you may encounter connection problems. Try again closer to the a ccess point. Q: Why do I have prob lems with the security mode? A: Check that you have configured th e security mode correctly, and that it is the same that the network uses. T o check the security mode the network uses, select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. > Active data co nnecti ons > Options > Details . Check also the following: you ha ve the correct WPA mode (preshared key or EAP), you ha ve disabled all EAP typ es that are not needed, and all the EAP type settings are correct (passwords, user names, certificates). Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a con tact for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an address, or an e- mail address. Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts , and edit the contact card. Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to re trieve a mult imedia message from the multimedia messaging centre . This note is shown if you have selected Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimed ia message > Multimedia retrieval > Always a utomatic . Check that the settings for multimedia messag ing are defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. See "Multimedi a message settings", p. 57 . Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message ce ntre. To stop the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multim edia message > Multimedia re trieval > Manual to ha ve the multimedia messaging centre sa ve messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia m essages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when there is a new multimedia message that you ca n retrieve in the multimedia message ce ntre. If you s elect Off , the device does not make any network connection s related to multimedia messaging. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 128
To set the device to use a pa cket data connection only if you start an applicati on or action that needs it, se lect Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet dat a > Packet data connection > When needed . If this does not help, s witch th e device off, and switch it on again. Q: How do I save battery p ower? A: Many features in your de vice increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, do the following: ⢠Switch off Bluetooth when you do not need it. ⢠Stop the back ground scans fo r WLAN. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connec tion > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN av ailability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLAN networks and conn ect to WLAN networks as usual. ⢠Set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Conn ection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . ⢠Prevent the device from automatically downloadin g new maps in the Maps application. Select Menu > GPS > Maps > Options > Tools > Settings > Internet > Go online at start-up > No . ⢠Change the time-out after which the backlig ht is switched off. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display > Light time-out . ⢠Close the applications you do not use. Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, and press the backspace key to c lose the application. Product and safety information Battery Battery and charger information Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. Th e battery intended for use with this device is BP-4L . Nokia may make additional battery models av ailable for this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the following chargers: AC-8. The exact charger model number may vary depending on th e type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 129
standby times are noticeably shorter tha n normal, replace the battery. Use only N okia approved batteries, an d recharge your battery on ly with Nokia ap proved chargers desig nated for this device. If a battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been us ed for a prolonge d period, it may be nec essary to connect the charger, then disconn ect and reconnect it to begin charging the ba ttery. If the battery is complet ely discharged, it may take severa l minutes before t he charging indicator appears on the displa y or before any calls can be made. Safe removal. Always switch th e device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Proper charg ing. Unp lug the ch arger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overch arging may shorten its lifetime. If left u nused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Avoid extreme temperatures. Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme temperatures redu ce the capacity a nd lifetime of the ba ttery. A device with a hot or cold ba ttery may not work temporarily. Battery performance is particul arly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not short-circuit. Accident al short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the po sitive ( ) and negat ive (-) terminals of the battery . (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happ en, fo r example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals ma y damage the batter y or the connecting object. Disposal. Do not dispose of batt eries in a fire as they m ay explode. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Leak. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, puncture, or shred cells or batteries . In the event of a battery leak, prevent battery liquid contact with the skin or eyes. If this happens, flush the affected areas imme diately with water, or seek medical help. Damage. Do not modify, remanu facture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, or immerse or expose it to water or other liquids. Batt eries may explode if damaged. Correct use. Use the battery on ly for its intended purpose. Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and you believe the battery has been damaged, take it to a service centre for inspection before continuing to use it. Never use a ny charger or batt ery that is damaged. Keep your battery out of the reach of small children. Important: Talk and standby tim es are estimates only. Actual performance depends on many factors such as network conditions, device sett ings selected, device features being used (or running in the background), battery condition and ambient temperature. Making calls wit h the device affects the standby time and the amount of time in standby mode affects the talk time. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 130
Taking care of your device Your device is a product of su perior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitati on, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals tha t will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry comp letely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in high or cold temperature. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plast ics. When the device warms to its normal temperature from a cold temperature, moisture can fo rm inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the dev ice other than as ins tructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device . Only use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean the surface of the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved . 131
⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauth orised antennas, modifications, or attachments could da mage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, su ch as contacts and calendar notes. ⢠To reset the devi ce from time to time for op timum performance, power off the device and remove the battery . These suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any accessory. Recycle Always return your used elec tronic products, batteries, and packaging materials to dedicated collection points. This w ay you help prevent uncontrolled waste disposal and promote the recycling of materials. Check product environmental information and how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/werecycle, or nokia.mobi/ werecycle. Additional safety information Small children Your device and its accessories are not toys. They may contain small parts. Keep th em out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines in the normal use position at the ear or at leas t 2.2 centimetres (7/8 inch) away from the body. Any carry case, belt clip, or holder for body- worn operation should not cont ain metal and should position the device the above-stated dis tance from your body. To send data files or messages requires a quality connection to the network. Data files or mess ages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Follow the separation distance instructions until the tran smission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Meta llic materials may be attracted to the device. Do no t place credit cards or other magnetic st orage media near th e device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of radio transmit ting equipment, inc luding wireless phones, may interf ere with the function of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physicia n or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine whether they are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Switch off your devi ce when regulations posted instruct you to do so. Hospita ls or health care facilities may use equipment sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical de vices re commend a minimum separation of 15.3 centimetre s (6 inches) between a wireless device and an implanted medica l device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 132
interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) from the medical device. ⢠Not carry the wireless devi ce in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical devic e. ⢠Turn the wireless device off if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking p lace. ⢠Follow the manufacturer dire ctions for the implanted medical device. If you have any questions about u sing your wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult you r health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. Vehicles RF signals may affect improper ly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection, electronic antilock braking, electronic speed control, an d air bag systems. For more information, check with the manu facturer of your vehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate your wa rranty. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or exp los ive materials in the same compartment as the device, its p arts, or accessories. Remember that air bags inflate wi th g reat force. Do not place your device or accessories in the air bag deployment area. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an airc raft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device in any ar ea with a potentially explos ive atmosphere. Obey all posted instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Switch off the device at refue lling points such as near gas pumps a t service station s. Observe restri ctions in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plan ts; or where blasting operations ar e in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere a re often, but not always, clearly marked. They include areas where you would be advised to turn off your vehicle engine, below deck on boats, chemical trans fer or storage facilities and where the air contains chemicals or pa rticles such as grain, dust, or meta l powders. You should check with the ma nufacturers of vehicles using liquefied petr oleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determin e if this devi ce can be safely used in their vicinity. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 133
Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landline ne tworks, and user-pro grammed functions. If your device suppo rts voice calls over the internet (internet calls), a ctivate both t he internet call s and the cellular phone. The device ma y attempt to make emergency calls over both the cellular networks and through your internet call provider if both ar e activated. Connection s in all conditions cannot be guaran teed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. De pending on your device, you may also need to complete the following: ⢠Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. ⢠Remove certain call restrictions you ha ve activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile from Offli ne or Flight profile to an active profile. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. When making an emergency ca ll, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of a n accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile d evice meets guidelines f or exposure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limi ts for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the indepe ndent scientific organisation ICNIRP and include safe ty margins designed to assu re the protection of all persons, re gardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mo bile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the IC NIRP guid elines is 2. 0 watt s/ kilogram (W/kg) average d over 10 grams of tissue. Tes ts for SAR are conducted us ing standard operating p ositions with the device transm itting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual S AR level of an operating device can be below the maximum va lue because the device is designed to use on ly the p ower required to reach the network. That a mount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close yo u are to a network base station . The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear i s 1.03 W/kg. Use of device accessories may re sult in different SAR values. SAR values may vary dependin g on national reporting and testing requirements and the network ban d. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 134
Index Symbols/Numbers 3-D ringing tones 86 802.1x security settin gs 117 A access points creating 115 VPN 109 activation keys 107 Active n otes 87 settings 87 alarm clock 91 alert ton es 112 altitude calibrat ion 71 animated screen saver 85 antennas 1 6 application set tings 1 20 application s common actions 21 installing 105 modifying installations 105 attachments e-mail 47 multimedia messages 52 sound cl ips 52 audio files details 80 sending 80 autolock period 114 B background image 85 backing up data 104 battery charge level 20 charging 15 inserting 14 blogs 62 Blueto oth authorising devices 95 pairing 95 passcode 95 receiving data 94 security 96 sending data 94 bookmarks 62 browsing intranet 63 offline 62 web 61 C cable 93 cache emptying 62 Calculator 87 Calendar settings 27 calendar entries creating 27 viewing 26 calendar key 26 calendar views changing 26 call barring 37 net calls 37 call divert 36 caller ID 11 4 calls answering 32 barring net calls 37 call waiting 114 caller ID 114 conference call 32 fixed dialling 102 making 32 making a call from Log 42 making a net call 35 muting the ringing ton e 32 net call alert 114 PTT 40 rejecting 32 rejecting with text message 114 selecting type 114 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 135
settings 114 speed dialling 36 voice commands 39 voice dialling 39 voice ma il 38 camera capturing images 73 recording video clips 73 settings 74 car kit remote SIM access 96 cell broadcast 56 settings 59 certificates details 103 settings 103 charging the battery 15 Clock alarms 9 1 settings 91 world clock 91 computer connections 93 See also data connections conference calls 32 configuration messages 1 20 connection methods Bluetooth 94 data cable 93 connections ending 99 GPRS settings 63, 64 PC connection 65 WLAN settings 64 connectors 12 contact groups adding ringing tones 28 creating 28 making conference calls 28 contacts adding 28 adding ringing tones 28 searching 28 settings 28 contacts directories managing 28 contacts key 2 5 converting currencies 89 measurements 89 currency conversions 89 D data connections PC connectivity 93 date settings 113 decrypting device memory and memory card 102 destination removing 71 setting 71 Device manager 9 display changing the look 85 indicators 20 settings 111 DTMF tones 37 E e-mail 4 6 automatic retrieval settings 59 connecting to mailbox 47 connection settings 58 creating folders 4 8 deleting 48 POP or IMAP 46 replying 47 retrieval settings 59 sending 4 8 setting up 46 user settings 58 writing 48 e-mail key 26 e-mail key se ttings 113 EAP plug-in se ttings 118 using an EAP plug-in 118 encrypting device memory and memory card 102 ending internet connections 62 network connectio ns 99 enhancements remote SIM access 96 settings 113 equaliser 77 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 136
F feeds 62 File manage r 88 files downloading 78 flash files 80 sending 8 8 fixed dialling 102 flashlight 29 free memory 100 G Gallery 78 GPRS access point settings 63 advanced access point settings 64 settings 116 H headset connecting 16 home key 2 5 home screen 24 settings 85, 112 switching 25 I IM application settings 55 blocking users 55 groups 5 4 settings 53 starting a conversa tion 54 images adding to contacts 79 display background 79 rotating 78 sending 79 sharing online 77 zooming 78 indicators 20 inserting battery 14 memory card 15 SIM card 14 installation log 105 installing applications 105 internet 61 ending connections 62 internet calls 35 Internet radio listening 82 saving stations 82 searching 82 settings 83 intranet browsing 63 J jad files 105 jar files 105 Java applications 105, 106 K key store 104 keyguard 22 keypad lock settings 114 locking 22 tones 112 keys 12 activation keys 107 shortcuts 112 WEP keys 117 L landmarks categories 72 creating 72 editing 72 receiving 72 sending 7 2 language settings 112 lock code 100, 114 locking device 100 device autolock 114 keypad 22, 114 Log 41 adding numbers to Co ntacts 42 deleting 42 making a call 42 sending messag es 4 2 settings 42 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 137
transfer log 20 logos welcome logo 111 M Mail for Exchange 46 mailboxes connecting 47 creating 46 making a call 32 Maps 67 browsing 68 driving 70 finding locations 68 indicators 68 routes 69 traffic information 70 travel guides 70 walking 6 9 measurements converting 89 measuring system changing 71 memory 100 memory card backing up data 104 ejecting 15 formatting 101 inserting 15 locking 101 microSD 101 passwords 101 setting password 88, 101 unlocking 101 menu 18 message reader 44 selecting voice 44 message s 43 call rejection messages 114 cell broadcast settings 59 configuration messages 120 other settings 59 sending sound clips 52 service messages 56 text message settings 57 Messaging folders 43, 44 microS DHC 101 modem 65 multimedia messages attachments 52 creating 50 creating presentations 51 forwarding 52 receiving 51 replying to 51 sending 50 sending options 53 settings 57 multitas king 29 Music player Music Sto re 76 playing 75 playlists 76 Music Store 76 N net calls 35 alert settings 114 barring 3 7 connecting 35 making a call 35 profiles 34, 120 settings 120 network settings 115 Nokia original accessories 126 Nokia Ovi Player 76 Nokia support info rmation 9 Notes 9 2 notification light 112 O One-touch keys 112 operator selecting 115 original settings 114 Ovi 29 Ovi Contacts 30 Ovi Files 29 Ovi Store 29 P packet data access point settings 63 advanced access point settings 64 restricting 120 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 138
settings 116 pairing devices 95 passcode 95 passwords memory card pa ssword 88, 101 PDF reader 89 personalisat ion 8 5 changing language 112 display 111 home screen 112 tones 112 picture message s forwarding 50 viewing 49 PIN code changing 114 playing messages 44 recordings 78 video and audio 79 podcasting 74 directories 74 searching 75 settings 75 positioning settings 67 predict ive text inpu t 23, 112 presentations 51 printer settings 90 printing 90 profiles creating 84 customising 84 net call profile 34, 120 selecting ringing tones 84 PTT contacts 41 created calls 40 creating a channel 41 exiting 41 logging in 40 making a call 40 settings 40 R radio listening to 81 saved stations 81 settings 81 viewing visual content 81 RealPlayer playing media clips 79 sending files 80 settings 80 viewing clip details 80 recorder playing recordings 78 recording a sound clip 77 settings 78 recording sound clips 77 video clips 73 remote configuration 9 remote lock 100 remote synchronisation 108 restoring origi nal settings 114 ringing tones 112 3-D 86 contacts and contact g roups 28 in profiles 84 vibrating aler t 112 S satellite si gnal strength 71 saving current position 71 files 21 settings 21 screen saver 85, 111 search modes switching 28 searching available WLANs 99 security Bluetooth 96 device and SIM card 114 Java app lication 106 memory card 101 security module 104 sending files 21, 88 using Bluetooth 94 videos 33 service commands 56 service messages 56 settings 59 session in itiation prot ocol See SIP é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 139
settings Active notes 87 advanced WLAN 116 application installations 105 applications 120 Calendar 27 calls 114 camera 74 cell broadcast 59 certificate 103 clock 91 contacts 28 date 113 display 111 e-mail connection 58 e-mail key 113 e-mail retrieval 59 e-mail user 5 8 EAP plug-ins 118 enhancements 113 GPRS 63, 64, 116 home screen 112 IM 53 Internet radio 83 Java application security 106 keypad lock 114 language 112 Log 42 multimedia messages 57 net call 120 network 115 packet data 116 podcast ing 7 5 positioning 67 printer 90 PTT 40 radio 81 RealPlayer 80 recorder 78 restoring 114 service messages 59 SIP 118 text messages 57 time 113 tones 112 voice commands 39 web 62 WEP security 117 WLAN 116 WLAN access point 64, 65 WLAN security 117 Settings wizard 17 shortcuts 121 keys 112 signal strength 20 SIM access profile 96 SIM card inserting 14 text messages 49 SIP creating profiles 11 8 editing profiles 119 editing proxy servers 119 editing registration servers 119 settings 118 sis files 105 sisx files 105 software packages installation settings 105 installing 105 software updat es 10 sound clips recording 77 sending 5 2 Speech 44 speed di alling 36 standby mode settings 112 support 9 switching device on and off 17 Symbian applicat ions 105 synchronisation 20 settings 108 synchronisation profiles 108 synchronising applications 108 T tabs 21 text changing size 111 predictive input 23 writing 23 text messages messages on SIM card 49 sending 4 8 sending options 49 settings 57 writing 48 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 140
themes changing 85 downloading 86 time settings 113 tones 112 settings 112 Transfer log 20 transferring data 19 transferring music 76 trip destinat ion 7 1 trip meter 71 troubleshootin g 12 7 U updates 1 0 UPIN code changing 114 USB data cable 93 V vibrating alert 112 video calls making a call 33 switching to voice call 33 video clips 73 details 80 playing 79 sending 8 0 video sharin g 33 receiving invitations 34 virtual privat e netwo rk access points 109 use in applications 110 Voice aid 38 voice comm ands changing profiles 39 launching an application 39 settings 39 voice mail calling 38 changing nu mber 3 8 voice ov er IP 35 VoIP 35 volume 23 VPN access points 109 use in applications 110 W wallpaper 7 9 warning tones 112 Web connection security 61 web settings 62 weblogs 62 Welcome applicat ion 1 7 welcome not e 111 WEP keys 117 security settings 117 wireless keyboard 92 WLAN 802.1x security settings 117 access point settings 64 access points 98 advanced access point settings 65 advanced settings 116 availability 97 MAC address 97, 116 searching for networks 99 security settin gs 117 settings 116 WEP keys 117 WPA security set tings 118 WLAN wizard 98 world clock 91 WPA security set tings 118 writing 23 Z Zip manager 89 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 141